Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual

Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 1 of 208
J Ji im mm ma a U Un ni iv ve er rs si it ty y
C Co ol ll le eg ge e o of f A Ag gr ri ic cu ul lt tu ur re e a an nd d V Ve et te er ri in na ar ry y M Me ed di ic ci in ne e
C Co om mp pu ut te er r C Ce en nt te er r a an nd d I IC CT T D Di iv vi is si io on n


A
A
T
T
r
r
a
a
i
i
n
n
i
i
n
n
g
g
M
M
a
a
n
n
u
u
a
a
l
l

O On n
I
I
n
n
t
t
r
r
o
o
d
d
u
u
c
c
t
t
i
i
o
o
n
n
t
t
o
o
C
C
o
o
m
m
p
p
u
u
t
t
e
e
r
r
,
,

M Mi ic cr ro os so of ft t W Wi in nd do ow ws s, ,
A Ap pp pl li ic ca at ti io on n S So of ft tw wa ar re e
&
&
H
H
o
o
w
w
t
t
o
o
u
u
s
s
e
e
I
I
n
n
t
t
e
e
r
r
n
n
e
e
t
t





O Oc ct to ob be er r, , 2 20 00 09 9
J JU UC CA AV VM M







Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 2 of 208
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER-------------------------------------------------------------- 8
1.1. What is a Computer?------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8
1.2. Distinguishing Features of Computers ----------------------------------------------------------------- 8
1.3. Computer Hardware ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9
1.3.1. Organization of the Computer Hardware------------------------------------------------------------------------------9
1.4. Software ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15
1.4.1. Types of Software --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15
1.5. Operating Systems -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16
CHAPTER 2: MICROSOFT WINDOWS----------------------------------------------------------------------- 17
2.1. User Interface ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17
2.2. Logging into Your Computer -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17
2.3. The Windows Desktop --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 18
2.4. Using Windows Explorer ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 19
2.5. Internet Option ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34
CHAPTER 3: INTRODUCTION TO MICROSOFT WORD --------------------------------------------------- 35
3.1. Anatomy of Word Screen ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 36
3.2. Different Views of the Document --------------------------------------------------------------------- 37
3.3. Formatting----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 39
3.3.1. Character Formatting----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 40
3.3.2. Paragraph Formatting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 42
3.3.3. Page Formatting----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 48
3.4. Table of Contents --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 51
3.5. Headers and Footers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 52
3.6. Spelling and Grammar Checking ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 54
3.7. Tables and Columns ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 57
3.7.1. Tables ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 57
3.7.2. Columns ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 64
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 3 of 208
3.7.3. Drop Cap ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 65
3.7.4. Graphics and Text Boxes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 66
3.8. Working with Multiple Documents------------------------------------------------------------------- 66
3.9. Inserting AutoText ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 67
3.10. Insert Files ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 67
3.11. Use AutoRecover --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 68
3.12. Finding and Replacing Formatting-------------------------------------------------------------------- 68
3.13. Adding a Watermark ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 69
3.14. Creating Footnotes or Endnotes ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 70
3.15. Creating a Bookmark----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 71
3.16. Creating a Table of Figures----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 72
3.17. Numbering Heading Styles----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 73
3.18. Apply Numbering to Custom Heading Styles -------------------------------------------------------- 74
12.1. Numbering Lines ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 75
12.2. Creating an Equation ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 75
12.3. Creating Mail Merge Documents---------------------------------------------------------------------- 76
12.4. Creating Documents Using Automatic Formatting -------------------------------------------------- 77
12.5. Inserting Comments ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 77
12.6. Creating a Form----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 78
12.7. Printing -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 78
12.7.1. Editing Text in Print Preview-------------------------------------------------------------------------- 79
12.7.2. To Print a Document:----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 79



Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 4 of 208
CHAPTER 4: INTRODUCTION TO MICROSOFT EXCEL ---------------------------------------------------- 81
Switching between sheets ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 81
4.2.1. Data Entry ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 81
Moving the Cell pointer --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 82
4.2.2. Working with a Worksheet --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 83
Select the worksheet ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 84
4.2.3. Exiting Excel --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 84
4.3.1. Types of series ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 85
4.3.2. Creating a Series----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 86
4.3.3. Moving and Copying Data and Formats ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 87
4.4.1. Inserting Cells, Columns and Rows------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 90
4.4.2. Clearing and Deleting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 90
4.4.3. Find and Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91
4.5.1. Formatting the Appearance of Data-------------------------------------------------------------------- 92
4.5.2. Aligning Worksheet Data ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 93
4.5.3. Formatting Borders and Shading----------------------------------------------------------------------- 93
4.6.1. Entering Database Information----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 95
4.6.2. Sorting a Database -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 95
4.6.3. Filtering a List-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 96
4.6.4. Data Forms ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 99
4.7.1. Cell References -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------101
4.7.2. Worksheet Functions----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------103
4.8.1. Creating a Chart ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------107
4.8.2. Parts of a Chart -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------108
4.8.3. Working with Chart and Chart Items --------------------------------------------------------------------------109
CHAPTER 5: MICROSOFT ACCESS--------------------------------------------------------------------------112
5.1. What is a Database? ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------112
5.1.1. Starting Microsoft Access 2003 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------112
5.1.2. The Microsoft Access 2003 Screen-------------------------------------------------------------------------------113
5.1.3. Using Help ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------115
5.2. Designing and Creating Databases -------------------------------------------------------------------116
5.2.1. Designing a Database----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------116
5.2.2. Creating a Database------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------116
5.2.3. Creating Tables -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------117
5.3. Organizing your Data ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------125
5.3.1. Filtering Records---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------125
5.3.2. Entering Criteria ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------126
5.3.3. The AND and OR Relations --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------127
5.3.4. Inserting Column or Row ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------127
5.3.5. Deleting Column or Row-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------127
5.3.6. Removing a Filter --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------128
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 5 of 208
5.3.7. Saving a Filter as a Query -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------128
5.3.8. Copying and Moving Microsoft Access Objects or Text----------------------------------------------------128
5.3.9. Printing a Datasheet -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------129
5.3.10. Renaming a Database Object-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------130
5.4. Queries--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------131
5.4.1. Types of Queries----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------131
5.4.2. Creating a Query with a Wizard---------------------------------------------------------------------------------132
5.4.3. Creating a Custom Designed Query ----------------------------------------------------------------------------132
5.4.4. Expressions in Queries and Filters ------------------------------------------------------------------------------134
5.4.5. Creating Select Query ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------135
5.4.6. Creating Make table Query --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------135
5.4.7. Creating an Update Query ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------136
5.4.8. Creating an Append Query---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------137
5.4.9. Using a Calculated Field in a Query ----------------------------------------------------------------------------137
5.4.10. Editing a Query-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------138
5.5. Forms----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------139
5.5.1. Types of Form Views-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------139
5.5.2. Creating A Quick form--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------139
5.5.3. Creating A Form Using A Wizard -------------------------------------------------------------------------------139
5.5.4. Creating A Custom Designed Form-----------------------------------------------------------------------------140
5.5.5. Making a Form Read-Only ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------141
5.5.6. Creating a Form with multiple Screens or pages -------------------------------------------------------------142
5.5.7. Adding a Label and Editing Label Text-------------------------------------------------------------------------142
5.5.8. Changing the Appearance of Text ------------------------------------------------------------------------------143
5.6. Reports -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------144
5.6.1. Generating a Quick Report---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------144
5.6.2. Generating a Report using a Wizard ---------------------------------------------------------------------------144
5.6.3. Generating a Custom Designed Report ------------------------------------------------------------------------145
5.6.4. Changing a Form or Report's Underlying Table or Query -------------------------------------------------145
5.6.5. Creating a Sub report----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------146
5.6.6. Changing the Layout of a Subform or Subreport-------------------------------------------------------------147
5.6.7. Sorting and Grouping Data in Reports-------------------------------------------------------------------------148
5.6.8. Changing Sorting and Grouping Order ------------------------------------------------------------------------149
5.6.9. Hiding Duplicate Data on a Report-----------------------------------------------------------------------------150
5.6.10. Adding or Removing Headers and Footers on a Report ----------------------------------------------------151
5.6.11. Sizing Sections in a Form or Report ----------------------------------------------------------------------------152
5.6.12. Adding page Numbers to a Form or Report-------------------------------------------------------------------152
5.6.13. Adding the Current Date and Time to a Form or Report ---------------------------------------------------153
5.6.14. Drawing Lines and Rectangles on Forms and Reports ------------------------------------------------------154
5.6.15. Previewing a Report-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------154
6.1. Introduction To Power Point -------------------------------------------------------------------------156
6.2. Starting PowerPoint -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------156
6.3. Creating a Desktop Shortcut for PowerPoint -------------------------------------------------------157
6.1 Exiting PowerPoint ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------158
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 6 of 208
6.4. Understanding PowerPoint Views -------------------------------------------------------------------159
6.4.1. Changing to a Different View------------------------------------------------------------------------------------160
6.4.2. Working with Toolbars -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------162
6.4.3. Moving a Toolbar --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------162
6.4.4. Turning off the Personalized Menus Feature -----------------------------------------------------------------163
6.5. Using the AutoContent Wizard-----------------------------------------------------------------------164
6.6. Starting a New Presentation using a Template ------------------------------------------------------165
6.7. Starting a Blank Presentation-------------------------------------------------------------------------166
6.8. Printing the Presentation -----------------------------------------------------------------------------167
6.9. Working with Presentation Files ---------------------------------------------------------------------167
6.10. Displaying Outline View ------------------------------------------------------------------------------169
6.1.1 Outlining a Presentation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------170
6.11. Inserting Slides from another Presentation ---------------------------------------------------------174
6.12. Editing Text --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------175
6.1.2 Selecting Text ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------175
6.1.3 Revising Text-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------176
6.13. Using the Replace Feature ----------------------------------------------------------------------------177
6.14. Spell Checking the Presentation----------------------------------------------------------------------178
6.15. Using the Research Tools -----------------------------------------------------------------------------178
6.16. Using the Thesaurus -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------179
6.17. Using Other Research Tools --------------------------------------------------------------------------179
6.18. Working with Slides in Slide Sorter View -----------------------------------------------------------180
6.18.1. Selecting Slides -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------180
6.18.2. Inserting a Slide ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------180
6.18.3. Duplicating a Slide-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------181
6.18.4. Moving a Slide------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------181
6.18.5. Deleting Slides------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------181
6.19. Changing the Design Template -----------------------------------------------------------------------182
6.20. Changing the Color Scheme---------------------------------------------------------------------------182
6.21. Working with Masters---------------------------------------------------------------------------------184
6.22. Changing Text Formatting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------184
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 7 of 208
6.23. Working with Footers and Special Placeholders----------------------------------------------------185
6.24. Applying a Slide Background-------------------------------------------------------------------------186
6.25. Using Slide Transitions --------------------------------------------------------------------------------187
6.26. Applying an Animation Scheme ----------------------------------------------------------------------188
6.27. Creating Custom Animation --------------------------------------------------------------------------189
6.28. Publishing the Presentation in Web Format ---------------------------------------------------------192
7.1. Internet Explorer --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------193
7.2. Mozilla Firefox -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------193
7.3. Safari------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------194
7.4. Opera-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------195
7.5. Netscape Navigator/Netscape -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------195
8.1. Getting Started-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------196
8.2. Using Internet Explorer 7 Overview-----------------------------------------------------------------198
8.3. Tabbed browsing overview---------------------------------------------------------------------------199
8.4. To change your home page ---------------------------------------------------------------------------199
8.5. To add a new search provider (search engine)------------------------------------------------------200
8.6. To remove a search provider (search engine) -------------------------------------------------------201
8.7. To restore default settings in order to prevent IE7 crashes ----------------------------------------201
8.8. To fix error "SSL certificate REV failed [12057]"----------------------------------------------------202
8.9. To empty the Temporary Internet Files folder (cache)---------------------------------------------202
8.10. To clear the browsing history-------------------------------------------------------------------------203
8.11. To save a picture from a webpage --------------------------------------------------------------------203
8.12. To save a webpage onto your computer -------------------------------------------------------------203
8.13. To open the webpage that you have saved ----------------------------------------------------------204
8.14. To make WebPages load without images or sounds ------------------------------------------------205

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 8 of 208
Chapter 1: Introduction to Computer
1.1. What is a Computer?
A computer is an electronic data processing machine that is designed to accept and
store data, process the data to produce useful information under the direction of
step-by-step instructions, called programs. The physical part of the computer is
called Hardware and the instructions are Software.
1.2. Distinguishing Features of Computers
1. Memory (Storage): Computers can store data so that it can be retrieved
whenever needed.
2. Programmability: The Computer can do virtually everything provided
that it is given the correct set of instruction. This feature of computers is
Programmability.
3. Speed: modern computers can process billions of instructions per second.
4. Accuracy: Computers are extremely accurate. Erroneous results may
occur due to human rather than technological weakness.
5. Versatility (General Purpose): If given the correct instructions.
Computers can do virtually everything.
6. Diligence (Tirelessness): If there are billions of instructions to be
processed. Computers process the first and the last instruction with the
same speed and accuracy.


Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 9 of 208
1.3. Computer Hardware
The physical component of a computer system that can be seen, touched and felt;
placed inside the system or outside make up the hardware.
1.3.1. Organization of the Computer Hardware







Input device
Data and instructions must enter the computer before any computation can be
performed on the supplied data. The unit that links the external environment with
the computer system performs this task. In short, the input unit performs the
following functions.
+ It accepts (reads) the list of instructions and data from the outside
world.
+ It converts these instructions and data in a computer acceptable form.
+ It supplies the converted instructions and data to the computer system
for processing.
There are different categories of input devices. The widely used Input devices include
keyboard, mouse, scanner and etc.




Control Arithmetic
Unit Logic unit

Register
Memory
Input
Device
Output
Device
Secondary
Storage
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 10 of 208
Keyboard
A computer keyboard is an electromechanical component designed to create
special standardized electronic codes when a key is pressed. Keyboards come in
a variety of sizes and shapes but most keyboards have common layouts:
1. Standardized typewriter keys: A-Z, 0-9, ?, “, etc.
2. Function keys / programmable keys: F1through F12
3. Special - purpose keys: Alt, Ctrl, pause, etc
4. Cursor movement keys (arrow keys): Page up, Page down, Home, End,
÷,¬,^,+
5. Numeric keys: located at the right side of the keyboard
Keyboard layout and Data Entry

Enter Or Return - Moves The Cursor Down One Line And Enters
Commands.
Del Or Delete - Deletes The Character At Cursor And/Or Characters To
The Right Of The Cursor.
BkSp Or Backspace - Deletes The Character To The Left Of Cursor.
Space Bar - Moves The Cursor One Space At A Time To The Right.
Shift Key - Use The Shift Keys To Type Capital Letters And To Type The
Upper Character On Keys With Two Characters On Them.
Caps Lock - Locks The Keyboard So It Types Capital Letters (A Light Goes
On When Caps Lock Is On)
Tab - Moves The Cursor Five Spaces To The Right.
Esc Or Escape - Cancels A Menu Or Message Box.
Arrow Keys - Moves The Cursor Around Document With Out Changing
Text.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 11 of 208
Function Keys or F keys - access commands by themselves or in
combination with the three command keys, CTRL, SHIFT, and
ALT. They have different uses with different software.
Command keys - normally do nothing on their own but work in
combination with other keys. Each piece of software uses the command keys
differently.
- The Control key or Ctrl is often used to Access commands.
- The Alternative key or Alt is often used to access menus.
- The Shift key used to type CAPITAL LETTERS. As well the
command keys are all used to move through documents and edit
text faster and easier.
Mouse
Is a hand held device connected to the computer by small cable. The mouse has
two buttons the left one is used to select objects and text and the right one is
used to access menus.
Scanners
Scanning devices are called optical Character Recognition input device. Scanner
reads a hardcopy data from source document (including image graphs, type and
handwritten documents) in to computer usable form.
Output Device
Output devices provide the right information to the right person in the right
format at the right time. Output hardware is categorized according to whether it
produces hardcopy or softcopy.



Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 12 of 208
Hardcopy: - Refers to information that has been recorded on a tangible
medium such as paper or microfilms.
Softcopy: - Refers to the temporary data output such as displayed on a
computer screen.
The principal hardcopy output devices are Printers and Plotters.
Printer
The printer takes the information from the computer and transfers it to paper.
There are many different types of printers with various levels of quality. The
three basic types or printer are; dot matrix, inkjet, and laser.
Dot matrix printers: work like a typewriter transferring ink from a
ribbon to paper with a series or 'matrix' of tiny pins.
Inkjet printers: work like dot matrix printers but fires a stream of ink
from a cartridge directly on to the paper.
Laser Printers: use the same technology as a photocopier using heat to
transfer toner (black powder) onto paper.

Monitor
Is a device that shows the progress and operation of the computer. Monitors
come in many type and size from the simple monochrome (one color) screen
to full color screen. Most desktop computers use a monitor with CRT
(Cathode Ray Tube) and notebook computers use LCD (Liquid Crystal
Display.)
CPU (Central Processing Unit)
The ability to process (organizes and manipulate) data is a critical aspect of a
computer system. In a computer system, processing is accomplished by and
interplays between one or more of the central processing units and primary storage.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 13 of 208
Each central processing unit (CPU) consists of three associated elements: the
arithmetic logic unit the control unit, and the register areas. The arithmetic logic unit
(ALU) performs mathematical calculations and makes logical comparisons. The
control unit sequentially access program instructions, decodes them and coordinated
the flow of data in and out of the ALU, the registers, primary storage and even
secondary storage and various output devices.
Registers are high-speed storage areas used to temporarily hold small units of
program instructions and data immediately before, during and after execution by the
CPU. The CPU of a computer is also called brain of the computer.
Main Memory

Located physically close to the CPU (to decrease access time), memory provides the
CPU with a working storage area for program instructions and data. The chief
feature of memory is that it rapidly provides the data and instructions to the CPU.
Types of Memory
There are two types of memory:
+ RAM (Random Access Memory)
+ ROM (Read Only Memory)
RAM - is temporary and volatile - it exists only as long as the electric
current is maintained. RAM chips will lose their contents if the current
is turned off or disrupted. Instructions or data can be temporarily stored
in RAM.
ROM - is usually nonvolatile. In ROM, the combination of circuit states
is fixed and therefore the data represented by this combination will bot
be lost if the power is removed. ROM provides permanent storage for
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 14 of 208
data and instructions that do not change like programs and data from the
computer manufacturer.
- There are other types of nonvolatile memory as well like
PROM (programmable read-only memory) EPROM (Erasable
Programmable read-only memory)
Secondary Storage Devices (Auxiliary Memory)
Main memory serves as the primary storage for the computer. Aside from its
high cost, RAM is volatile and ROM is read only. Thus, there should be other
types of storage devices capable of permanent storage. The most common way
of storing information permanently is on magnetic storage medium. Examples
of magnetic storage medium are magnetic tapes, magnetic disks etc.
Magnetic Disk
Magnetic disks are made of metal or plastic coated with magnetic material.
Information is recorded on a disk in concentric circles called Tracks on both surfaces
of the disk. The tracks are further divided into sections called Sectors. The amount
of information on the inner track is the same as that of on the outer track though
much compressed. Magnetic disks are generally manufactured without tracks and
sectors. Tracks and sectors are created by the operating system of the computer by a
process called formatting.
A device called a disk drive is used to read from or write information to the disk.
Inside the drive the disk spins at a very high speed and the read/write head reads
information from the surface and feeds it to the computer or receives information
from the computer and stores it on the disk.
Based on the backing material (plastic or metal), magnetic disks can be divided into
two: Floppy Disks & Hard Disks
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 15 of 208
Floppy Disk (Diskettes)
Diskettes are often referred to as “floppy” because they are made of flexible material.
To store and retrieve data from a floppy disk, you must place it into a disk drive,
which contains special mechanical components for storing and retrieving data.
Hard Disks
+ Standard secondary storage device of all computers. All computers have at
least one hard disk
+ Has a massive storage capacity that can be measured in GB.
+ Can store and retrieve data much faster than floppy diskettes.
+ Non-removable as it is fixed inside the computer.
1.4. Software
Software is part of a computer that gives instructions to the physical part (hardware)
to carry out its tasks. Different software is used for different purposes.
The finite set of instructions that tell the computer hardware what to do is called
P PR RO OG GR RA AM M. .
1.4.1. Types of Software
There are 2 types of software:
System Software:
o Operating System Software
· E.g., MS DOS, MS WINDOWS, UNIX
o Language/Developing Software
· E.g., FORTRAN, Pascal, C++, Visual Basic


Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 16 of 208

Application Software:
o Developed to meet particular user interest
E.g., Games, word processing software, Database Management
software
o Accounting System software, Spreadsheet software, Virus
Protection and detection Software, etc
1.5. Operating Systems
In a computer system there are at least three components: the computer hardware,
the software and the user. To use the computer effectively there should be efficient
communication between these three components. The operating system is a program
that acts as a link between the user, the computer software, and computer resources.
It is the master program that allows the user to run application programs (Games,
word processor software, etc)
NB: Without the operating system the application software would be unable to run
Functions of the Operating System:
Controlling Activity
Input/output Management
Command Processing/Interpretation

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 17 of 208
Chapter 2: Microsoft Windows
2.1. User Interface
Users communicate with their computers through the operating system. In all
operating systems there are two operating environments – Command Line
Interface (CLI) and Graphical User Interface (GUI). In CLI, the operating
system takes keyboard inputs from the user and translates it into operations that the
computer performs. MSDOS is example of an operating system with CLI as its
operating environment.
The user interface (operating environment) of most modern operating systems
incorporates graphical elements. This operating environment is known as Graphical
User Interface (GUI). Different objects of the operating system are represented by
small pictures called icons; messages are displayed in message boxes; and dialog
boxes are displayed to the user to provide input. The primary input device of
operating systems using GUIs is the mouse. Mouse is a pointing device with two
buttons which controls the movement of a pointer on the screen.
2.2. Logging into Your Computer

When you press the power button of your computer to turn it on, the first program
to be loaded into the computer’s memory is the Operating System, in this case,
Microsoft Windows XP. During the loading process you will see the Windows logo
and other messages. Once this process is completed, depending on the settings of the
computer, you will be requested to provide user name password to start using your
computer.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 18 of 208





Figure 1 - Login (Welcome) Window
To login to your computer:
1. Select the user name by clicking the picture representing your user account. A
text box appears below the user name (Fig. 1)
2. Type in the password and press Enter key or click the right pointing arrow
on the screen. The windows desktop appears. The desktop images and
other attributes may vary between users
2.3. The Windows Desktop
The Windows Desktop is the background area where different windows are opened.











Figure 2 - A Typical Windows XP Desktop
Icons
Start
Button
Taskbar
Quick Launch Toolbar
System Tray
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 19 of 208
Some of the components of the desktop are Icons, opened windows, start button,
taskbar and the system trey (Fig 2).
1. Icons – small pictures representing a file or a folder on the desktop. All
folders created by users are represented by small yellow pictures whereas
files are represented by different pictures depending on the type of data or
program stored in the file, the format of the data file or the type of the
program used to create the file.
2. Start Button – an access point to various programs and components
3. Taskbar – status information area showing open applications and
multiple windows as buttons. Whenever a window is opened, a button
will be shown on the taskbar to indicate that it is open.
4. Quick Launch Toolbar – a shortcut area on the taskbar that is used to
launch frequently used programs. You can add or remove program icons
into this toolbar by dragging icons to or from the area
5. System Tray (SysTray) – Status area for utility and background
programs such as antivirus software, the current time and other
background programs. Note that moving the mouse to a given icon on the
SysTray displays a screen tip describing the program represented by the
icon.
2.4. Using Windows Explorer
Windows Explorer displays the hierarchical structure of files, folders, and drives on
your computer. It also shows any network drives that have been mapped to drive
letters on your computer. Using Windows Explorer, you can copy, move, rename,
and search for files and folders. For example, you can open a folder that contains a
file you want to copy or move, and then drag the file to another folder or another
drive.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 20 of 208
There are other places in Windows where you can view and work with files and
folders. You can view My Network Places, which lists other computers that are
connected to your local area network (LAN). My Documents is a convenient place to
store documents, graphics, or other files you want to access quickly.
To Open Windows Explorer:
· Click Start, Point to All Programs (or just Programs if you are
using the Classic start menu) and then click Windows Explorer or
· Right click a folder icon and click Explore or
· Open a folder window and click Folders button on the Standard
Buttons bar













Figure 3 - Windows Explorer Window
Folder (Tree)
Panel
Contents Panel
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 21 of 208
The Windows Explorer window is divided in to two parts – Folders (Tree) Panel
and Contents Panel.
The Folder Panel displays the hierarchical structure of folders. The Desktop
is at the top level of the hierarchy. All folders on the desktop including My
Computer, My Documents, My Network Places and the Recycle Bin are found at
the second level. All secondary storage devices (hard disk, floppy disk, CD, Flash
Disk and so on) reside at the third level. All other folders created on the disks are
at the fourth and lower levels.
The existence of sub folders in a given folder is indicated by a + or – sign to the
left of the folder icons on the tree Panel. + indicates that the sub folders are listed
beneath the parent folder.
The Contents Panel displays contents of a selected folder. When a folder is
selected from the tree Panel, its contents are displayed in the Contents Panel.
Windows Explorer provides a suitable alternative to copy and/or move files and
folders to different locations using the Drag and Drop Method.
Searching For Files and Folders
The Search tool of Windows XP offers the most direct way to locate a file. Use
Search if you are looking for common file types, if you remember all or part of
the name of the file or folder you want to find, or if you know when you last
changed a file. If you know only part of the name, you can use wildcard
characters
1
to locate all files or folders that include that part in the name. For
example, *letter.* will find Holiday letter.doc, Special letter.doc, and Special
letter.txt.

1
Wildcard Characters represents any character in filename specifications. Windows recognizes two
wildcards – Asterisk (*) representing any number of characters and Question mark (?) representing a
single character
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 22 of 208
Use Windows Explorer or My Computer if you know the exact location of the files
or folders. However, if you don’t remember the location of the files or if they are
stored in different locations use the Search Tool
To use the Search Tool:
1. Click Start and then click Search to display the Search window.
(If you are using the Classic Start Menu, click Start, point to Search
and then click For Files and Folders)
Tip: Pressing F3 on the key board also opens the Search
window
2. Specify the search criteria in the left Panel
I. To search for Pictures, Music or Videos click Pictures,
Music or Videos button and select one of the three
categories (i.e., Picture, Music or Video)
II. To search for Documents (such as Ms Word files), click
Documents
III. To provide specific criteria, select All Files and Folders
Specify additional criteria
IV. All or part of the file name
V. Date or period of last modification
VI. Location to look in etc
Click Search. Found items will be listed on the right Panel of the
search window.
3. You can use the Back button to go back one step, Stop button to stop
the search process.
Note: You can open, delete, copy, move or rename the files and
folders found.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 23 of 208
Using Help
Microsoft Help and Support Center is a comprehensive resource for practical advice,
tutorials, and demonstrations to help you learn to use Microsoft Windows XP. Use
the Search feature, Index, or table of contents to view all Windows Help resources,
including those that are on the Internet.
To display the Help and Support Window:
· Click Start and then click Help and Support. The Help and
Support Window appear. (Fig. 4)











Figure 4 - Help and Support Window
There are several ways that can be followed to access the help resources
· First Column - Pick a Help Topic - lists help topics that would be
found in table of contents
· Second Column – displays online (Internet or Local Network)
alternatives from where the user may get help
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 24 of 208
· Keyword Search – you may type the keywords that identify the
topics you are looking for. To search for help topics; click the Search
box; type in the keyword or press ENTER key
· Index Search – clicking Index on the menu bar displays the lists of
items in the left hand Panel of the window
Whenever a help topic is selected the contents of the selected topic are
displayed in the right hand Panel (Fig. 5).


Figure 5 - A Help and Support Window displaying a help topic

For some searched topic, there is Overviews, Articles and Tutorials
section which contains overview texts or practical demonstrations. The
Windows Interactive Training, which is automatically opened when
items labeled Practice: are clicked, shows practical demonstrations of help
topics.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 25 of 208
Control Panel Elements
Control Panel is full of specialized tools that are used to change the way
Windows looks and behaves. Some of these tools help you adjust settings that make
your computer more fun to use. For example, use Mouse to replace standard
mouse pointers with animated icons that move on your screen, or use Sounds and
Audio Devices to replace standard system sounds with sounds you choose. Other
tools help you set up Windows so that your computer is easier to use. For
example, if you are left-handed, you can use Mouse to switch the mouse buttons so
that the button on the right performs the primary functions of selecting and
dragging.
To open Control Panel:
· Click Start and then click Control Panel. If your Start Menu is set
up in Classic view, click Start, point to Settings, and then click
Control Panel.
To find out more information about an item in Control Panel while in
Category view:
· Hold your mouse pointer over the icon or category name and
read the text that appears.
If you open Control Panel and do not see the item you want, click
Switch to Classic View. To open an item, double-click its icon. To
find out more about an item in Control Panel while in Classic Control
Panel view, hold your mouse pointer over the icon and read the text
that appears.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 26 of 208
Some of the tasks that can be done in the control panel are discussed here.
Folder Options
With Folder Options, you can specify how your folders function and how content
is displayed. For example, you can indicate that you want your folders to display
hyperlinks to common tasks, other storage locations, and detailed file
information. You can also choose to open items with either a single or a double
click.
You can change the program that opens a file type. You can also change the items
that appear on your desktop.
To change folder options settings:
· Open Folder Options in Control Panel.
· Or to open Folder Options from a folder window, click Tools, and
then click Folder Options.
To display hidden files and folders:
1. Open Folder Options in Control Panel.
o Click Start, and then click Control Panel.
o Double-click Folder Options.
2. On the View tab, under Hidden files and folders, click Show
hidden files and folders.


Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 27 of 208
Date and Time
To change Date and Time:
1) Open the Control Panel and click Date, Time, Language and
Regional Options in Category View
2) Select one of the Tasks ...
· Change the Date and Time – Click this tab to display the
dialog box that can be used to change the current time, date,
and time zone

Figure 6 - Date and Time Properties Dialog Box
Tip: Double clicking the System Clock on the
System Tray also displays the same dialog box
· Change the formats of Numbers, Dates and Times –
Click this button to change number formats, date and time
formats
· Add Other Languages – To include multilingual support



Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 28 of 208
Appearance/Display/Screen Saver/Resolution
The appearance of the Windows XP can also be changed from the control
panel.
To change the appearance of your windows:
1. Open the control panel and switch to classic view by clicking the
Switch to Classic View button and then double click the Display
icon to show the Display Properties window




Figure 7 - Display Properties Window
2. Select different options by clicking each tab:
· Themes Tab – This tab is used to change the desktop theme. A
desktop theme is a predefined set of icons, fonts, colors, sounds,
and other window elements that give your desktop a unified and
distinctive look.
· Desktop Tab – this tab is used to change the desktop background
image
· Screen Saver Tab – Screen Saver is an animated text or graphics
that is displayed when the user stops interacting with the system for
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 29 of 208
a specific period of time. The type of screen saver, the idle time
interval for the screen saver to appear, can be set from this tab
· Appearance Tab – This tab is used the color and style of
windows and buttons
· Settings Tab – This tab is used to change the screen resolution
and the color depth of (number of colors displayed on) your
screen. There are also other advanced activities performed using
this tab.
User Accounts
User accounts personalize Windows for each person who is sharing a computer.
You can choose your own account name, picture, and password, and choose other
settings that will apply only to you. A user account gives you a personalized view of
your own files, a list of favorite Web sites, and a list of recently visited Web pages.
With a user account, documents you create or save are stored in your own My
Documents folder, separate from the documents of others who also use the
computer.
To help keep your files more secure and to help make sure they remain private, use
a password for your user account. You can still mark certain items as shared if you
want other people to be able to access them. If you do not use a password for your
user account, other people will have access to your account and be able to see all of
your folders and files.
If you have a user account and you change computer settings, such as the type, size,
or the screen saver, those settings will apply only to your account.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 30 of 208
As a user with a computer administrator account, you can create, delete, and
change all user accounts on the computer. You can create as many accounts on the
computer as you want, and have full access to all accounts on the computer.
Types of User Account
There are two types of user accounts available on your computer: computer
administrator and limited. The guest account is available by default for users
with no assigned account on the computer.
Computer Administrator Account
The computer administrator account is intended for someone who can make
system wide changes to the computer, install software, and access all non -
private files on the computer. Only a user with a computer administrator
account has full access to other user accounts on the computer. A user with a
computer administrator account:
• Can create and delete user accounts on the computer.
• Can change other users' account names, pictures, passwords, and
account types.
• Cannot change his or her own account type to limited unless there is at
least one other user with a computer administrator account. This
ensures that there is always at least one user with a computer
administrator account on the computer.



Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 31 of 208
Limited account
The limited account is intended for someone who should be prohibited from
changing most computer settings and deleting important files. A user with a
limited account:
• Generally cannot install software or hardware, but can access programs
that have already been installed on the computer.
• Can change his or her account picture and can also create, change, or
delete his or her password.
• Cannot change his or her account name or account type. A user with a
computer administrator account must make these kinds of changes.
Guest Account
The guest account is intended for use by someone who has no user account on
the computer. There is no password for the guest account, so the user can log
on quickly to check e-mail or browse the Internet. A user logged on to the
guest account:
• Cannot install software or hardware, but can access applications that
have already been installed on the computer.
• Cannot change the guest account type.
• Can change the guest account picture.



Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 32 of 208
To add a new user to the computer:
You must have a computer administrator account to add a new user to the
computer.
1. Open User Accounts in Control Panel.
2. Under Pick a task, click Create a new account.
3. Type a name for the new user account, and click Next.
4. Click either Computer administrator or Limited, depending on
the type of account you want to assign to the new user, and then click
Create Account.
To change an existing account:
You must have a computer administrator account to change a user's account
type.
1. Open User Accounts in Control Panel.
2. Click the name of the account you want to change.
3. Select different options:
· Change the Name – to change the account name. This does
not work for Guest Account
· Change Password – to change the password of the user. If
password is not set, Create Password is shown instead.
· Change the Picture – to change the picture displayed as the
logo for the user
· Change the account type – to change the account type from
Limited to Administrator or back
· Delete Account – to delete a user account
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 33 of 208
4. Close the window when you are done
Scheduled Tasks
Scheduled tasks allow users to have Windows automatically run a specified program
or open a certain file at a set time. Scheduled tasks can be used to open programs
and/or files that you always use.
- To make a scheduled
1. Go to start and click control Panel
2. Double-click Scheduled Task
3. Click on Next
4. Choose the application you want to Run and click next
5. Type the name of the Task and choose the time you want
6. Select the time and day you want this task to start
7. Enter the name and password of a user
8. And click finish
Device Manager
Device Manager is an OS feature that lets you view and change the properties of all
devices attached to your computer.
- To get device Manager in windows
1. Right-click on the My Computer Icon from the desktop and click
on property
2. Click on the Hardware Tab and click on the Device Manager
3. Choose the driver you want to enable or disable



Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 34 of 208

2.5. Internet Option
- To configure internet options for internet connection sharing
1. Go to control panel and click on Internet Options
2. In the General Tab type the default web page you want
3. Click on the connection Tab
4. Click on never dial a connection and click LAN Setting
5. In Automatic configuration, clear the Automatically
detect settings and Use automatic configuration
script check boxes.
6. In Proxy Server, clear the Use a proxy server check box.














Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 35 of 208
Chapter 3: Introduction to Microsoft Word
Microsoft word is a powerful word processor that combines text with imported
graphics, spreadsheet and charts. Microsoft word lets you prepare a variety of
documents. When necessary you can easily correct errors by adding or deleting
words, sentences, paragraphs or pages. After you have created and corrected your
text, you can print it and store it on hard disk or floppy disk for reuse or future
references.
Status bar
Tables and
borders toolbar
Title bar
Menu bar
Standard
Tool bar
Formatting
Toolbar
Ruler
I-Beam
I
System
Icon
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 36 of 208
3.1. Anatomy of Word Screen
Title Bar Displays the title of the window, in this case: Microsoft Word and the
name of the active document
System
Menu Icon
Displays the menu with command for sizing, moving and closing the
word window
Sizing
buttons
Enables you to minimize to restore the window size
Menu bar Displays a list of menu options. When you click on the menus on the
menu bar, it displays word commands that enables you to instruct word
to perform an action
Toolbar Displays different toolbars that are used for quick access for commonly
used commands. If the toolbar is not visible, choose Toolbar command
from view menu and click on the toolbar you want to display
Ruler Enables you to set Margins, Tab stops and indents
Work Area Where the text and graphics displayed
Insertion
Point (-)
The blinking bar that shows where the text you type will appear
Scroll Bar Enables you to see the hidden part of the document
View
Buttons
Used to switch to different views of the document
Status bar Displays information about the active or highlighted command
Browse
buttons
Used to move through the document by page, section, comment, etc.

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 37 of 208

3.2. Different Views of the Document
Normal: This view shows text, character formatting, graphics and paragraph
formatting. It doesn’t show columns or frames, headers or footers. It is the fastest
view option because it doesn’t display as many different screen elements. It is the
default view that means it’s what you get when you start word the first time.
Page layout: in this view, everything in your document is displayed and positioned,
as it will appear on the printed page. You see headers and footers, footnotes, page
numbers, columns, graphics and frames and just about every other formatting
feature.
Online layout: this view is designed specifically to make documents easier to read
on screen. This view includes a new feature called a Document Map that gives you an
outline
View of your document’s structure and allows you to easily navigate to different
portions of the document.
Outline: this view shows the document in outline form if you are using the built-in
numbered heading styles. This let’s you see the document in hierarchical form,
where you can collapse or expand various parts of the document. But graphics and
full paragraph formatting are not shown in this view. You can use it to manipulate
texts that aren’t possible in the other view.
Print Preview: this view shows you exactly how the document will look when
printed, In this view you can view several pages at onetime and also see where the
pages look even, how big the headings appear, where the pages breaks fall and others.



Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 38 of 208
Changing the View: to change from one view to other:
- Click on the View menu then click on one of the view options you
want to apply Or
- Click on the View button in the lower left corner of the word screen.
Point on the respective view buttons to obtain the view button names.

Dialog Boxes
Choosing a menu command will usually followed by dialogue box. Aside from some
very basic commands, almost everything you do in word happens through a dialog
box. Let’s take a look at font dialog box (click on format menu hen click on font
command).





Check
box
Drop down
list
Tabs
Text
Box
List
Box
Preview
Box
Command
button
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 39 of 208

3.3. Formatting
Word divides its formatting options as follows: character, paragraph and page.
Character formatting can be applied to any amount of text and it includes changing
the font style, size, color of text, and making text bold, italic or underline. Paragraph
formatting applies to a paragraph or multiple paragraphs and it includes line spacing,
tabs and indents, and text alignment. Page formatting applies to entire pages and
sections and it includes margins, page numbering, and headers and footers.
Tabs Divides the dialog box into different sections. Clicking on
Character Spacing or Animation will take you to the respective
section containing different option related to the tab
Text Box Indicates you which option is selected from the list box.
List Box Displays different options related to Textbox name. To see more
of the options you can use scrolls if available.
Drop-
Down list
Button
Used to display different options or drop down list of the respective
property, i.e. click on color drop down list button to display
different color and click on one of it to select it.
Check box
Indicates whether an option is selected or not. - Tells you that it is
checked (selected); otherwise it is not selected.
Preview
box
Whenever you select an option you will see how it look in the
preview box. So it is the view before you apply it into your
document
Command
Button
When pressed, make something to happen. E.g. Press OK to
execute the commands you have chosen and close the dialog box
and CANCEL to close the dialogue box without executing the
command
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 40 of 208
3.3.1. Character Formatting
There are many ways you can change the appearance of text. You can make it bold or
italicize it; you can change the type of style or size; you can highlight the text or add
color to it.
To make text bold, italic, or underline:
1. Select the text you want to format or place the insertion point where you
want to begin applying the formatting.
2. Click on the appropriate button: Bold, Italic or underline from the
Toolbar. Or
Use Keyboard shortcuts i.e.
• Press Ctrl + B to make the text bold.
• Press Ctrl + I to make the text Italic
• Press Ctrl + U to make the text underline
To change the font, size, color, shading, and text bordering:
1. Select the text you want to change or position the insertion point where you want
the change to start. If your insertion point is positioned in the middle of a word
without anything selected, the change applies to the whole word.
2. Click on the appropriate formatting drop-down list button from the toolbar and
select any option you want.

Using the Font Dialogue Box
The font dialogue box lets you change as many characteristics as you want at once. In
addition, it gives you access to even more appearance options.



Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 41 of 208
To make changes with the font dialogue box:
1. Select the text you want to change or place the insertion point where you want
the font change take effect.
2. Choose Font from the Format menu to open the font dialogue box
3. Select the various formatting options under the respective tab
4. Format selections are immediately reflected in the preview window of the
dialogue box. So you can experiment with the available options and preview the
results
Changing Text to Uppercase and Lowercase
To change the case of a text:
• Select the text you want to change
• Choose change case from the Format Menu to open the change case dialogue
box shown below

• Select the option you want and click on OK button

Note: Select the text and then press Shift + F3 to cycle among the change case
options. Stop when the text is the way you want it.
Inserting Special Symbols
There are many symbols, such as the copyright symbol, ©, used regularly in
documents that aren’t on the standard keyboard.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 42 of 208
To insert symbols:
1. Choose Symbols from Insert menu
2. Choose a symbol from Symbol Font Sets shown in the character map on the
symbol page or from the list on the special characters page
3. Click insert button.
4. Click Close
3.3.2. Paragraph Formatting
In word paragraph is one of the basic units of a document. Every time you press the
ENTER key while typing, you create a new paragraph. To start a new line with out
starting a new paragraph, press Shift + Enter
Paragraph Indention and Alignment
Word has features that allow you to indent just the first line of each paragraph,
without typing the tab at the beginning of every paragraph using first line indent or
you can also indent the entire paragraph using the standard indent. And you can also
indent the rest of the line except the first line called hanging indent.
Setting indents using the ruler and the Toolbar




Increase Indent
Decrease Indent
Left
Indent
Ruler
First Line
Indent
Hanging
Indent
Right
Indent
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 43 of 208
To use any indent:
• Put the insertion point in the paragraph you want to indent or select multiple
paragraphs.
To indent the entire paragraph from left:
• Click the increase indent button on the Formatting toolbar, which indents
with a standard measurement. Or
• Drag the left indent marker on the ruler (all the three indent marks will move
together)
To indent back to normal:
• Click the decrease indent button on the formatting toolbar. Or
• Drag the left indent marker to its original place
To indent the first line (First line indent):
• Drag the first line indent marker to a new position on the ruler. And drag it to
the left to remove the first line indent.
To indent the rest of the line except the first line (hanging indent)
• Drag the hanging indent marker to the new position on the ruler. And drag it to
the left to remove the hanging indent.
To indent the entire paragraph from the right:
• Drag the right indent marker that is found at the right side of the ruler

Changing alignment
By default, Word aligns or positions text left. However you have the option of
centering text, aligning it along the right margin or justified, i.e. expanding the
spaces in each line to align text at both the left and right margins.


Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 44 of 208
To align text:
1. Click anywhere in the paragraph you want to format. Or select multiple
paragraphs
2. Click one of the paragraph alignment buttons on the formatting toolbar.

Note: when you choose one of the alignment buttons it appears pressed in, to
remove click it again.

Using the Paragraph dialog box:
• Click the Paragraph you want to format or select multiple paragraphs
• Choose Paragraph from the format menu. The following dialog box will be
displayed.
• To indent only the first line choose First Line from the Special drop-down list
and enter a measurement in the By box.
• To indent the entire paragraph, enter measurement in the left and/or right boxes
to specify how far to indent the paragraph from the left or right margin.

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 45 of 208
• To align text, choose one of the alignment options by clicking the alignment
drop-down list.
• Specify the spacing before and after the paragraph in the spacing section by
clicking the decrement and increment buttons inside the respective boxes.
• To change the measurement of the space in between the lines of the paragraph,
click the line spacing drop down list button and select any.

Note: as you select different options the preview box shows what the formatting will
look like on the page
Keeping text together
As you are typing, word moves the text to the next page as soon as you get to the
bottom margin. It doesn’t care whether it’s breading a two-line paragraph or ripping
a heading from its accompanying text. But you can control this situation by four
different features. The first, Hard Page Breaks are inserted with a keystroke or by
choosing Page Bread from the Break dialog box. You can obtain the rest through the
following procedure:

1. Click the Paragraph you want to format or select multiple paragraphs
2. Choose Paragraph from the Format menu and select the Line and Page
Break tab.
3. Check or uncheck the appropriate option and click OK.





Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 46 of 208
Using Tabs
Tab stops are markers set by default at half-inch intervals across the width of the
document. Pressing the tab key moves the cursor from one tab stop to the next. One
of the most common uses of a tab is to indent the first line of a paragraph. There are
four basic types of tab stops:
Left: the default type. Text appears to the right of the tab stop
Center: Text automatically appear to the left and the right of the tab stop
until centered under the tab stop
Right: text appears to the left of the tab stop
Decimal: used for numeric entries. Text lines up with the decimal point
Tabs are also used to create parallel columns, vertically aligning text within, a
document. The tab-stop settings can be changed by using the ruler or the tabs dialog
box.
Setting Tabs Using the Ruler
1. Click the Tab button at the left end of the ruler to toggle through the four tab
choices.
2. Click on the ruler to set the tab-stops
3. Drag the Tab-stop marker on the ruler to change the tab position
4. Drag the tab-stop marker off the ruler to remove the tab stop
Setting Tabs and Leaders Using the Tabs Dialog Box
1. Open the Tabs dialog box by choosing Format¬Tabs
2. Type a decimal value in the Tabs Stop Position text box.
3. Select an alignment style and, optionally, a leader style.
4. Click Set
5. Repeat step 2 - 4 to set several tab stops
6. Click OK
7. Enter text, pressing Tab between each column
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 47 of 208
Bullets and Numbering
To create a bulleted or numbered list:
1. Select the list
2. Click the Numbering or Bullets button to create a numbered or bulleted list
from the Standard Toolbar
To remove Bullets and Numbers:
1. Select the Bulleted or Numbered list.
2. Click the Numbering or Bullets button in the standard to remove the numbered
list or bulleted list.
To create a custom Bullets and Numbers:
1. Select the list
2. Choose Bullets and Numbering from the Format menu to display bullets and
numbering dialogue box
3. Select the bulleted tab to apply bullets or the numbered tab to apply numbering
4. Select one of the bullets or numbers out of the preview boxes. If you can not find
bullets or numbers of your choice, select one of the preview boxes and click
Customize. Select the different options from the dialog box that appears and click
OK
5. Click OK button of Bullets and Numbering dialog box

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 48 of 208
3.3.3. Page Formatting
Page Breaks
With word, you usually don’t have to worry about where to end a page. As soon as
you type more text than will fit on a page, word inserts automatic page break and
starts anew page for the text that follows. But there are times when you may want to
force a page to break at a certain place.
To insert page break:
1. Position the insertion point where you want the page break
2. Choose the Break command from the insert menu. The break dialog box
will appear
3. Check the page break option, if not checked.
4. Choose OK button.
Or use Keyboard shortcut as:
• Press Ctrl + Enter key after placing the insertion point in the appropriate
position
Creating and Modifying Page Numbers
To create page numbers:
1. Choose Page Number from the Insert menu to open page number dialog box
2. Choose alignment & Position of the page numbers. Indicate whether you would
like the first page of the document to display a number
3. Click Format to change the type of numbers (1,2,3 or a, b, c), to continue the
numbering from the previous section, or to start at a number other than one.
Click OK. Click OK again to set the page numbering
4. View page numbers in page layout view or print preview
To Remove page numbers:
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 49 of 208
1. Choose Header and Footer from the View menu. Or double-click on the
page number.
2. Select page number. And press Backspace or delete key.
3. Choose close
Adding Boarders and Shading
You can grab the reader’s attention by making boarders and shadings to the text of
paragraphs. You can make boarders and shading by using the Table and Boarder Bar
or Border and shading Dialog Box.
Using Table and Boarder Bar
1. Place the insertion point in the paragraph you want to add a boarder to or select
Multiple paragraphs
2. Click the Table and Boarders button on the standard toolbar to open the Table
and Borders Toolbar
3. Click the down arrow next to the Line Style button and select a style
4. Click the down arrow to the Line weight button and select a line thickness
5. Click the down arrow next to the Boarders button to open the boarder’s palette
6. Click to select a border option. As you move your mouse pointer over the
different options, notice the ToolTip that tells you what the option does.
To apply Boarders:
1. Place your insertion point in the paragraph you want to format. (Select
multiple paragraph)
2. Choose Boarder and shading from the format menu to open the Borders and
shading dialog box as shown
3. Make any selections you want from the style, color, and width lists


Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 50 of 208
4. Click on one of the settings button
× Selecting None gives you no boarder at all. Use this option to get rid of
existing boarder on selected text
× Selecting Box gives you a standard box that uses any Style, color and
Width setting you select
× Selecting Shadow applies a shadow effect. (Works only for box with
four boarders)
× Selecting Three-D gives you a 3-D effect
× Selecting Customs creates a box using the options you click in the
preview
× diagram. You can click the different buttons to mix and match various
boarder options





Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 51 of 208
To Apply Shading behind a paragraph:
• Position your insertion point in the paragraph you want shade (or select
multiple paragraphs)
• Display Border and Shading dialog box and click on shading tab
• Choose a fill amount or color from the Fill palette.
• Choose a pattern from the style drop-down list.
• Choose a color from the color list
• Choose OK when you’ve made all your selections
Note: To apply border and shading to a text, select the text you want to apply the
formatting and follow the above procedure
3.4. Table of Contents
A table of contents lists headings in the order they appear in a document and the
page numbers where the headings appear. A table of contents usually appears at the
beginning of a document and can include several levels of headings.
To compile a table of contents by using built in heading styles:
• Position the insertion point where you want to create the table of
contents.
• From the Insert menu, Choose Index and tables tab.
• Select the Table of Contents tab from the Index and Tables dialog box
• When you finish Choose OK



Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 52 of 208
3.5. Headers and Footers
A header or footer is piece of text that word repeats at the top of every page (header)
or at the bottom of every page (footer) in an entire document. A non-printing dashed
line indicates the header and footer in the document. You can format header and
footer just as you format any other text in your document.
To create header or Footer:
1. From the View menu, choose the Header and Footer command. Word
changes the document view to page layout view and displays the header
and footer toolbar.
2. The insertion point is placed in the header area. Enter the text you want to
print on top of every page. Click on the Switch between Header and
Footer button to switch to the footer area.
3. To return to the document work area, choose the close button.
To remove header or footer:
1. Double-click on the header or footer or from the view menu choose the
Header and Footer command
2. Delete the contents of the header and footer area.
3. Click on Close button
To create different Header and Footers for odd and even pages:
1. From the View menu, choose Header and Footer
2. Click the Page Setup button and select the Layout tab
3. Under Header and Footer section select the Different odd and Even check
box
4. Choose OK


Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 53 of 208
Setting Page Margins:
Word gives you wonderful margins of 1-inch at the top and bottom and 1.24inch on
the left and right. If these defaults work for you, you don’t have to do any thing. But
if you want to change the margins, word lets you do it directly from the ruler or with
precise measurements in a dialog box.
To set margins using the dialog box:
1. Choose the Page Setup from the File menu and select the margins tab.
You will see the page setup dialog box. Three of the tabs in this dialog box
provide options for various page elements: Margins, paper size and layout.
2. Enter setting in the Top, Bottom, Left and Right text boxes. Check the
preview box to make sure that the margins are the way you want them. If
you plan to bind your document after printing, you can add an extra
margin along one side of the page to allow for binding. To add this extra
margin enter a measurement in the Gutter box
3. From the Apply To list, select whole document or This point
forward
4. Click Ok
Setting the Paper size and Orientation:
The paper size tab of the page Setup dialog box lets you set the size of paper on which
the document will be printed and select the page orientation. The default paper size
is A4. From the box, select the paper size you will be using for printing from the
Paper Size drop down list.
The Portrait option means that the document will print down the page, with
shorter side at the top and bottom. The Landscape option means that the document
will print across the page, with the shorter side at left and right.


Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 54 of 208
The Layout tab
The Layout tab of the page setup dialog box controls how headers and footers are
setup, and how the text is vertically aligned
If the text in your document does not completely fill a page, you can set its vertical
position on the page in the vertical alignment box:
• The Top Setting starts the text at the top of the page
• The center setting moves the text down so that it is centered as a
block between the top and bottom margins
• The Justified setting increases the space between the paragraphs so
that the first line of text prints at the top margin and the last line
prints at the bottom margin.
3.6. Spelling and Grammar Checking
Word checks your document for spelling errors by using its main dictionary, which
contains most common words.
To check spelling and grammar:
On the Tools menu, click Spelling & Grammar or click spelling button on the
standard toolbar which display the spelling and grammar dialog box
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 55 of 208

If word finds a word that is not contained in any of the active dictionaries or any
grammatical error, it displays the spelling and grammar dialog box (Spelling errors
are typed in red while grammatical errors are typed in green in the dialog box)
A list of suggested spellings or grammatical corrections automatically appears in the
spelling and grammar dialog box. For every word that is displayed in dictionary box,
do one of the following:
• Choose the Change button to accept the current selection in the
suggestion box.
• Choose the Change All button on replace all instances of this misspelled
word in the document
• Choose Ignore to leave the word unchanged. (The wavy underline will
disappear.)
• Choose Ignore All to leave all occurrence of a wavy underlined word
without changing it.
• Choose the Auto correct button to add the misspelled word and its
correction to the Auto Correct list so that word will correct it
automatically as you type.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 56 of 208
• Choose the Next Sentence to click in your document and manually edit
the current sentence, then click Next Sentence to accept your manual
changes and continue the spelling and grammar check
• Choose the Add button to add the highlighted word in the Not in
Dictionary to the custom dictionary. The next time word encounter this
word, it will not take it as an error.
• Choose the options button to open the Spelling and Grammar option
dialog box, where you can open a different custom dictionary or change
the rules that word uses to check spelling and Grammar. Word continues
searching for spelling mistakes for the rest of the document, and displays a
massage box on completion
• Choose the OK button to return to the document.
Checking Spelling in a selection
To check the spelling of a single word or range of text of text instead of the entire
document:
• Select the word or range of text
• Click on the spelling and grammar button on the standard toolbar. To
choose the spelling and grammar command from the Tools menu.
• If the word or selection contains any spelling mistakes, Word opens the
spelling and grammar dialog box and allows you to make corrections.
• On completion of the spell check, or if the word or selection contains no
spelling or grammar mistake, word displays a dialog box which ask you
whether you want to continue checking the remaining document or not
• Choose the Yes button to continue the spell check for the rest of the
document
• Choose the No button to return to the document
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 57 of 208
Using the Thesaurus Command
You can use the Thesaurus to improve the precession and variety of your writing.
You can quickly find synonyms (word with the same meaning) for a selected word or
phrase. For some words, you may also find antonyms (word with opposite meaning)
related words.
To look up words in Thesaurus:
1. Click on the word you want to look up and choose Tools →Language→
Thesaurus to open the thesaurus dialog box
2. Double-click on terms to look up those words
3. Click on words in the meaning column the best represent your context to
see synonyms for them. Double-click to get a list of words that have the
same or similar meaning.
4. Enter a new word to look up in the Replace with synonym text box.
5. To review previously looked up words, select from the drop-down list
under Looked Up.
3.7. Tables and Columns
3.7.1. Tables
With tables you can arrange columns of numbers and text in a document without
using tabs. A table is made up of rows and columns. The intersection between rows
and columns is called Cell. You can fill cells with text or even graphics. Within each
cell, text wraps just as it does between the margins of documents. The cell expands
vertically to fit the amount of text you type.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 58 of 208
Creating Tables
To create a table using the Insert Table command:
1. Position the insertion point where you want to create a table
2. Click the Insert Table command from the Table menu. The insert table
dialog box will appear.
3. Specify the number of columns and rows in the respective boxes. And specify
the exact measurements for the width of columns in Column Width box.
And click OK
To create a table using the standard toolbar:
× Click the Insert Table button on the standard toolbar and drag over the grid
until you have selected the number of rows and columns you wanted to create
and release the mouse button.
Moving and Selecting a Cell, Row and Column
Within a cell you can move the insertion point and select text just as you do in the
rest of your document.
To move around in a table:
× Click in the cell you want to move to. Or use the cursor control keys (Arrow
keys and Tab)
To select a text inside a cell:
× Drag over the text

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 59 of 208
To select a row:
× Click the row selection bar (to the left of the row, the I-Beam will be changed
to a right pointing arrow)
To select a column:
• Click the column’s top gridline or border. Notice that the pointer becomes a
thick a thick down-arrow.
To select multiple cells, rows or columns:
• Drag across the cell, row or column; or select a single cell, row or column
and hold down Shift key.
NOTE: you can select rows, columns or the entire by positioning the insertion
point in the table and choosing Select Row, Select Column, Or Select Table
command from the Table menu
Inserting and Deleting Cells, Rows or Columns
To add a cell to a table:
1. Select a cell or cells above which you want to insert the new cells
2. Choose the Insert Cells command from the Table menu. The insert cells
dialog box appears.
3. Select one of the options, and then click the OK button




Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 60 of 208
To add a row(s) to a table:
1. Select the row(s) above which you want to insert the new row(s)
2. Choose the Insert Rows command from the Table menu or the Tables and
Borders toolbar
Note: to add a single row to a table, position the insertion point outside the table at
the end of a row, and then press Enter. Or to add a row at the end of the
table, position the inserting point in the last cell of the last row and press Tab
key.
To add column(s) to a table:
1. Select the column(s) to the left of which you want to add the new column(s)
2. Choose Insert Columns command from Tables menu, or from Tables
and Borders toolbar
Deleting Cells, Rows and Columns
You can delete just the text in cells, rows or columns, or you can remove the cell,
row or column. To delete a text in a cell, row or column, just select and delete it, as
you would do else where in a document.
To delete cells:
1. Select the cell(s) you want to delete.
2. Choose the Delete Cells command from Table menu. The delete cells
dialog box appears
3. Choose one of the options, and click OK
To delete rows or columns:
1. Select the row(s) or column(s) you want to delete
2. From the table menu, choose Delete Rows or Delete Columns. Or click
the Cut button from the standard toolbar


Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 61 of 208
You can move or copy cells, rows or columns in a table. To do so:
1. Select the cells, rows or columns you want to copy or move
2. Position the mouse pointer over the selection
3. To move the selection drag it to the new location when the arrow pointer
slants to the left
4. To copy the selection hold down Ctrl key while you drag the selection.
Merging and Splitting Cells and Columns
To merge (join a number of cells in to one) cells in the table:
1. Select the cells you want to merge
2. From the Table menu choose Merge Cells. Or click Merge
Cells button from the Tables and Border toolbar
To split (divide) cells:
1. Select the cell(s) you want to split
2. From the Table menu, choose Split Cells. Or click Split Cells from
the Tables and Border toolbar
3. Enter the number of row and column you want to split the selected cell(s) and
choose OK
Changing Column Width and Row Height
You can change the width of selected cells and entire column/row you want by
dragging the table column markers on the ruler or by dragging the column/row
boundaries. When you position the mouse pointer to column/row boundary, the
pointer will be changed to a bi-directional arrow. You can also specify exact column
width or row height by using the Cell Height and Width dialog box.



Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 62 of 208
To change the Column Width
1. Select the column, or columns whose width you want to change
2. Choose the Cell Height and Width command from the Table menu. The
cell Height and width dialog box appears

3. Select the Column tab, if not selected
4. Specify a value in the Width of Column box
5. Specify a value in the Space Between Columns Box
6. Click OK
To change the row height:
1. Select the row(s) whose Height you want to change
2. Choose the Cell Height and Width command from the Table menu. The
cell Height and width dialog box appears
3. Select the Rows tab, if not selected
4. Choose the various options in the dialog box
5. Click OK
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 63 of 208

Formatting Tables
You can improve the readability of a table by formatting the text in the table, aligning
the text, creating column headings and adding borders and shading. You format text
within cells as in the rest of the document. The best way to format a table is to allow
Word automatically format the table. To do so:
Select the entire table or just place the insertion point in the table
1. Choose the Table Autoformat command from the Table menu. The Table
Autoformat dialog box appears
2. Select the available format from the format list. The preview window displays
a sample table of the selected format
3. Click the OK button
Sorting a Table
You can arrange entries of a table in alphabetical or numeric border, or you can sort
by date. Word changes the order of rows based on the first column unless you specify
a different column as the basis of sorting.
To sort a table:
Select the rows you want to sort
1. From the Table menu, choose Sort command. The sort dialog box appears
2. If you have a heading that you do not want to sort, select the Header Row
option. Under My List has section
3. Under sort by select column number, field number, paragraph or name
4. Under Type, select Number or Text, or Date and then select the
Ascending or Descending option
5. To use additional columns as a basis for sorting, repeat step 4 and 5
6. Choose OK
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 64 of 208
To Calculating a Value in a Table
1. Click the cell in which you want the result to appear
2. Go to Table Menu and Click on Formula
3. Click the Paste Function list arrow and then select a function
3.7.2. Columns
You can change the way a document looks by creating newspaper style columns.
Columns can be of equal or unequal width. You can also vary the number of columns
in a document or on a page. To see multiple columns on screen, switch to page
layout view or print preview.
To create Columns:
1. Switch your view to page layout view by clicking its button on the horizontal
scroll bar and do one of the following: If you want to format the entire
document, click any where in the document; if you want to format part of the
document in to columns, select part of the document
2. Form Format menu choose Columns.
Controlling Column Breaks
A column break is the point in the text where one column ends and the nest begins.
Word automatically distributes columns on pages, but you can insert column breaks
where you want one column to end and the next column to start.
To insert a column break:
1. Click the page layout view button
2. Position the insertion point where you want to start the new column
3. From insert menu choose Break. To display the Break dialog box
4. Under insert section select Column Break and choose OK

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 65 of 208

3.7.3. Drop Cap
You can format a paragraph to have a large initial or dropped capital letter or a large
first word
To put a Drop Cap:
1. Select the paragraph that you want to begin with an initial or dropped capital
letter
2. Choose Drop Cap from Format menu, the Drop Cap dialog box appears:

3. Click Dropped or In Margin
4. Select any other options you want
5. Click OK


Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 66 of 208
3.7.4. Graphics and Text Boxes
Word makes it easy to bring electronic images called Clip into your document by
using the clip gallery. To insert an image from the clip gallery:
Position the insertion point where you want the picture
Choose Picture from the Insert menu and Clip Art from picture menu. This opens
Microsoft Clip Art Gallery. Select Clip Art tab.
· Click on category name in the left column to display the pictures for that
category.
· Click to select the graphic you want.
· Click on the Insert button. Word places the image you selected in your
document. Notice the little boxes around the picture, they are called
handles and they appear whenever an image is selected.
· Click anywhere outside the picture. The handles disappear, and the
picture is part of your document.

3.8. Working with Multiple Documents
Multiple open documents are handy if you want to refer to an old report or copy
parts of one letter into another. You can view each document in its own window or
all open documents in horizontally tiled windows. If you need to compare two
documents, you can view them side by side and scroll through them at the same
time. To view different parts of a document (convenient for summarizing a long
report), you can split it into two windows that you view simultaneously but edit and
scroll through independently.


Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 67 of 208
Switch between Documents
• Click the Word Document button on the taskbar you want to display.
• Click the Window menu, and then click the document on which you want to
work.
Arrange Multiple Document Windows
• Arrange All to fit all open windows on the screen.
• Compare Side By Side With ..., click a document, and then click OK to tile
two windows and scroll through both documents at the same time.
3.9. Inserting AutoText
1. Position the insertion point where you want the AutoText to be inserted.
2. Click the Insert menu
'
and then point to AutoText.
3. Point to a category, and then click an entry.
4. To see additional choices or add your own entries, click the Insert menu
'
point to
AutoText
'
and then click AutoText.
5. To add an entry to the menu, type an entry in the Enter AutoText Entries Here
box, and then click Add.
6. Scroll down the list to find the AutoText entry you want to make, and then click
Insert.
3.10. Insert Files
1. Click the place in your document where you want to insert the file.
2. Click the Insert menu
'
and then click File.
3. Click the Look In list arrow to find the file to insert.
4. Select the file, and then click Insert.




Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 68 of 208
3.11. Use AutoRecover
1. Click the Tools menu, and then click Options.
2. Click the Save tab.
3. Select the Save AutoRecover Info Every check box.
4. Enter the number of minutes, or click the up and down arrows to adjust the
minutes.
5. Click OK.
3.12. Finding and Replacing Formatting
Suddenly you realize all the bold text in your report would be easier to read in italics.
Do you spend time making these changes one by one? No. The Find and Replace
feature locates the formatting and instantly substitutes new formatting. If your search
for a formatting change is an easy one, click Less in the Find And Replace dialog box
to decrease the size of the dialog box. If your search is a more complex one, click
More to display additional options. With the Match Case option, you can specify
exact capitalization. The Go To tab quickly moves you to a place or item in your
document.
Find Text or Formatting
1. Click the Edit menu, and then click Find.
2. If you want to locate formated text, type the word or words.
3. Click More, click Format, and then click the formatting you want to find.
When you're done, click OK.
4. Click Find Next to select the next instance of the formatted text.
5. Click OK to confirm Word finished the search.
6. Click Cancel.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 69 of 208
Find an Item or Location
1. Click the Edit menu, and then click Go To.
2. Click an item in the Go To What box.
3. Enter the item number or name.
4. Click Next, Previous, or Go To to locate the item.
5. When you're done, click Close.
Replace Text or Formatting
1. Click the Edit menu, and then click Replace.
2. If you want to locate formatted text, type the word or words.
3. Click the More button, click Format, and then click the formatting you want
to find. When you're done, click OK.
4. Press Tab, and then type any text you want to substitute.
5. Click Format, and then click the formatting you want to substitute. When
you're done, click OK.
3.13. Adding a Watermark
You can use a washed out version of your company logo, or you can add text such as
SAMPLE, DRAFT, PROPOSAL, or CONFIDENTIAL. Watermarks are useful for
making your documents look more professional. If you decide to change your
watermark, it's as easy as typing in some new text.







Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 70 of 208
Create a Watermark from a Picture
1. Click the Format menu, point to Background, and then click Printed
Watermark.
2. Click the Picture Watermark option.
3. Click the Select Picture button.
4. Navigate to the picture you want to select and insert, and then click Insert.
5. Select any Scale or Washout options, and then click Apply.
6. Click Close.
Create a Watermark from Text
1. Click the Format menu, point to Background, and then click Printed
Watermark.
2. Click the Text Watermark option.
3. Select the Text options you wish to apply.
4. Click Apply and click close
3.14. Creating Footnotes or Endnotes
Footnotes are used to provide additional information that is inappropriate for the
body of the text, and to document your references for information or quotes
presented in the body of the document. Footnotes are appropriate for academic,
scientific, and, occasionally, business purposes. Footnotes appear at the bottom of
the page on which the information is cited, and Word automatically inserts a
reference mark at the insertion point to associate the information presented with the
note at the bottom of the page.

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 71 of 208
Creating and manipulating endnotes is identical to performing the same functions for
footnotes. Endnotes differ from footnotes in that they appear at the end of the
document or section (in the case of longer documents), not the bottom of the page
on which the reference mark appears.
Create a Footnote or Endnote
1. Position the insertion point where you want to insert a footnote.
2. Click the Insert menu
'
point to Reference
'
and then click Footnote.
3. Click the Footnotes option or the Endnotes option.
4. Click the list arrow next to the Footnotes or Endnotes option, and then select
the location where you want to place the footnote or endnote.
5. Verify that the Number Format option of 1,2,3… is selected.
6. Click Insert to insert a reference mark in the text. Word moves the insertion
point to the bottom of the page corresponding to the number of the reference
mark.
7. Type the text of your footnote or endnote.
n

8. Click inside the body of the document to reposition the insertion point at the
desired location to continue with your work.
9. Click Close.
3.15. Creating a Bookmark
Instead of scrolling through a long document to find a specific word, phrase or
section you can use bookmarks. Bookmarks are used to mark text so that you, or
your reader, can return to it quickly. Using bookmarks as a destination lets you
navigate through a long document quickly. You can also navigate documents with
bookmarks by selecting a bookmark as a destination in the Go To dialog box.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 72 of 208


Create a Bookmark
1. Click in your document where you want to insert a Bookmark.
2. Click the Insert menu, and then click Bookmark.
3. Type a one word descriptive name for your Bookmark.
4. Click Add.
Go to a Bookmark Location
1. Click the Edit menu, and then click Go To.
2. On the Go To tab, click Bookmark.
3. Click the Enter Bookmark Name list arrow, and then select the bookmark you
want to move to.
4. Click Go To.
5. If you want, choose another bookmark.
6. Click Close.
3.16. Creating a Table of Figures
If you are creating a document in which there are many illustrations (art,
photographs, charts, diagrams etc.), it is often helpful to the reader of your
document to provide a Table of Figures. A Table of Figures is like a Table of
Contents except that it deals only with the graphic content of a document, not the
written content. To create the Table of Figures, Word looks for text with the Style
code that you specify (Figure, Table, etc.). You can also add a tab leader to make the
table easier to read.


Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 73 of 208
Create a Table of Figures
1. Put your cursor where you want the Table of Figures to appear.
2. Click the Insert menu
'
point to Reference
'
and then click Index And
Tables.
3. Click the Table Of Figures tab.
4. Click the Tab Leader list arrow, and then select the tab leader you
want to use.
5. Click the Formats list arrow, and then select the format you want to
use for the Table of Figures.
6. If you want to create a Table of Figures from something other
than the default Figure style, or the Table style, click Options.
7. Click the Style list arrow, select the text formatting that you
want Word to search for when building the Table of Figures,
and then click Close. All figure callouts of the selected style are
tagged for inclusion in the Table of Figures.
8. Click OK.
3.17. Numbering Heading Styles
If you use the pre-defined heading styles provided by Word, such as those that appear
in the Normal .dot template (Heading 1, Heading 2, Heading 3), you can also
optionally number headings with a format of your choosing. Some examples of the
proper times to use numbered headings include legal documents, scientific or other
academic papers, and so forth. Consult the Formatting and Styles guide of the
institution you are preparing the document for to determine whether this formatting
is preferred.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 74 of 208
Create a Numbered Heading Using Styles
1. In your document, position the cursor where you want to place the numbered
heading.
2. Click the Format menu
'
and then click Bullets And Numbering.
3. Click the Outline Numbered tab.
4. Click a numbering format that contains the text "Heading 1", "Heading 2",
and so on, and then click OK.
5. Click the Styles and Formatting button on the Formatting toolbar, and then
select the heading style that you want.
6. Type the text of the heading, and then press Enter.
3.18. Apply Numbering to Custom Heading Styles
4. Select the text in which you want to apply a style.
5. Click the Format menu
'
and then click Bullets And Numbering.
6. Click the Outline Numbered tab.
7. Click a numbering format that contains the text "Heading 1", "Heading 2", and
so on, and then click Customize.
8. Click More to expand the Customize Outline Numbered List dialog box.
9. Click the heading level you want to number.
10. Click the Font button, format the selected heading level number, and then click
OK.
11. Click the Link Level To Style list arrow, and then select the name of the custom
style of text that you want to use for the level of numbering that you selected in
Step 6.
12. Repeat Steps 6-8 for each custom heading style that you want to number, and
then click OK.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 75 of 208
12.1. Numbering Lines
Many legal documents use the formatting convention of numbering every line of text
to make it easier for multiple parties to refer to very specific text in a longer
document in the context of their discussions. Other types of documents that
sometimes use this convention are movie and television scripts. You can have Word
automatically number each line of text within a document.
Number Each Line in a Document
1. Click the View menu
'
and then click Print Layout.
2. Click the Edit menu
'
and then click Select All.
3. Click the File menu
'
and then click Page Setup.
4. If you're adding line numbers to part of a document, click the Apply To list
arrow, and then click Selections.
5. Click Line Numbers.
6. Click the Add Line Numbering check box to select it, and then select the
options you want.
7. Click OK.
8. Click OK.
12.2. Creating an Equation
If you are creating a scientific or academic paper that involves complex equations,
you may need to display them in the text without actually using them in conjunction
with a table. The standard keyboard does not have all of the mathematical symbols
you might need to create the equation, so you must use the Equation Editor.

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 76 of 208
Create an Equation
1. Click the Insert menu
'
and then click Object.
2. In the Object type box, click Microsoft Equation 3.0, and then click OK.
3. Build the equation by selecting symbols from the Equation toolbar, and then
by typing variables and numbers.
4. Press Enter to show the equation and return to your document.
12.3. Creating Mail Merge Documents
Mail merge is used to send the same letter to several people and spend a lot of time
changing personal information, such as names and addresses?
Start the Mail Merge Wizard
1. Click the Tools menu
'
point to Letters And Mailings
'
and then click
Mail Merge.
2. The Mail Merge task pane opens, displaying Step 1 of 6 in the Mail
Merge Wizard.
3. Select the type of document you are working on (in this case the
Letters option).
4. Click Next: Starting Document on the task pane to display Step 2 of 6.
5. Click a starting document option (such as Use The Current
Document).
6. Click Next: Select Recipients on the task pane to display Step 3 of 6.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 77 of 208
12.4. Creating Documents Using Automatic
Formatting
Word can automatically perform some formatting functions for you as you type a
document.
Set Up Automatic Formatting
1. Click the Tools menu
'
and then click AutoCorrect Options
2. Click the AutoFormat As You Type tab.
3. Click the AutoFormat As You Type tab
4. Select or clear the AutoFormat check boxes you want to use
5. Click OK.
12.5. Inserting Comments
Comments are useful when someone who is editing the document has queries
pertaining to the document.
1. Position the insertion pointer where you want to insert a comment.
2. Click the View menu
'
point to Toolbars
'
and then click Reviewing.
3. Click the Insert menu
'
and then click Comment or click the Insert Comment
button on the Reviewing toolbar.
4. Type your comment in the balloon, and then click outside the balloon to save
it

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 78 of 208
12.6. Creating a Form
Forms are an easy way for you to interact with users of your documents, either
online or in print, and gain information and feedback from them in the process.
1. Click the View menu
'
point to Toolbars
'
and then click Forms.
2. Position the insertion point where you want to insert a form field.
3. Use the Forms toolbar to insert form fields.
12.7. Printing
Before printing a document, it is good to make sure that it will be printed the way
you want it. Use Print Preview to display a document, as it will look when printed.
To preview a document before printing:
On the standard toolbar, click the Print Preview button. Or from the file menu,
choose the Print Preview command.
Word changes from current view to print preview, and then displays one or more
pages, including the page that contains the insertion point.
· Click the One Page button on the print preview toolbar to display one page at
a time.
· Click the Multiple Page button, and then drag, over the grid to select the
number and configuration of pages to display two or more pages at a time.
Move the mouse pointer to the location you want to view, and click the mouse
button to view a magnified area of the document.
Click the Down Arrow next to the Zoom Control box, and select a magnification
type or percentage to enlarge or reduce the page(s) displayed.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 79 of 208
Click the Full Screen button to hide all screen elements except the displayed page.
To return the hidden elements to the screen, click the Full Screen button again or
press Esc.

12.7.1. Editing Text in Print Preview
1. In print preview display the page you want to edit
2. Move the mouse pointer to the location you want to edit and then click the left
mouse button
3. Click the magnifier button to restore the insertion point and then edit the
document.
Do one of the following:
· To return to the original magnification, click the magnifier button, and
then click the document
· To exit print preview, and return to the previous view of the document,
click the Close button
12.7.2. To Print a Document:
Click the print button in any view, then word prints one copy of the document
Setting Printing Options
1. You can specify printing options such as number of pages or number of copies
you want to print in the print dialog box. To set printing options:
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 80 of 208

2. From the file menu, choose the print command to display the print dialog box as
shown bellow.
3. If the name in the Name box is the printer you actually have and want to print to,
you can move right ahead to printing. If there is no printer listed or you want to
choose a different printer, you have to make a selection. Click on the drop-down
list button next to the name field and select the desired printer.
4. To choose page range:
· Check All option to print the entire document
· Check Current Page option to print the current page (the page the
insertion point is found)
· Check Selection option to print only selected part of the document.
· Check Pages option to print any range of pages. For example, 5,9 means
print pages 5 and 9
5. To print a number of copies:
· Type or adjust the number of copies you want to print, in the Number of
Copies box










Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 81 of 208
Chapter 4: Introduction to Microsoft Excel
Excel is spreadsheet, charting and database application. However, Excel’s prime
function is as a spreadsheet, a powerful application for handling data, mostly
numerical data. A spreadsheet is rather like an electronic ledger, which provides a
method by which data can be analyzed and used in complex calculations.
4.1. Getting Start Excel
To start MS-Excel
Click on the start button then click on Microsoft Excel from the program submenu.
A workbook named book1 is displayed and is ready for input
4.2. Components of the workspace
Workbook
A workbook is the file Excel uses to store your data. The workbook consists of
worksheets- for calculating, and charting sheets- for creating charts.
Worksheets
A workbook may contain a single sheet or as many sheets as necessary. By default
Excel opens with a workbook of three sheers. The sheet currently in use is known as
the Active Sheer, is indicated by the tab in bold at the bottom of the worksheet.
Switching between sheets
If you wish to make a different sheet active simply click on its tab.
4.2.1. Data Entry

The worksheet is divided horizontally into rows and vertically into columns, as in the
figure opposite. The intersection of each row and column makes a box called Cell
and it is into the cells that you type your data. Each cell is referenced individually by
a column letter and row number, which together create a cell address or references.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 82 of 208

To enter data in a cell move the pointer to the preferred cell and then click on the
mouse button. You can type any kind of data in a cell e.g. , text, numbers. When
you begin to type the data you are entering will appear in two places:
+ In the cell it self, called the Active Cell
+ On top of the window in an area called the Formula Bar

Editing Data
Once data has been entered into a cell, you can make changes by clicking on the cell
and editing in the Formula Bar. You will find it easier to edit using the formula bar
tether than editing in the cell it self.
Using the Backspace or Delete (÷) key will remove the entire contents of a
selected cell, or, if the pointer is in the formula bar, the Backspace or Delete enables
you to make changes in the content of the cell. When you have finished typing either
click on (-). Clicking on (X) in the formula bar makes the active cell blank. Data can
be entered into a cell on the worksheet. It is also necessary to start with the first cell.
You can also make cells blank if you wish.
Moving the Cell pointer

To move the pointer one cell to the left, right, up, or down, use the keyboard arrow
days. The table below shows other frequently used keyboard commands.
Keystrokes to move the cell pointer

Keys To Move

PgDn Down one Screen
PgUP Up one screen
Home To column A in the current row
Ctr1+ Home To cell A1
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 83 of 208
To activate a cell with a mouse, simply click the cell. If you want to see other areas of
the worksheet, use the scroll bars. To scroll up or down on row, click the up or
down arrow at the ends of the vertical scroll bar. Use the arrows at the either end of
horizontal scroll bar to scroll one column to the left or right.
Selecting Data
You can select data in excel cells in various ways:
+ To select an entire column or Row:
Click on the column or row letter
+ To copy adjacent columns or rows:
• Hold down the mouse button and drag the pointer across the column
the columns and rows
+ To select Non contiguous rows or Columns:
• Hold down the ctrl key and click on each column or row or cells in the
columns and rows
Block of cells can be selected by clicking on the top left cell and dragging diagonally
to the bottom right hand cell. To select all in the worksheet click on the select All
box. To de-select just click anywhere in the window.
4.2.2. Working with a Worksheet

To rename a worksheet:
1. Select the worksheet
2. Choose the Rename command from the Formant menu the sheet command.
+ Type the new name then click anywhere on the worksheet. Or
+ Right –Click being on the worksheet name, then select the Rename
command from the shortcut menu displayed and type the new
mane
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 84 of 208
You can also make the worksheet non-visible by using the Hide command
To hide the worksheet:
1. Select the worksheet
2. Choose the hide command from the format menu then sheet command.
After you apply this command the worksheet will not be visible.
To display the hidden worksheet (unhide the worksheet):
1. Choose the unhide command from the format menu then sheet command
2. Select the worksheet you want to unhide from the unhide dialog box
3. Click on OK button

To change the background of the worksheet:
Select the worksheet
1. Choose the background command from the format menu then sheet command
2. Select the background file by opening the appropriate folder or drive from the
sheet background dialog box
3. Click on OK

To delete a worksheet:
1. Activate the worksheet
2. From the edit menu select the delete sheet command
4.2.3. Exiting Excel
+ Choose exit from the file menu or
+ Click on windows close button


Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 85 of 208
4.3. Series
Microsoft Excel can create a variety of series such as sequential numbers, sates and
mixed text. For example, you can extend a series such as 1, 2,3, to include 4,5,6…
and so on.
The methods used to create a series are the FILL HANDLE on a cell or range
selection, and the fill series command on the edit menu.
4.3.1. Types of series
You can create several types of series in Microsoft excel.
• Time: A time series can include increments of days, weeks, or months.
Example: 9:00 ⇒, 11:00, 12:00…
Mon. ⇒ Tue, Wed, Th,
Jan ⇒ Feb, Mar, Apr…
• Linear: When you create a linear series, Microsoft excel increases or
decreases values by constant value.
Example: 1, 2, ⇒3, 4, 5….
1, 3, ⇒ 5, 7, 9…
100, 95, ⇒ 90, 85, 80
• Growth: when you create growth series, Microsoft Excel multiplies values
by a constant factor.
Example: 2 (step value2) 4,8,16
2 (step value 3) 6,18,54
• Auto File: This extends several types of data. The Auto Fill feature logically
repeats same series.
Example: product 1, product2, product3,
1st period, 2nd period, 3rd period,
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 86 of 208
4.3.2. Creating a Series
The fill handle can create most types of series that the series command on the edit
menu can create. The primary difference between the two is that the Fill Handle is
more direct and more interactive that, while the series command is better suited for
creating very large series or for specifying a stop value.
To create a series by dragging:
• Select a range of two cells and enter the first tow values for the series. Leave
the range selected
• To extend the selection into the adjacent cells to the right, drag the Fill
Handle to the right
• To extend the selection into the adjacent cells below, drag the Fill handle
down.
• You can see the current value in the series in the reference area of the
formula bar. This changes as you drag the Fill Handle.
To create the series with the series command:
• In the first cell where your want to start the series, enter a starting value.
• Select the cells in the row or column in which you want to extend the series,
starting at the cell in which you entered the starting value of the series.
• From the edit menu, choose Fill Series, the Fill Series dialog box appears:
• If you want the series to be in a row, select the row option under Series In. If
you want the series to be in a column, select the column option under Series
In.
• Under Type, select a series type.

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 87 of 208
• In the Step value box type the increment, decrement, or growth factor you
want to use.
• If you want Microsoft Excel to stop extending the series when it reaches a
certain value, type that value in the stop value box. Otherwise, Microsoft
Excel extends the series until it fills the entire selection
• Choose the OK button
4.3.3. Moving and Copying Data and Formats
With Microsoft excel, you can copy cells containing notes and formats. You can
move or copy cells to different part of the same worksheet, to another worksheet, or
to any other application that can read data from the clipboard. If you move cells,
Microsoft Excel automatically adjust relative cell references to the moved cells so
your formulas still work. If you copy cells, the original cells are not affected.
As in Microsoft word you have two methods to copy or move any screen element i.e.
Drag & Drop and Cut/Copy-paste method.
Moving Cells
Moving cells is like physically cutting out the cells and transferring them to a new
location either on the same worksheet or on different worksheet. When move cells,
Microsoft Excel moves the cells content the cell format and any notes attached to the
cell.
To move and replace cells by dragging:
• Select the cell or cells you want to move
• Position the mouse pointer over the border, the mouse pointer changes to an
arrow

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 88 of 208
• Hold down Shift and drag the border to the row or column grid line where
you want to
Insert data.
• Release the mouse button.
The Selection moves to cells around by the border, deleting the cells in the paste are.
To move and insert cells between existing cells by dragging:
• Select the cell or cells you want to move
• Position the mouse pointer over the border, the mouse pointer
changes to an arrow
• Hold down shift and drag the border to the row or column grid line
where you want to insert data.
• Release the mouse button.
The selection is inserted between the cells bordering of the row or column grid line.
To move and replace cells with Cut and paste command:
• Select the cell or cells you want to move
• From the Edit menu Choose Cut.
• Select the upper left cell of the paste area you want to move the data to
or select the entire paste area.
• From the Edit menu or standard toolbar, choose paste.
Copying Cells
Copying cells duplicate the cells and paste them into another location. When you
copy cells, Microsoft Excel copies, the cells content, the cell formats and any notes
attached to the cell.



Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 89 of 208
To copy and replace cell by dragging:
• Select the cell or cells you want to copy.
• Position the mouse pointer over the border, the pointer changes to an arrow.
• Hold down Ctrl and drag the selection to where you want to copy the
selection.
• Position the border so that is surrounding the paste area you want t. Release
the mouse button
Note: To copy and inset cells between existing cells follow the above procedure but instead of
pressing only ctrl Key press Ctrl + Shift key.
To insert copied cells between existing cells with insert command:
Select the cell or cells you want to copy
• Click the copy tool, or choose copy from the Edit menu or the shortcut
menu.
• Select the upper left cell in the range where you want to insert the copied
cells.
• From the Insert menu or shortcut menu choose copied cells. Microsoft Excel
displays a dialog boxes so that you can chose which way you want to shift the
original cells.
• To shift the cells in the past area right, select the shift Right option button
• Choose OK button.








Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 90 of 208

4.4. Editing a Worksheet
4.4.1. Inserting Cells, Columns and Rows
You can insert blank cells, or blank rows and columns
To insert a row, column, or range by dragging:
1. Select the entire row or column by clicking the row or column heading
2. position the mouse pointer over the Fill Handle
3. press Shift and drag the Fill Handle and select the number of rows or columns
you want to insert
4. Release the mouse button.
To insert an entire row or column by using the insert command:
1. Select the same size of rows or columns equal to the number of rows or
columns you want to insert
2. From the insert menu or short cut menu choose row or column
To insert cells:
1. Select the same size of cells as the range of blank cells you want to insert
2. From the insert menu or from the shortcut menu choose Cells
3. Select the shift cells right or down option to shift the other cells in the
worksheet to accommodate the inserted cells
4. Choose the OK button
4.4.2. Clearing and Deleting
Clearing a cell clears the contents, comments, or formats from that cell but leaves
the cleared cell in the structure of the worksheet. But deleting a cell completely
removes the cell and its contents from the worksheet and moves adjacent cells to
close-up the space that was occupied by the deleted cells
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 91 of 208
To clear cell contents, formats or comments:
1. Select the cell(s) you want to clear
2. From the Edit (or shortcut) menu choose clear
3. To clear formats, formats, contents, or comments, select the appropriate
options from the sub-menu or choose clear contents from the shortcut menu.
To erase a range of cells by dragging:
1. Drag across the range of cells you want to erase
2. Drag the Fill Handle across the rows or columns you want to erase
3. Release the mouse button
To delete a row, column or rang by dragging:
1. Select the cells you want to delete.
2. Position the mouse pointer over the Fill Handle
3. Press Shift and Drag the Fill Handle across the rows or columns you want to
delete
4. Release the mouse button
4.4.3. Find and Replace
To find cells containing specific data:
1. To search the entire worksheet, select a single cell. To limit the search, select
the cell range you want to search
2. From the Edit menu select Find command
3. Select the options you want
4. To search forward from the active cell choose the Find Next button. To
search backward hold down shift key and choose the Find Next command
5. Repeat step 5 until all occurrences of what you specified are found
6. End your work with the close button

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 92 of 208
To Find and Replace data:
1. To search the entire worksheet, select a single cell. To limit the search, select
the cell range you want to search
2. From the Edit menu select Replace command
3. In the Find What box type the content you want to find and replace
4. In the Replace What box type the data that will replace what you specified
Find What box
5. Select the options you want
6. To replace data in the active cell and fond the next occurrence, choose the
replace button. To replace all occurrences of the data, Choose Replace all
7. Click Close button

4.5. Formatting a Worksheet
4.5.1. Formatting the Appearance of Data
To add emphasis to your data, or to make your worksheet easier to read, you can use
the formatting features of Excel. You can format worksheet cells before or after you
enter the data. You can format the appearance of data with tools on the format
toolbar, or with the Cells command on the Format menu or shortcut menu.
To change the appearance of data using Cells command:
1. Select the cells you want to format
2. From the Format menu or shortcut menu, choose Cells. The format cells
dialog box will appear.
3. Select the Font tab under Format Cells
4. Select the font styles, size and so on from the list
5. Click OK
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 93 of 208
Formatting Data with Numbers
Microsoft Excel includes variety of number, dates, and time formats. You can use
one of the built-in formats, or you can use one of the built in formats, or you can
create your own.
To assign a number, date or time format:
1. Select the cell or range you want to format
2. From the format menu, choose Cells
3. From the format cells dialog box, select the Number tab
4. In the category box, select the type of entry you want to format
5. Select the desired number format
6. Click OK
4.5.2. Aligning Worksheet Data
You can format cell entries and text box so that the data is aligned or rotated the way
you want.
To align text and numbers with the alignment tools:
1. Select the cell(s) you want to format
2. Click the Alignment tab from cell Format dialog box
3. Select the desired option
4. Click OK
4.5.3. Formatting Borders and Shading
You can shade cells or put a border around them. You can draw any combination of
horizontal and vertical lines on the left, right, top, or bottom of a cell. You can also
create double underlines and column lines.
To add borders or shading:
1. Select the cell(s) you want to format
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 94 of 208
2. Form the format (or shortcut) menu choose Cells
3. Form the cells dialog box select the Border tab
4. Choose options you want
5. Click OK
To shade cells with a pattern:
1. Select the cell(s) you want to format
2. Form the format (or shortcut) menu choose Cells and select the patterns tab
3. Choose options you want
4. Click OK
Changing Column Width and Row Heights
To quickly adjust the column width to accommodate the longest cell entry in the
column, double click the line to the right of the column heading. If more than one
column changes the column width of all selected columns
To select the standard column width:
1. Select the entire column, then from the format menu choose Column width
2. In the standard width box, type the column width you want
3. Click OK


To adjust row height to the best fit:
Double click the line below the row heading. If more than one row is selected
double clicking the row heading line for one row changes the tow height of all
selected columns
You can also use the row and column command under the Format menu to
customize the column width and row height as well as to fit them to the
longest or widest entry

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 95 of 208
4.6. Using A List to Organize Data
One way to store data on a worksheet is in a list. A list is a labeled series of rows that
contain similar data. For example, a list can be a listing of items with their
corresponding price. A list can be used as a database: you can think of a list as a
simple database, where rows are records and columns are fields. When performing
most database tasks such as finding, sorting or subtotaling data, Microsoft Excel
automatically recognizes your list as a database.
Once you create a list you can you can add, find, edit or delete records by using a
data form. A Data form is a dialog box that displays one complete record at time. To
use a data form your list should have column labels. Using criteria in data form, you
can search for data. When you click the criteria button in the data form, Excel
changes the data form so that you can you can type in the fields is interpreted as
search conditions.
4.6.1. Entering Database Information
After you decide the on the design of the database, you can create the database by
first entering the records according to the following guideline:
Database Size: a database can be as large as an entire worksheet
Field Name Location: the first row of your database must contain the field names;
a mane that identifies the data stored in a field. Each column in a database is a field.
4.6.2. Sorting a Database
You can reorganize the data in the database alphabetically or numerically with the
sort command on the data menu. You can sort rows or columns in any selection and
you can choose whether to sort the rows (or columns) in ascending (or descending)
order. You can specify up to three keys to sort a database.

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 96 of 208
To sort a list of data:
1. Select a single cell in the list
2. Select the Sort command from the Data menu. The sort dialog box appears.
3. In the sort by list box, select your first key column (if required, it is also
possible to select the second and the third key columns from the two then By
list boxes)
4. For each key column determine the order of sorting by selecting Ascending or
Descending.
5. Click options and select one of the Option buttons to sort Rows or Columns
and Click ok
6. Click OK or press Enter key
Note: - you can use the sort Ascending and sort Descending buttons on the standard toolbar to
Quickly sort the list by first selecting a cell from the list.
4.6.3. Filtering a List
Microsoft Excel allows you to view selected data from your lists. This can be done by
applying filters. In Excel there are two types of filters: Auto filter and Advanced
Filter
Auto Filter
To apply an auto filter:
1. Select a cell from the list
2. On the Data menu point to Filter. From filter sub menu select Auto Filter.
(Excel places drop down arrows directly on the field manes (column labels of
your list))
3. Click on one of these arrows to display a list of all unique items in the column
4. Select an item to display only those records, which conform to this criterion
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 97 of 208
Using Custom Criteria with Auto Filter
Usually you need to filter more complex criteria than those which are listed directly
under the drop down arrows.
To enter Custom Criteria
1. Choose custom from the drop down list. The following dialog box will be
displayed.
2. Enter the required criteria by clicking the operator drop down arrow
3. Colic OK
Advanced Filter
Advanced filter criteria can include multiple conditions applied in a single column,
multiple criteria applied to multiple columns, and conditions created as the result of
a formula.
Three or more conditions in a single column
If you have three or more conditions for a single column, type the criteria directly
below each other in separate rows. For example, the following criteria range displays
the rows that contain either “Davolio,” “Buchanan,” or “Suyama” in the Salesperson
Column.

Sales person
Davolio
Buchanan
Suyama




Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 98 of 208
Criteria from two or mote columns
To find data that meets one condition in two or more columns, enter all the criteria
in the same row of the criteria range. For example, the following criteria range
displays all rows that contain “produce” in the Type column, “Davolio” in the
Salesperson column, and sales values greater than $1,000.
Type Salesperson Sales
produce Devolio >1000

Note: You can also specify multiple conditions for different columns and display
only the rows that meet all the conditions by using the Auto Filter command on the
Data menu.
To find data that meets either a condition in one column or a condition in another
column, enter the criteria in different rows of the criteria range. For example, the
following criteria range displays all rows that contain either “produce “ in the Type
column, “Davolio” in the Salesperson column, or sales values greater than $1,000.

Type Sales person Sales
Produce
Devolio
>1000

To find rows that meet one of two conditions in one column and one of two
conditions in another column, type the criteria in separate rows. For example, the
following criteria range displays the rows that contain Davolio in the Salesperson
column and sales values greater than $3,000, or the rows for salesperson Buchanan
with sales values greater than $1, 5000.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 99 of 208
Sales person Sales
Devolio >3000
Buchanan >1500

To practice Advanced Filter method:
1. Define the criteria in a blank cell of the worksheet, either by typing the fields
or by coping from the list and setting arguments accordingly
2. Choose Advanced Filter from the Filter submenu under the Data menu.
The advanced filter dialog box will be displayed
3. In the List Range box specify the range of cells from the list for which the
criteria will be applied
4. In the Criteria Range box, click the Collapse Dialog button and select the
criteria range
5. Click the Copy to Another Location button if you want the filtered list to
be displayed in a different cell address. To do so click the Collapse Dialog
button in the Copy to box and select blank cells.
4.6.4. Data Forms
A data form is a dialog box that provides a simple way to view, change, add, and
delete records in your database, or to find specific records based on a given criterion.
Add a record to a list by using a data form:
1. Click a cell in the list you want to add the record to.
2. On the Data menu click Form, Excel displays the Data form. The data
form displays all fields of a record
3. Click New (to add a new record)


Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 100 of 208
4. Type the information for the new record. To move to the next field, press
TAB. To move to the previous field, press SHIFT+TAB.
5. When you finish typing data, press ENTER or add the record.
6. When you finish adding records, click Close to add the new record and
close the data form.
Notes
• Fields that contain formulas display the results of the formula as a label. The label cannot
be changed in the data form.
• If you add a record that contains a formula, the formula is not calculated until you press
ENTER or click Close to add the record.
• While you are adding a record, you can undo changes if you click Restore before you press
ENTER or click Close to add the record.
• Microsoft Excel adds the record when you move to another record or close the data form.
Note: to find a record having a given data, click the Criteria button. Type the data you want to
Look for in the corresponding field; and click Find Next to search forward or click
Find prev to search backward.


4.7. Formulas
Entering formula is the basic technique you use to analyze data on a worksheet. With
a formula you can perform operations such as addition, subtraction, multiplication,
division, and comparison on worksheet values.
A formula can include any of the following elements: operators, Cell references,
values, or functions. A formula always begins with an equal sign (=)


Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 101 of 208
Using Operators
Microsoft Excel uses three types of operators.
1. Arithmetic Operators: performs basic mathematical operations to produce
numeric results
Example: + (addition),-(Subtraction or Unary Minus),* (Multiplication),/
(division), % (percentage), and ∧ (exponentiation)
2. Test Operators: To combine two or more text values into a single text
value.
Example:& - connects or concatenates two or more text values together
3. Comparison Operators: compares two values and produces the logical
value True or False
Examples: =,>,<,>=(greater than or equal to ), <=(less than or equal to
),<>(not equal to )
Normally when you enter a formula in a cell, the result will be displayed in the cell and the
formula will be displayed in the formula bar.
4.7.1. Cell References
There are four types of cell references – A1, $A$1, $A1, A$1
A1 – this type of cell reference is called Relative Reference because it changes
relative to the position pointer.
$A$1 – this type of cell reference is called Absolute Reference. This reference does
not change with the position of the cell pointer. The “$” sign indicates tat both
the row number and the column letter are fixed.
$A1/A$1 – in $A1 the column letter is fixed and in A$1 the row number is fixed



Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 102 of 208
To change a cell reference type:
1. Select the cell that contains a reference type you want to change
2. Select the cell reference by clicking it on the formula bar
3. Press F4 to toggle between the four reference types
4. When you are finished press Enter

Cell Reference Operators
There are three types of cell reference operators:
Range (colon) – produces a reference to all cells between the two references
inclusive.
E.g., A1:D5 means cells from A1 up to D5 including A1 and D5.
Union (Comma) – produces one reference, which includes the two separate
references
E.g., A1,D5 means the two separate cells: A1 and D5.
Intersection (Space) – produces one reference, which is common to the two separate
references. E.g., B7: D7 C6:C8 means only C7
Note: when using reference there is another way available: naming cells and range.
To mane cells or range of cells, select the cell (s); select Define from the Name
submenu on Insert menu and then type its name. You can also type the name
directly in the formula bar.
To enter a formula:-
1. Select the cell into which you want to enter the Formula
2. Type equal sign to activate the formula bar
3. type the formula. The formula appears both in the formula bar and in
the cell
4. Click the enter box (-). The formula bar displays the formula and the
cell displays the result.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 103 of 208
4.7.2. Worksheet Functions
A function is a special prewritten formula that takes a value or values ( which are
called Arguments), performs an operation and returns a value or values. The
arguments must be enclosed in parenthesis. For example instead of typing
=A1+A2+A3+A4, you can use the Sum function. To build the formula = Sum
(A1:A4)
To use functions:
1. Select the cell into which you want to `paste the function
2. Select Functions from Insert menu (or click the paste function button on
the Standard tool bar.) The function dialog box will be displayed
3. Select a function from the list to display the function dialog box
4. Type the arguments or type the collapse Dialog button to select the the
argument in the appropriate argument boxes
5. When you finish editing the formula click OK or press Enter
Note: you can also type the complete formula in the formula bar
Mathematical Functions
Microsoft Excel provides several mathematical functions for carrying out specialized
calculations quickly and easily
The sum Function
The sum function adds a series of numbers. It tales the form:
= Sum (Number1, Number2…..)
The argument is a series of numbers, formulas, ranges or cell references
that result in numbers. Sum ignores references to text values, logical
values or blank cells


Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 104 of 208

The Auto sum button
If you select a cell and click the Auto sum button Excel creates the =Sum (
) formula and guesses which numbers you want to add. If the proposed
argument is correct you can click the Auto sum button for the second time to
enter the formula or else you can select the correct set of values to be added.
The SQRT Function
The SQRT function returns the positive square root of a number. It takes
the form:
= SQRT (Number)
If the number is negative, the SQRT function returns the #Num! Error
value
The product Function
Multiplies all the numbers referenced by its arguments. It takes the form:
= PRODUCT (Number1, Number2….)
Statistical Functions
The Average Functions
The Average Function computes the Average of the numbers in a range by
summing a series of values and then dividing by the number of values. It
takes the form:
=Average (number1, Number2…..)
It ignores blank, logical and text cells.

The Max Function
The Min function returns the smallest value in a range. It takes the form:
=Max (Number1, Number2…..)

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 105 of 208
The Min Function
The Min function returns the smallest value in a range. It takes the form:
=Min (Number1, Number2…..)
Logical Functions
Most logical functions use conditional test to determine whether a specified
condition is true or false. A conditional test is an equation that compares the
numbers, functions, formulas, labels or logical values. Every conditional test
must include at least one logical operator. Logical operators define the test
relationship between elements of the conditional test. For example, in the
conditional test A1>A2, the greater than(>) logical operator compares the values
in cells A1 and A2.
The If Function
= if (Conditional test, value if condition is true, value if condition is false)
You can use text arguments in If functions to return text strings instead of numeric
values
Example: = If (B2>=50, “Pass”, “Fail” )
If the value in cell B2 is greater than 50, the function returns “pass”, otherwise it
returns “Fail”, Note that the text arguments are enclosed in double quotes You can
use formulas as arguments in If functions.
E.g. = If (B2>500, B2 * 0.2, B2 * 0.1)
In the above example, the commission is calculated as 20% of the amount if the value
in cell B2 is greater than 500; otherwise it will be 10%of the amount.
The Nested If Function
At times you can not resolve a logical problem using only logical
operators. In these cases, You can use if function inside another if function
to create a hierarchy of tests.
E.g. = If (B2<50, “Failure”, if (b2<70, “Fair”, Good”)
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 106 of 208
If the value of in cell B2 is less than 50, the function returns,” Failure”. If it
is not less than 50 it compares it with 70 and if it is true (i.e., if B2 is
greater than 50 and less than 70) “Fair” will be returned; otherwise “Good”
will be returned.
The And, Or, and Not functions
These three additional functions help us develop compound conditional tests. The
functions work in conjunction with the simplest operators: =, <, >, >=, and <=
The AND and OR functions can have as many as 30 logical arguments. They have the
form:
=AND (logical Value1, logical value2…)
=OR (logical value1, logical value2….)
The not function has only one argument and it takes the form:
=NOT (Logical Value)
These functions are usually used with If function.
E.g.1, = IF (And (B2>50,C2>50), “pass”, “Failure”)
If the value in both B2 and C2 is greater than 50, “Pass” will be displayed;
Otherwise “Failure” will be displayed.
E.g.2, = IF (OR (B2>50, C2>50), “Pass”, “Failure”)
If the value in either B2 or C2 is greater than 50, “Pass” will be displayed;
otherwise “Failure” will be displayed.







Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 107 of 208
4.8. Charts
A chart is a graphic representation of worksheet data. Values from worksheet cells,
or data points displayed as bars lines, columns, pie slices or other shapes in the chart.
Data points are grouped into data series which are distinguished by different colors or
patterns.
4.8.1. Creating a Chart

After selecting worksheet data that you want to plot, you can create a chart directly
on a worksheet or as a separate document on its own window. A chart created on a
worksheet is a graphic object called embedded chart and is saved as part of the
worksheet on which it was created.
To create an embedded chart on a worksheet with the chart wizard:
1. Select the range of worksheet cells that contain the data you want to plot
including any worksheet column or row labels that you want to use in the
chart. Do not select empty cells.
2. Click the chart wizard tool from the standard tool bar or select chart
command from insert menu. The char dialog box appears.
3. Select the type of chart you want and click next button to move to the next
step.
4. Enter the data range and click next
5. Select any appropriate tab and set the options in the third step of the wizard.
6. In the final step (Step4 of 4) of the chart wizard specify the chart location
i.e., select As Object In Option
7. Click finish, Microsoft Excel inserts the chart according to your choices
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 108 of 208
4.8.2. Parts of a Chart
Chart: The entire area in the chart window, including all elements of the chart
such as labels,
Axes, data markers.
Chart Menu Bar: The menu bar that displays the name of the chart menus when
a chart document is active.
Chart Toolbar: The tool bar that displays charting tools, chart formatting tools
and the chart wizard tool.
Plot Area: The area in which Excel plots data
Data Marker: A bar, area, Dot, picture or other symbol that marks a single data
point or value
Data labels: Are values of the worksheet displayed on top of the chart type
which it represents
Chart Data Series: A group of related values such as all the data values In a
single row or column of the worksheet selection. A chart can have one or more
data series.
Series Formula: A formula describing a chart data series.
Axis: A line that serves as a major reference for plotting data in a chart
Category Name: Category name corresponds to the labels for the worksheet
data that are usually plotted along the X-axis. The chart data series manes are
used in legend
Tick Mark: A small line that intersects an Axis and marks off a category, Scale
or Chart data series.
Grid Lines: Optical lines that extend from the tick marks on an Axis across the
plot area to make it easier for you to view data values
Chart text: Text that describes data or object in a chart
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 109 of 208
Legend: A key that identifies the patterns, colors, or symbols associated with
number of a chart data series and shows the chart data series name that
corresponds to each data marker
4.8.3. Working with Chart and Chart Items
To select a chart or a chart item:
• Just click on the chart or chart item you want to select.
To move the chart on the worksheet:
• Select the chart or any chart item you want to select.
To change the size of the chart:
• Select it and point to one of its corners when the pointer changes to a
double headed arrow, drag the chart to resize it
To delete an embedded chart:
1. Select it
2. Choose the chart type command from the chart menu
3. Select the chart type you want. Or click the arrow next to the chart type
button on the chart toolbar and select the chart type you want from the list
To delete an embedded chart:
1. Open the worksheet containing the embedded chart
2. Select the embedded char
3. From the edit or shortcut menu choose clear. Microsoft Excel removes the
chart from the worksheet
To delete a non embedded chart use the delete sheet command from the edit
menu
Formatting a Chart
Adding and Deleting Chart Text and Axis Titles
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 110 of 208
You can enhance the appearance of your chart by adding the required information.
For example,
To add a chart title or axis title:
1. Click the chart to which you want to add a title
2. On the chart menu, click in the chart options, and then type the text you want.
3. To add a charter title, click the Chart Title box, and then type the text you
want.
4. To add one or more axis titles, click in appropriate box for each title and then
type the text you want
Note: to insert a line break in a chart title or axis title, click the text on the chart
menu and click where you want to insert the line break, and then press ENTER.
To add unattached text:
1. Click the Textbox tool on the drawing bar and type the text you want while no
other text is selected
2. Click the Enter box or press Enter
To delete chart text:
1. Click the text to select
2. From the Edit menu or Shortcut menu, choose clear
To edit chart text:
1. Click the text on the chart to select it
2. Click inside the text
3. Make your editing
4. Click somewhere else but don’t press Enter.
Adding, Deleting, And Formatting A Chart Legend
A chart legend provides a guide to the data marker in much same way that a toad map
legend provides a guide to the colors and symbols used in a map.

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 111 of 208
To add a legend:
1. Click the chart to which you want to add a legend
2. On the Chart menu, click Chart Option, and then click the Legend tab
3. Select the show legend check box
4. Under placement, click the option you want
To delete legend:
Select the legend and choose the Clear command from the Edit menu formatting the
Chart Legend
You can control the style, color and weight of the borderline around the legend, and
the pattern, foreground color and background color used within the area of legend
box. To format the border and area or the legend box:
1. Double click the legend to display the Format legend dialog box. You can also
click the legend to select it and choose selected legend from the Format menu
or the shortcut
2. Select the Font tab and the patterns tab independently
3. To format the font of the legend text, choose the Font tab, and then select the
options You want
4. To apply all your changes and close the dialog box, choose the OK button









Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 112 of 208
Chapter 5: Microsoft Access
5.1. What is a Database?
Definition: - Database is an organized collection of related information, i.e.
description of set of objects, people, events, transactions, locations, etc.

The origin of DATABASE is some (Business, Home, personal etc.) problem. The
problem itself may be simple or complicated which occurs regularly or happens only
once. The role of the database is then to provide a way to organize facts pertaining to
the raised problem in such a way that the organized facts suggest the solution itself.

People run their personal business with DATABASE such as checkbook, address
book, phone book, Mail list etc. Your bank for instance keeps track of your money
and the Accounting department monitors your payable and receivable accounts. Each
of the above examples organizes information (DATABASE) in such a way that it be
easily STORED, RETRIEVED and ACCESSED.
5.1.1. Starting Microsoft Access 2003
To Start Microsoft accesses do one of the followings:
• Click on the Start button, highlight programs, and then click on Microsoft
Access, or
• Double click on the shortcut icon from your desktop.
• Select Blank Database to create a new database.
• Select Database Wizard to create a new database with the help of Wizard
(a feature that guides you throughout the operation)

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 113 of 208
Note: - When you select one of the above options you will be prompted to
name the file, give it a name and click on Create button.
• Select Open an Existing Database, then the file you want from the list to
open an existing database.

5.1.2. The Microsoft Access 2003 Screen
After opening a new or an existing database, you will be launched to the Microsoft
Access Screen
(See fig.3 below)
MS – Access application Window

Fig .3 The Microsoft Access application windows

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 114 of 208
Application Window: -is a window that contains a running application. The
name of the application and any associated document, and the
application’s menu bar, appear at the top of the application window.
Database Window: -is a Window that display all database objects in the
current database.
Database Objects: -are list of database tables, queries, forms or other
database parts. For example, Membership List and Membership Code
tables in fig. 3 above are database objects.

Tabs: - are tags within the same window that show different
classification of the same topic. Clicking these tabs lets you switch to a
specific part of the topic. For example, clicking the table’s tab displays list
of all objects of that type. (See fig.3 above).
Toolbar: - contains buttons that give you quick access to many commands
and features.
The MS- Access has different Toolbars that are used to perform different
tasks
To display or hide any toolbar you want
• From view menu choose toolbars.
• Click on the toolbar you want to display or hide.




Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 115 of 208
5.1.3. Using Help
On – screen help is an important feature of MS-Access. You can get help on
important commands, topics, and features of MS – Access. This can be obtained
by using the MS- Access Help menu or pressing F1 key.
If you have a dialog box open, or if you have a question about a screen icon or
any tool on the toolbar, you can get context- sensitive help using the Help tool
(?), by clicking the question mark in the dialog box or pressing SHIFT+F1.
And clicking on the button you need help (you can also use the Help tool on the
toolbar.)
Getting help using help menu
To get help using the Help Menu:
• From the Help menu, choose Contents and Index. The Microsoft Access Help
application window appears. (see fig.4)
• Type the feature you want to get information about.
• Click on the topic you want to know about and click on Display button or
double-click the topic.






Fig .4 help window



Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 116 of 208
5.2. Designing and Creating Databases
5.2.1. Designing a Database

In a relational database, such as those created using Microsoft Access, you
store information about different subjects in separate tables.
To design a database:
• Determine the purpose of the database.
• Determine the tables.
• Determine the fields.
• Determine the relationships between information.
5.2.2. Creating a Database
When you create a Microsoft Access database, you create one file that contains
the data and table structures as well as the queries, forms, reports, and other
objects that make up the database.
To create a database:
• Click the New Database button on the toolbar, or
• From the File menu, choose New database.
Microsoft Access displays the New Database dialog box where you specify a
name and location for the database.
Note: - You can create a database on the way when you start Microsoft Access,
by selecting Blank Database or Database Wizard from the Microsoft Access dialog
box. (See fig.21).
Table: - is a collection of data about a specific topic. Table organizes data into
columns (called fields) and rows (called records).
Design View: - is a window where you design and modify table’s structure.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 117 of 208
Datasheet View:- is a window that displays data in column and row formats. In
the Datasheet View you can add, delete, append or modify your data.

5.2.3. Creating Tables
To create a table with a Wizard:
Form the Database window, click the Tables tab, and then choose the New
button. In the New Table dialog box (see fig.5 below), choose the Table Wizard
option and click on OK.








Fig. 5 New Table Dialog Box
To create a custom designed table:
• From the Database window, click the Tables tab, and then choose the New
button.
• From the New Table dialog box, select Design View and click on OK.
The Table Design View screen appears (see fig. 6 below).




Fig. 6 Table Design view
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 118 of 208
In the Field Name column, type the name of the first field
In the Data Type column, select the data type you want by opening the list box
clicking the listing button . (About the available data types and their
selection refer the section.

Choosing Field Data Types
• In the Description column, type a description of the information this
field will contain.
Note that, the description is optional.
• Set the Filed properties for the field in the bottom part of the window,
depending on your choice.
• Repeat the above steps for each field in the table.
To save the table:
• Click the Save button on the toolbar or chose Save from the File
• menu to save the table design.
• Type a name for the table.
• Click on OK.









6
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 119 of 208
The following table shows the Field Data Types available in Access:
Data type Use for
Text. Text and numbers, such as names and addresses, phone numbers
and postal codes. A Text field can contain as many as 255
characters. Access assigns a default length of 50 characters.
Memo
Lengthy text and numbers, such as descriptive comments or
explanations. A Memo field can contain up to 64,000 characters.
Number
Numerical data on which you intend to perform mathematical
calculations, except calculations involving money. Set the Field
Size property to define the specific Number type.
AutoNumber

Sequential numbers automatically inserted by Microsoft Access.
Numbering begins with 1.
Date/Time

Dates and times. A variety of display formats is available, or you
can create your own.
Currency
Currency values. Don’t use the Number data type for currency
values because numbers to the right of the decimal may be rounded
off during calculations. The Currency data type maintains a fixed
number of digits to the right of the decimal.
Yes/No

Yes/No, True/False, On/ Off, or fields that will contain only one
of two values.
OLE Object Objects created in other programs using the OLE protocol that can
be linked to or embedded in a Microsoft Access database through a
control in a form or report.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 120 of 208
Adding a Field to a Table

To add a field to a table:
• In table Design view, click on the row above which you want to add the new
field, then from the Insert menu choose Rows, or
• Click on the row above which you want to add the new field, then from the
Insert menu choose Lookup Field and follow the dialog box instruction to add
the new field.

Moving Fields in a Table
You can recorder the fields in a table. Changing field order in a table changes column
order in the table’s datasheet.
To move fields in a table:
• In the table’s Design view, select the fields you want to move by clicking each
field’s row selector.
• Click and hold down the mouse button in the row selector again.
• Microsoft Access displays a thin horizontal bar just above the last selected
row.
• Drag and drop the horizontal bar to the row just below where you want to
move the fields.
Deleting a Field from a Table
You can delete a field from a table at any time.
To delete a field from a table:
• In the table’s Design view, select the row containing the field you want to
delete.
• Press the Del key, or choose Delete Row from the Edit menu.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 121 of 208

Primary key
Primary Key: - is one or more fields that uniquely identify each record in a table. In
the same way that a license plate number identifies a car, the primary key uniquely
identifies a record. (See fig.7
1. Types of Primary Key
There are three types of primary Keys; single- field, auto-number and multiple-field.
Single-field primary key:- Most table have a single- field primary key. Microsoft
Access won’t allow duplicate values in this field. For example, in the Customers
table (see fig.7), no two customers can have the same customer ID.
Auto number primary key: - you can automatically assign sequential numbers to
the records in your table by using an auto numbered field as the table’s primary key.
In the Employees table (see fig.7), the first employee is automatically assigned the
number “1”, the second employee “2” and so on.
Multiple- field primary key:- If a table has more than one primary key field,
Microsoft Access can not accept duplicate combinations of values. In the Order
Details table (see fig 7.) an order can list many products, but each product can be
listed only once per order. The primary key of this table consists of two fields, Order
ID and product ID.
2. Defining primary key
To define primary key
• In the table deign view, select the field (s) you want to assign as
primary key
• From the toolbar click on the Primary Key button or from Edit menu
choose Primary Key.

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 122 of 208
Adding and Editing Data
To add a record using a Datasheet:
• If you are in Table Design View, switch to the Datasheet View
(see fig.8) by clicking on the Datasheet View button from the toolbar
(Make sure to select Yes to save the design before you switch to the
Datasheet), or
• From Database Window highlight the table into which you want to
enter the record and click on Open button.
Type each field entry in the corresponding column
To delete a record:
• In the datasheet view, select the record you want to delete.
• Press the Del key or choose Delete from the Edit menu.
Microsoft Access prompts you to confirm the deletion.
• Choose Yes to delete the record permanently.
Editing a Files Data Type and properties
You can edit a field Data Type and properties any time you want. To do so,
• If you are in Datasheet view, click on the Design View button from the
toolbar
• From Database Window highlight the table you want to edit and click on
Design button
• Perform the edition you want, and then save the changes.





Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 123 of 208
Selecting Fields and Records
To Select Do this
A single record Click the recorded selector.
Several records Drag down the record selectors.
All records Click the top record selector or choose Select All Records from
the Edit menu.
A single column Click the field selector.
Multiple columns Drag across the field selectors.
Single cell Click inside the left edge of the cell.
Multiple cells Drag the pointer across the cells, starting inside the left edge of a
cell.

Undoing last action
MS – Access lets you undo most of last actions performed accidentally, such as,
deleting field, moving field and son on.
To undo the last action:
• From the Edit menu, choose Undo< Action>. Note that Action is a
variable that represents the action you performed, for example, delete, or
• If you are prompted for confirmation, select NO or Cancel to revert the
action.
Freezing and Unfreezing Columns
In a datasheet, three are often more columns than you can view in the window at one
time. To help you view your data, you can “freeze” one or more columns on the left
side so that they don’t scroll off the screen.


Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 124 of 208

To freeze a column:
• Click anywhere in the column, or click the field selector of the column
you want to freeze.
• From the Format menu, choose Freeze Columns.
To unfreeze column:
• From the Format menu, choose Unfreeze All Columns option.
Hiding and Unhanding Columns
You can temporarily hide columns in a datasheet. This is useful for removing
extraneous data from the screen without running or rerunning a query and for
copying and pasting data in specific columns:
To hide columns:
• Click anywhere in the column, or click the field selector of the column you
want to hide.
• From the Format menu, choose Hide Columns.
To unhide columns:
• From Format menu, choose Unhide Columns.
• Microsoft Access displays the Unhide columns dialog box. Exposed columns
have a check mark next to them.
• Check the column you want to unhide and click on Close button.





Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 125 of 208
5.3. Organizing your Data

Using Microsoft Access’s sort feature you can sort the records in Ascending or
Descending order.
To sort records:
• In Datasheet view, select the column on which you want to base the sort.
• Click the Sort Ascending or Sort Descending button on the toolbar, or
• From Records menu choose sort, and then choose Ascending or
Descending.
5.3.1. Filtering Records
Using criteria you supplied, a filter can temporarily narrow your focus to a particular
set of records.
To filter records:
• In datasheet view, choose Filter from the Records menu.
• Select one of the Filter options, (Filter by From, Filter by Selection or
Advanced Filter/Sort)
Filter by Form: - Displays a datasheet where you enter the filter criteria. Enter the
criteria in the field column, which is used as filter criteria.
Note: - If you want to use multiple criteria for filtering, enter each criteria in its
corresponding column within the same row, for AND and for OR enter the first
criteria, then by clicking on Or tab enter the next criteria and continue doing the
same for the rest.




Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 126 of 208
Filter by Selection:- Selects the records by the highlighted (selected )field.
Advanced Filter /Sort:- Displays window with two portions. The top portion of
the window contains a field list for the underlying table or query and the lower
portion displays the grid in which you specify the filter criteria.
Add the field or fields for which you want to specify criteria in the grid by double-
clicking it from the top portion of the window.
Enter the criteria for the fields you have included in the defined area.
Note:- For multiple criteria related with AND, enter the criteria in the same row,
whereas for criteria related with OR, enter the criteria in different rows.
If you want to sort the filtered records, click the sort box of the fields on which you
want to base the sort, click the arrow, and then choose Ascending or Descending.
To apply the filter, click the Apply Filter/Sort button on the toolbar, or
Choose Apply Filter/Sort from the Records menu.


5.3.2. Entering Criteria
Criteria is an instruction you use to tell Microsoft Access to display the records you
want. You can enter criteria for on e or more fields.
To enter criteria:
• In the Filter window, click the first Criteria cell beneath the field for which
you want to set criteria.
• Enter the criteria expression by typing it or by using the Expression Builder.
• To enter another expression in the same field or in another field, move to the
appropriate criteria cell and enter the expression. (For AND and OR relations
see the notes in Filtering Records section).

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 127 of 208
5.3.3. The AND and OR Relations
If you want to use multiple- criteria to select records, you relate the criteria either
with AND or with OR.
• To relate criteria with AND enter all criteria you need in the same row.
Note: - If the criteria are related with AND unless all conditions are fulfilled the
record will not be selected.
• To relate criteria with OR enter each criteria in different rows.
Note:- If the criteria are related with OR, the record will be selected if at least one
condition is fulfilled.

5.3.4. Inserting Column or Row
To insert a column (field):
• Click anywhere in the column to the right of where you want the new column
to be inserted.
• From the Insert menu, choose Column.
To insert a row (record):
• From Insert menu, choose Record.
5.3.5. Deleting Column or Row
To delete a column (field):
• Select the column by clicking its column selector or click any where in the
column
• Choose Delete Column from the Edit menu.
To delete a row (record):
• Select the row by clicking its row selector or click anywhere in the row
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 128 of 208
• Choose Delete Record from Edit menu.

5.3.6. Removing a Filter
When you remove a filter from a table or form, Microsoft Access redisplays all the
records from the underlying table or query in their original order.
To remove a filter:
• Click the Apply Filter/Sort button 0 on the toolbar, or
• Select Remove Filter/Sort option from Records menu.

5.3.7. Saving a Filter as a Query
You can save a filter as a query for later use. The query will contain the criteria and
sort order you entered in the Filter window.
To save a filter as a query:
• In the Filter window, click the right mouse button, and then choose Save As
Query from the shortcut menu or choose Save As Query from the File
menu.
• Type a name for the query.
• Click on OK. The new query appears in the Database window within the
Queries tab.

5.3.8. Copying and Moving Microsoft Access Objects or
Text
To copy a database object:
• In the Database window, select the object you want to copy.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 129 of 208
• From the Edit menu, choose Copy.
• If you are copying the object into a different database, close the current
database and open the database into which you want to past the object.
• From the Edit menu, choose paste.

5.3.9. Printing a Datasheet
Microsoft Access prints a datasheet as it appears on the screen.
For large datasheets, Microsoft Access prints from left-to- right and then from top-
to- bottom. For example, if Your datasheet is three pages wide and two pages long,
Microsoft Access prints the top three pages first, then the bottom three pages. You
can preview your datasheet before printing by choosing print preview from the
File menu.
To print a datasheet:
• Display the table, query or form datasheet.
• If you intend to print selected records. To print all the records, select
nothing.
• Click the print button on the toolbar, or choose print from the File menu.
• In the print dialog box, under print Range, choose one of the following
options:
• Define the number of copies you want to print
• Click on OK.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 130 of 208

5.3.10. Renaming a Database Object
To rename a database object:
• In the Database window, select the object from the appropriate object list.
• From the Edit menu, choose Rename.
• Type a new name for the object, following Microsoft Access standard naming
Conventions, and then click on OK.












This option Prints
All All of the records in the table.
Selection The selected records.
Pages Specific pages from your table. Specify the page numbers of the first
and
Last pages you want to print.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 131 of 208
5.4. Queries

You use queries to view, change and analyze data in different ways. You can also use
them as the source of records for forms and reports.
5.4.1. Types of Queries
In Microsoft Access there are six types of queries available. (Select query, Crosstab
query, Maketable query, Update query, Append query and Delete query). The
Maketable, Update, Append and Delete queries are called Action Queries.

Select Query:- Retrieves data from one or more tables using criteria you specify
and then displays it in the order you want.
Crosstab Query:- Displays summarized values( Sums, Counts, Averages and so on)
from one field in a table and groups them by one set of facts listed down the left side
of the datasheet and another set of facts listed across the top of the datasheet.
Marketable Query:- Creates a new table from all or part of the data in one or
more tables.
Update Query:- Makes global changes to a group of records in one or more tables.
For example, you can raise the salaries by 5% for employees with in a certain job
category.
Append Query:- Adds a group of records from one or more tables to the end of
one or more tables.
Delete Query:- Deletes a group of records from one or more tables. Once you
delete records using a delete query, you can’t undo the operation. Make sure
you have selected only the records you want to delete before running your
query. It is advisable to have backup copies of your at all times, so that if you
delete the wrong records, you can retrieve them from your backup copies.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 132 of 208
5.4.2. Creating a Query with a Wizard
With a Query Wizard, you can quickly create advanced queries.
To create a query with a Wizard:
• In the Database window, click the Queries Tab, or
• Choose Queries from the database Objects submenu under the View menu.
• Click the New button.
• From New Query dialog box, choose the Wizard type you want, then click
on OK
• Follow the instructions in the Wizard dialog boxes.

5.4.3. Creating a Custom Designed Query
To create a custom designed query:
• In the Database window, click the Queries Tab, or
• Choose Queries from the View menu.
• Click the New button.
• From New Query dialog box select Design View and click on OK.
• The Show Table dialog box will be displayed as follows:







Fig.10 The Show Table dialog box
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 133 of 208
• Select the table or query you want to use and click on Add button.
• Multiple selections is possible.
• Close the show table dialog box. The query design screen will be displayed
as follows:
• Double-click the field you want to use in the query from the upper part of
the query design screen. The field will be added in the Design Gird (the
lower part of the query design screen). You can select and drag on field
or several fields, as described below.

To select Do this
A field Click the field name. (You can also double-click the name
in the field list or select a field directly from the list box
in the Field row on the Design Grid.)
A block of fields Hold down the Shift key and select the first and last
fields in the block.
Non- contiguous fields Hold down the Ctrl key as you select the fields.
All fields Double-click the title bar of the field list.
The whole table or
query
Click the asterisk (*).

Note: - If you want to remove a field after you added it in the Design Grid,
select the field by clicking its column selector, then press the Del key, or choose




Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 134 of 208
Delete Column from the Edit menu.
• Select the query type you want to apply from the Query menu
• Enter additional information you need, depending on the type of query
you are creating
• When you finish click on Run button, to execute the query, or
• Save the query by clicking on save button and giving a name to the
query.
5.4.4. Expressions in Queries and Filters
You can use expressions in queries and filters to specify criteria, update values
in a group of records, or create query fields that are based on a calculation.
You can type an expression in several places in the Design grid.
The table below shows where to type an expression to perform these operations.
Type in To
A Criteria cell Specify criteria for a select, cross tab, or action query.
An Update To
cell
Update records according to the results of the expression
(update queries only).
A Field cell Create a calculated field.

When you are designing a filter, you can type an expression in a Criteria cell or
a Field cell.





Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 135 of 208
5.4.5. Creating Select Query
To create a select query:
• In the Query Design View, choose Select from Query menu. (Select Query is
the default query).
• Refine your query by entering criteria, sorting, creating calculated fields, and
so on.
• When you finish run and /or save query.
5.4.6. Creating Make table Query
To create a make table query:
• In the query’s Design view, choose Make-Table from Query menu.
• Type the name of the new table in the Table Name box, or select the table
from the list if you want to replace the data in the selected table with the data
from the new table.
• Click on OK
• Set criteria just as if you are creating a select query to select the records you
want to create the table with.
• Click the Run button on the toolbar, or choose Run from the Query menu.
• Microsoft Access displays a confirmation box that tells you how many records
will be pasted to the new table.
• Choose OK to confirm the displayed prompt.
A new table with the selected records will be created.



Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 136 of 208
To view table with the selected records will be created.
• Click the Database Window button or select Database Objects from
view menu, to display the Database window.
• Click the Tables Tab to display the list of tables, and then double-
click the name of the table you just created or click on the table
and click on Open button.
5.4.7. Creating an Update Query
To update records:
• In the query’s Design vies, select Update from the Query menu
• Set criteria just as if you are creating a select query to select the records you
want to update.
• In the Update To cell for the field you want to update, use the Expression
Builder or type an expression or a value to change the data. For example, to
reduce prices by 20 percent in a Cost field, type {cost} *.8.
• Click the Run button on the toolbar, or choose Run from the Query menu.
• Microsoft Access displays a confirmation box that tell you how many records
will be updated in the table.
• Click on OK to confirm the update.
To view the results of an update query:
• From the Query menu, choose Select:
• Click the Datasheet View button on the toolbar to see your updated
records in Datasheet view.



Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 137 of 208
5.4.8. Creating an Append Query
To append records to a table:
• In the Query's Design view, select Append from the Query menu.
• In the Append dialog box, type the name of the table you want to append
the records to in the Append To list box, or select table name from the list.
• Choose OK when you finish.
Microsoft Access adds the Append To row to the Design Grid of the Append
Query window.
• Set criteria just as if you are creating a select query to select the records you
want to append.
• Select from the list, the field names of the table you are appending records to
in the Append To row, matching them to the fields in the Filled row.
• Click the Run button on the toolbar, or choose Run from the Query menu.
• Microsoft Access displays a confirmation box that tells you how many records
will be added to the table.
• Choose OK to confirm the displayed message.
5.4.9. Using a Calculated Field in a Query
You can create fields in a query by using an expression to calculate values.
To create a calculated field in a query:
• In the query's Design view, click the right mouse button in an empty cell, in
the Field row.
• Select Build.
• In the Expression Builder dialog box, type the field name for the new
calculated field to be created, then type colon (:).
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 138 of 208
Note: - that, if you don't enter a field name in the Expression Builder, Microsoft
Access assigns names such as Expr1, which may be meaningless for the field you
are creating.
• Enter the expression (formula) you want. For building the expression you can
use fields from the Database Objects, Built- in functions, numbers and other
operators and constants, directly from the Expression Builder dialog box.
• When you finish click on OK.
5.4.10. Editing a Query
You can modify a query or save it with a new name to create a new query.
To insert fields:
• In the query's Design view, drag the fields from the field list to the column in
which you want them inserted in the Design grid.
• The field currently shown in that column and all fields to its right move one
column to the right.
To delete fields:
• In the query's Design view, click the column selectors of the fields you want
to delete.
• Press the Del key, or choose Delete Column from the Edit menu.
To move fields:
• In the query's Design view, click the column selectors of the fields you want
to move.
• Click the column selectors again, and drag the fields to their new location.
The displaced field and all fields to its right move to the right.


Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 139 of 208
5.5. Forms
Forms are used for data entry, to open other forms, to accept user input and then
carry out an action based on that input.
5.5.1. Types of Form Views
Microsoft Access offers four types of form views; Design View, print preview,
Datasheet View and Form View.
5.5.2. Creating A Quick form
To create a quick form:
• In the Database window, click the Forms tab.
• Click on New button
• Select the table or query on which you want to base the form.
• Select one of the Quick Form options (Columnar, Tabular or
Datasheet), displayed in the New Form dialog box.
• Click on OK.
Microsoft creates the form type you selected automatically.
5.5.3. Creating A Form Using A Wizard
With a Wizard, you can quickly create a basic form that shows all the fields
and records in a Form View.
Note:- You can modify the form created using the Wizard any time you want.





Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 140 of 208
To create form without a Wizard:
• In the Database window, click the Forms tab.
• Click on New button
• Select the table or query on which you want to base the form.
• Select Form Wizard from the New Form dialog box
• Click on OK.
Follow the instructions of the Wizard's dialog boxes and perform the needed tasks
5.5.4. Creating A Custom Designed Form
To create a form without a Wizard:
• In the Database window, click the Forms tab.
• Click on New button
• Select the table or query on which you want to base the form.
• Select Design view from New Form dialog box
• Click on OK.
• The Form Design View will be displayed.






fig. 14 The Form Design View



Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 141 of 208

• Click on Field List button from the toolbar
• Drag the Field you want on the Form Design View
• Apply the formatting you want using the Formatting toolbar and the
Toolbox
Perform other tasks you want. When you finish, Click on Form View button o to
view the appearance of the form.
5.5.5. Making a Form Read-Only
You can prevent data from being accidentally changed, inserted in, or deleted from a
table by setting the Allow Edits property for a form.
To make a form read-only:
• In the form's Design view, display the properties box for the form.
• Set the Allow Filter, Allow Edits, Allow Deletions and Allow
Additions properties to NO.
Validating Fields and Records in Forms
A Validation Rule sets limits on the values you can enter in a field. If the rule is
violated, Microsoft Access displays an error message that you define in the
Validation Text property.
To create a validation rule for a control on a form:
• Display the properties box
• From the form, select the field for which you want to set a validation rule.
• In the properties box, enter the Validation Rule and the Validation
Text properties for the selected field.


Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 142 of 208
Property Description
Validation Rule Tests data before it's stored in a table.
Validation Text Specifies the error message displayed when the
expression in the Validation Rule property
evaluates to False.

5.5.6. Creating a Form with multiple Screens or pages
For a form used in Form view, you can add a page break to mark the start of a
new screen.
For printed forms, you can add a page break to start a new page n the middle of a
section.
To create a multi screen or multi page form:
• In the Design view of your form, display the toolbox and properties
box if they are not already displayed.
• Choose the page break tool in the toolbox, and then click on the form
where you want a new screen or page to start.
5.5.7. Adding a Label and Editing Label Text
A label is a type of control you can place on your form to add information.
To draw a freestanding label:
• Click the label tool in the Toolbox.
• Click where you want to place the label.
• Type the label you want.

To Edit text in a label:
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 143 of 208
• Click the label you want to edit.
• Click the label again.
• Add the new text or delete the text you want from the label.

5.5.8. Changing the Appearance of Text

To change the text appearance
• Click on the label.
• Select the format type you want, such as font, size, font style, and so on, from
the Formatting toolbar.
• If the label text doesn't fit in its box, you can resize it as you do with any other
boxes.
You can change the visual style of the label to give it a better look.
To change the visual style of a label:
• Click on the label.
• Display the properties box.
• Click on the Format tab in the properties box.
• Click the option that refers to the style you want to apply. For example,
Special Effect, border Style, Back Color, and so on.
• Click on the corresponding drop-down arrow of the style you want to apply,
then select the option you want.
• Close the properties box.
• To change the color, and other formats of the label, use the Formatting
toolbar buttons.

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 144 of 208
5.6. Reports
Report is an effective way to present your data in a printed format. Because you have
control over the size and application of everything on a report, you can display the
information the way you want to see it.
5.6.1. Generating a Quick Report
To create a quick report:
• In the Database window, click Reports Tab.
• Click on New button.
• Select the table or query on which you want to base the report, from the New
Report dialog box.
• Select one of the two Auto Report options (Columnar or Tabular).
• Click on OK.
• Microsoft Access will create the report for the table or query you have
selected automatically.
5.6.2. Generating a Report using a Wizard
With a Wizard, you can quickly create a basic report that shows all the fields and
records in a table or query, or you can create a custom report that displays data from
selected fields in a particular format such as mailing labels.
To generating a report with a wizard:
• In the Database window, click the Reports Tab.
• Click on New button.
• Select the table or query on which you want to base the report, from the New Report
dialog box.
• Select Report Wizard, and then click on OK.
• Follow the instructions in the Wizard dialog boxes.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 145 of 208
5.6.3. Generating a Custom Designed Report
To create a report without a Wizard:
• In the Database window, click the Reports Tab.
• Choose the New button.
• Select the table or query on which you want to base the report, from the
New Report dialog box.
• Select Design View, then click on OK.
• A blank report appears in Design view. You can add controls, sorting and
grouping levels, and other design features according to your specifications.
• Click on Field List button from the toolbar
• Drag the Field you want on the Report Design View
• Apply the formatting you want using the Formatting toolbar and the
Toolbox.
5.6.4. Changing a Form or Report's Underlying Table or
Query
Microsoft Access stores the name of the table or query from which a form or report
gets its data in the Record Source property. To change the underlying table or
query, reset the Record Source property.
To change the underlying table or query for a Form report:
• In the form or report's Design view, display the properties box for the form
or report.
• In the Record Source property box, select or type the name of a table or
query.

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 146 of 208
5.6.5. Creating a Sub report
A report within another report is a subreport.
You can use sub reports to
• Display summary data or detail records related to the information in a main
report.
• Combine two or more unrelated reports in an unbound main report.
To create a subreport:
• Create a report that you want to use as a subreport and save it.
• Open the main report in Design view.
• Press F11 to display the Database window.
• From the Database window, drag the report you created to the appropriate
section in the main report. For example, to print the report the report before
each group, drag it to the group header.
• Move the subreport control to the desired location and adjust the size of the
section, if necessary.
• If the data in the subreport is related to the data in the main report, ensure
that the subreport prints the correct records for each group by linking the
subreport control to the main report.

To link the subreport to the main report
Display the properties box for the subreport control, then set Link Child Fields
and Link Master Fields properties. In most cases, Microsoft Access will set these
properties automatically.
Lining a Subform/ Subreport Control to a Main Form or Report
When you use a subform or subreport, you want to make sure that it displays the
records that correspond to the record in the main form or repot. To synchronize the
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 147 of 208
records, you specify the linking fields or controls in the main form or report and the
linking fields in the subform/ subreport.

To link a subform/ Subreport control to a main form or report:
• In Design view of the main form or report, open the Properties box for the
Subform/subreport control.
• Set the Link Child Fields property to the linking fields in the Subform or
subreport.
• Set the Link Master Fields property to the linking fields or controls in the
main form or report.
5.6.6. Changing the Layout of a Subform or Subreport
To facilitate making changes to a sub form’s or sub report's design, you can open it
from the main form or report in which it was inserted.
To change the layout of a subform or subreport:
• In Design view of the main form or report, make sure the subform or
subreport control is not selected. (To cancel the selection, click any where in
the main form or report outside the subform or subreport control.)
• Double- click within the subform or subreport control.
• Make changes to the design.
• Save and close the subform or subreport.
• On the main form or report, click inside the subform or subreport control.
• Press Enter to load the changed subform or subreport.

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 148 of 208
5.6.7. Sorting and Grouping Data in Reports
You can print data in a specified order. If you want to highlight or summarize certain
information, you can divide data into separate groups and sort records within the
groups.
To sort data:
• In the report's Design view, display the Sorting and Grouping box, by clicking
on the Sorting and Grouping button, from the toolbar.
The sorting and grouping dialog box appears.
Fig 18 Sorting and Grouping dialog box
• In the First row of the Filed/Expression column, select a field name, or type
an expression.
• To change the sort order, select Descending from the Sort Order list.
• When you finish close the dialog box.
To group data:
• Set the sort order for the data in the report as specified above.
• Click the field or expression whose group properties you want to set.
• Set the group properties listed in the following table, in the Group
properties section.








Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 149 of 208
Use this property To
Group Header Add or remove a group header for the field or expression.
Group Footer Add or remove a group footer for the field or expression.
Group On Specify how you want the values grouped. The options you
see depend on the data type of the field on which you're
grouping. If you group on an expression, you see all the
options: Text, Data/ Time, and numeric fields.
Group Interval Specify any interval that is valid for the values in the field or
expression you're grouping on.
Keep Together Determine whether Microsoft Access prints all or only part of
a group on one page.


5.6.8. Changing Sorting and Grouping Order
You can change how the data in a report is sorted and grouped by changing the order
in which the fields or expressions are listed in the Sorting and Grouping box.
To change sorting and grouping order:
• In the Report's Design view, click on the Sorting and Grouping button from
the toolbar.
• In the Sorting and Grouping box, click the selector of the field or expression
you want to move.
• Click the selector again, and drag the row to a new location in the list.
Note:- If the groups you're rearranging have headers or footers, Microsoft Access
moves the headers, footers, and all the controls in them to their new positions.
However, you must adjust the locations of the controls in the headers and footers
yourself.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 150 of 208
To insert an additional sorting or grouping field or expression:
• In the Sorting and Grouping dialog box, click the selector of the row
where you want to insert the new field or expression, and then pass the
Ins key.
• In the Field/ Expression column of the blank row, select the field you
want to sort on, or type an expression.
• In the Sort Order column, select Ascending or Descending.
To delete a sorting or grouping field or expression:
• In the Sorting and Grouping box, Click the Selector of the field or
expression you want to delete, and then press the Del key.
• Choose OK to delete the sorting or grouping level, or choose Cancel to keep
it.
5.6.9. Hiding Duplicate Data on a Report
In grouped reports, you can display the name of each group either above the detail
records in the group header or beside the detail records in the detail section.
To hide duplicate data:
• Add a text box (bound to the field you're grouping on) to the report's detail
section.
• Display the properties box for the text box.
• Click on Format tab of the properties box.
• Set the Hide Duplicates property to Yes.

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 151 of 208
5.6.10. Adding or Removing Headers and Footers on a
Report
You can add or remove report, page, and group headers and footers on a report.
To add or remove a report header and footer:
• In Design view, choose Report Header/Footer from the View menu.
To add or remove a page header and footer:
• In Design view, choose page Header/Footer from the View menu.
Note:- If you want a page or report header but no footer, or vice versa, see the
section on sizing a header or footer later in this topic.
To add or remove a group header or footer:
• In Design view, click the Sorting and Grouping button on the toolbar, or
choose sorting and Grouping from the view menu.
• In the sorting and Grouping dialog box, click the field name, or type the
expression for which you're creating a header or footer.
• To add a group header or footer, set the Group Header or Group Footer
property to Yes. To remove a group header or footer, set these properties to
NO.
To size a header or footer:
• Move the pointer to the bottom or right edge of the header or footer until
the pointer turns into a plus sign with an arrow at its top and bottom tips.
• Drag the bottom edge up or down to change the height, and drag the right
edge in or out to change the width.




Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 152 of 208
To set properties for a header or footer:
• In Design view, select the header or footer.
• Display the properties box if it isn't already displayed.
• Set the properties for the headset or footer.
5.6.11. Sizing Sections in a Form or Report
You can increase or decrease the height of form or report sections individually.
However, a form or report has only one width. When you change the width of one
section, you change the width of the entire form or report.
To change either height or width:
• In the form's or report's Design view, change either the height or the width by
placing the pointer on the bottom edge or right edge of the section. The
pointer changes to a double-headed arrow.
• Drag the pointer up or down to change the height of the section.
• Drag the pointer left or right to change the Width of the section.
To change both height and width:
• To change the height and width simultaneously, place the pointer in the
lower- right corner of the section. The pointer changes to an arrow- head
cross. Drag the pointer in any direction to adjust the size of the section.
5.6.12. Adding page Numbers to a Form or Report
You can display page numbers and the total number of pages in a form or report by
using the page and pages properties.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 153 of 208
To add page numbers to a form or report
• In Design view, add a text box by clicking the text box button the toolbox, to
the section (usually the page header or footer) where you want the page
number to appear.
• Display the properties box for the text box.
• In the Control Source property box, type a page number expression, or
Use the Expression Builder to produce the results you want.

5.6.13. Adding the Current Date and Time to a Form or
Report
You can have Microsoft Access automatically display the date and time that is stored
in the system clock on a form or report.
To add the current date or time to a from or report:
• In the form or report's Design view, add a text box to the section in which
you want the date or time to appear.
• Display the properties box for text box.
• In the Control Source property box, type = followed by an expression
using the Now or Date function.
For example: = Date ( ), or
• Crate the expression by using the Expression Builder.
• Use the Format property to display a date in a predefined format. For
example, to display a date such as 5- May-97, type = Date ( ) in the Control
Source property box, and set the Format property to Medium Date.


Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 154 of 208
• Use the Format or Format$ function to display a date in a format you define in
an expression. For example, to display a date such as 5- May -97, type =
Format (Date( ), "dd-mmm-yy") in the Control Source property box,
and leave the Format property box blank.

5.6.14. Drawing Lines and Rectangles on Forms and Reports
You can create controls on a form or report and then draw lines and rectangles
around them; or you can draw the lines and rectangles first and then create controls
on top.
To draw a line:
• In Design view of your form or report, display the toolbox, and then select
the line tool
• Draw the line to the desired length, by dragging the mouse and then release
the mouse button.
Note:- To draw straight, horizontal or vertical lines, press the Shift key before you
click the Line tool. Continue pressing the Shift key while you draw the line.
To draw a rectangle:
• In Design view of your form or report, display the toolbox, and then select
the rectangle tool
• Draw the rectangle. Once you have drawn it, you can move or resize it.
5.6.15. Previewing a Report
When you preview a report to see how it will look on the printed gage, you can
choose from two views: Use print preview to check the data or to see the entire
report exactly as it will be printed. Use Sample preview to take a quick look at your
report and check its font, font size, and general layout.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 155 of 208
To preview an entire report from Design view:
• Click the print preview button, or
• From the File menu, choose print preview.
To preview a report from the Database window:
• Click the Reports Tab.
• Select the report you want to preview.
• Click the preview button, or
• From the File menu. Choose print preview.

To see an overall view of the report:
• In print preview, place the pointer on the report, and then click the mouse
when the pointer turns into a magnifying glass.
• Click again to return the report to its original size, or
• Click the Zoom button on the print preview toolbar to enlarge or reduce
the view.











Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 156 of 208

Chapter 6: Microsoft Power Point
6.1. Introduction To Power Point
Microsoft PowerPoint is a software product used to perform computer-based
presentations. There are various circumstances in which a presentation is made:
teaching a class, introducing a product to sell, explaining an organizational structure,
etc.
6.2. Starting PowerPoint
One easy way to start PowerPoint is to select it from the Start menu. Depending on
your Windows version and the way Windows is set up, PowerPoint may appear at
the top of the Start menu, or it may require you to open the All Programs (or
Programs) menu to find it.
1. Click on Start. The Start menu will appear.
2. Click on Microsoft Office PowerPoint 2003 if it appears on the Start
menu's top level. PowerPoint will open, and you can skip the rest of these
steps. Otherwise, continue to step
3. Move the mouse pointer to All Programs (or Programs). The
Programs menu will appear.
Note The difference in wording in step 3 is due to the Windows version.
Windows XP uses All Programs; all other versions use Programs.
4. Move the mouse pointer to Microsoft Office. A menu of Microsoft
Office applications will appear.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 157 of 208
5. Click on Microsoft Office PowerPoint 2003. PowerPoint will open and
will display a new, blank presentation.
Tip You can force PowerPoint to always appear at the top of the Start menu by
"pinning" it there. In step 4, instead of clicking on Microsoft PowerPoint, right-
click it and choose Pin to Start menu. From then on, a shortcut to PowerPoint
will appear at the top of the Start menu, and you'll never have to open the All
Programs menu again to locate it.
6.3. Creating a Desktop Shortcut for PowerPoint
If you use PowerPoint often, you might want to put a shortcut to it on the desktop.
You can double-click it to start PowerPoint instead of going through the Start menu
each time.
1. Click on Start. The Start menu will appear.
2. Move the mouse pointer to All Programs (or Programs). The
Programs menu will appear.
3. Move the mouse pointer to Microsoft Office. A menu of Office
applications will appear.
4. Move the mouse pointer to Microsoft Office PowerPoint 2003.
PowerPoint will be highlighted.
5. Hold down the Ctrl key and drag Microsoft Office Power-Point 2003
to the desktop. A shortcut to Microsoft PowerPoint will appear on the
desktop.
Tip You can use these steps to create a desktop shortcut for any program that is
installed on the computer.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 158 of 208
Starting PowerPoint and Opening a Saved File
If you already have a PowerPoint presentation started, you can start PowerPoint by
opening that file. PowerPoint files have a .ppt extension, and the icon matches the
PowerPoint 2003 icon (orange).
The following steps are for Windows XP, and they assume that your existing file is
stored in the My Documents folder. If you have an earlier version of Windows, or if
your file is located somewhere else, see the notes following the steps.
1. Click on Start. The Start menu will appear.
2. Click on My Documents. The My Documents folder will appear.
3. Double-click on the presentation file. PowerPoint will start, and that
presentation will open within PowerPoint.
Note Don't have Windows XP? Then double-click the My Documents icon on the
desktop instead of performing steps 1 and 2.
Note File stored in some other location? Open My Computer and browse for it. In
Windows XP, click Start and then click My Computer. In all other Windows
versions, double-click the My Computer icon on the desktop.
6.1 Exiting PowerPoint
When you're finished working with PowerPoint, you'll want to exit the program to
free up the system for other tasks, and to make your screen more tidy.
1. Click on Close in the upper-right corner of the PowerPoint window. If
there are no unsaved changes, PowerPoint will close immediately. If there are
changes, a Save dialog box will appear.
2. Click on No to discard your changes. PowerPoint will close.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 159 of 208
Note Notice that there are several X buttons near the upper- right corner of the
window. The topmost button closes PowerPoint itself. The button directly
beneath that closes the open presentation only. The button about one inch
below those two closes the task pane.
Minimizing and Restoring PowerPoint
If you don't want to close PowerPoint but simply want to move it out of the way
temporarily, minimize it. Minimizing a window shrinks it down to an icon on the
Taskbar. You can then click that icon to reopen—restore—the window when you're
ready to use it again.
• Click on the Minimize button in the upper-right corner of the PowerPoint
window. PowerPoint will disappear except for its icon in the Taskbar.
• Click on the PowerPoint icon on the Taskbar. The Power-Point window
will appear again.
6.4. Understanding PowerPoint Views
PowerPoint operates in several different views. Each view is useful for a different
type of activity.
Normal view is the default view. In Normal view, you'll see the following panes:
• Slides pane. Thumbnail images of the slides in the presentation appear here.
The other tab at the top of this pane is for the Outline pane, "Organizing the
Presentation Outline."
• Current slide. A single slide at a time appears here. It's enlarged so you can
work on it.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 160 of 208
• Notes pane. Any speaker notes you type for the slide appear here. These
notes aren't visible to the audience.
• Task pane. This pane changes depending on what you're doing. You can also
click its Close (X) button to give you more room.
6.4.1. Changing to a Different View
There are two other views: Slide Sorter and Slide Show. Slide Sorter view shows
thumbnail images of all the presentation slides at once. Slide Show view shows full-
screen images of each slide.
1. Click on the Slide Sorter View button. PowerPoint will switch to Slide
Sorter view. You might use this for a bird's-eye view of the presentation, or to
rearrange the slides more easily.
2. Click on the Slide Show View button. PowerPoint will switch to Slide
Show view.
3. Press the Esc key. Slide Show view will close and the screen will return to
Slide Sorter view.
4. Click on the Normal View button. PowerPoint will switch back to Normal
view.
5. Click on the Outline tab. The presentation outline will come to the front.

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 161 of 208
Working with the Task Pane
The task pane is an area that appears to the right of the other PowerPoint panes.
There are actually many different task panes, each one containing tools and
options appropriate for a certain activity. Most of the time, the correct task pane
will appear automatically when needed. For example, if you select the command
to change a slide's layout, the Slide Layout task pane will appear automatically.
Many people prefer to work with the task pane hidden so they have more space
onscreen. You can redisplay it when you need it.
1. Click on the Close button on the task pane. The task pane will disappear,
and the current slide will have more space available.
2. Click on the View menu. The View menu will appear.
3. Pause for a few seconds if there is a down-pointing arrow at the bottom of the
menu. The full menu will appear after a brief delay.
4. Click on Task Pane. The task pane will reappear.
Tip Instead of steps 2 through 4, you can press Ctrl+F1.
5. Move the mouse pointer over the border between the current slide's pane
and the task pane. The mouse will become a two-headed arrow. Then drag
to the left or right to resize the task pane.
Choosing a Different Task Pane
PowerPoint will often display a certain task pane based on what you're doing.
You can also choose which task pane you want to see at any given moment.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 162 of 208
1. Click on the Task Pane down arrow. A list of available task panes
will appear.
2. Click on a task pane. The selected task pane will appear.
6.4.2. Working with Toolbars
A toolbar is a collection of buttons you can click to issue commands. Nearly all of
these buttons are shortcuts to menu commands—alternatives to using the menu
system. Displaying the Standard and Formatting Toolbars on Separate Rows
By default, PowerPoint shows both the Standard and Formatting toolbars on the
same row. This causes some buttons on each toolbar to be obscured. Most people
prefer to display these toolbars on separate rows. (That's how they're shown in most
of the figures in this book.)
1. Click on the down-pointing arrow at the end of the Standard or
Formatting toolbar. A menu will appear.
2. Click on Show Buttons on Two Rows. The Formatting toolbar will
move to a new row below the Standard toolbar.
6.4.3. Moving a Toolbar
You may find that the location of toolbars is inconvenient for the way you work.
Toolbars can be moved to any location on the screen that's convenient for you. A
toolbar may be docked (attached to other toolbars), or it may float all by itself.


Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 163 of 208
1. Move the mouse pointer over the toolbar handle (the set of dots at its left
edge). The mouse pointer will change to a four-pointed arrow.
2. Drag the toolbar handle to another location on the PowerPoint window.
The toolbar will move with the mouse.
Hiding or Displaying a Toolbar
There are many toolbars available in PowerPoint. Some of them appear automatically
when needed; others must be displayed manually.
Right-click on a toolbar. A shortcut menu appears.
Click on the name of the toolbar you want to display (if it's not already
checked) or hide (if it's already checked).
6.4.4. Turning off the Personalized Menus Feature
By default, the Personalized Menus feature is turned on in PowerPoint. When you
open a menu, only a few of the available commands appear. PowerPoint monitors
your usage, and if you've used a certain command before, it's on that short, initial
list. The rest of the commands appear after a few seconds, or when you click the
down arrow at the bottom of the menu.
The figures in this book have this personalized menu feature turned off to avoid
inconsistency between the book's pictures and your screen. To follow along more
closely with the figures in this book, we recommend that you turn this feature off,
too.


Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 164 of 208
1. Click on Tools. The Tools menu will appear.
2. Click on Customize. The Customize dialog box will open.
3. Click on the Options tab. The Options tab will come to the front.
4. Click on the Always show full menus check box. A check will be
placed in the check box.
5. Click on Close. Your new setting will be applied.
6.5. Using the AutoContent Wizard
PowerPoint contains many sample presentations that can give you a quick start. You
can use these samples to learn how an effective presentation is built or as a starting
place for your own. All of them can be changed to suit your needs.
1. Click on the File menu. The File menu will appear.
2. Click on the New command. The New Presentation task pane will appear.
Note The New button on the toolbar starts a new, blank presentation, which is not what
we want right now.=
3. Click on From AutoContent wizard in the New Presentation task pane.
The AutoContent wizard will start.
4. Click on Next. The Presentation type page of the wizard will appear.
5. Click on the button for the category of presentation that you want to
create. A list of presentation types will appear on the right side of the dialog
box.
6. Click on a presentation type that closely matches the information that you
want to use in your presentation. The presentation type will be selected.
7. Click on Next. The Presentation style page of the wizard will appear.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 165 of 208
8. Click on the option button for the method you will use to display the
presentation. The option will be selected. Select from one of these options:
9. Click on Next. The Presentation options page of the wizard will appear.
10. Click in the Presentation title text box and type a title for your
presentation.
11. Click in the Footer text box and type the text that you want to appear in
the footer area at the bottom of each slide, if any.
12. Click in the Date last updated check box if you do not want to display
the date when you last made updates to the presentation. (This information is
found in the footer area of a slide.) The check box will be cleared.
13. Click in the Slide number check box if you do not want to show the slide
number in the footer area. The check box will be cleared.
14. Click on Next. The Finish page of the wizard will appear.
15. Click on Finish. The presentation will appear in the PowerPoint window.
6.6. Starting a New Presentation using a Template
You don't need to be an artist to create a good-looking presentation, complete with a
background and other images. There are several design templates bundled in
PowerPoint that will be pleasing to both you and your audience. Take a look at some
of the design templates from which you can choose, and see if any of them suit your
needs.
1. Click on the File menu. The File menu will appear.
2. Click on the New command. The New Presentation task pane will appear.
3. Click on the From design template hyperlink. The Slide Design task
pane will appear.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 166 of 208
4. Click on a design. It will be applied to the slide, so you can see what it looks
like.
5. Repeat step 4 until you find the design you want.
6. Click on the Close button for the task pane. The task pane will close.
6.7. Starting a Blank Presentation
If you are not sure what design or content you want, you might wish to start with a
completely blank presentation with no text and no formatting.
1. Click on the New button on the toolbar.
Previewing the Presentation Onscreen
As you're working on a presentation, you may want to see how each slide will look
when displayed onscreen in Slide Show view.
1. Display the slide you want to preview.
2. Click on the Slide Show View button.
Note In step 2, you can also use the View, Slide Show View command or the Slide
Show, View Show command, or you can just press F5. The only difference is that
they all start with the first slide rather than the currently displayed one.
a. Click the left mouse button to move to the next slide. Continue
through the presentation.
OR
b. Press the Esc key to return to PowerPoint.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 167 of 208
6.8. Printing the Presentation
When you want a paper copy of a presentation, send the file to a printer. Let’s just
print a single copy of the presentation with each slide on a separate page.
1. Click on File. The File menu will appear.
2. Click on Print. The Print dialog box will open.
3. Click on OK. The presentation file will be sent to the printer using the
default print settings.
6.9. Working with Presentation Files
Before you get too involved in developing a presentation, you'll need to save the
presentation file. Remember to save the file often so that you don't lose your
valuable efforts. Then, once you've started on the presentation, you'll want to see
how you are progressing. You can easily preview the presentation or print it.
Saving Your Presentation
It can never be stressed enough that you must save your work often while you are
working on a presentation. Also, you may want to back up the presentation file to a
floppy disk, a Zip disk, or a recordable CD, in case you run into a computer
problem.
1. Click on the Save button on the Standard toolbar. The Save As dialog box
will open.
2. Click on the Save in drop-down list arrow and select the folder in
which you want to store the file. The folder will be selected.
3. Click in the File name text box and type a name for the presentation.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 168 of 208
4. Click on Save. The presentation file will be stored in the designated folder,
and the file name will appear in the title bar of the PowerPoint window.
Note After you've saved the presentation file the first time, you can save your changes by clicking on the
Save button.
Closing the Presentation
When you've finished working on a presentation, close the presentation file. You can
close a presentation file without closing the PowerPoint program, or you can close
both at once.
a. Click on the Close button for the presentation. The presentation
file will close and PowerPoint will stay open. OR
b. Click on the Close button for the PowerPoint program. The
program will close.
Opening a Recently Used Presentation
PowerPoint keeps a list of the saved files you've worked with recently. This list is
found at the bottom of the File menu.
1. Click on File. The File menu will appear.
2. Click on the presentation file in the recently used file list. The
presentation will appear in the PowerPoint window.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 169 of 208
Opening any Saved Presentation
If the presentation you want to open does not appear at the bottom of the File
menu, you can use the Open dialog box to select and open it.
1. Click on the Open button on the toolbar. The Open dialog box will
appear.
2. Click on the Look in drop-down list arrow and select the
folder in which you want to look for the file. The folder will be
selected.
3. Click on the file name for the presentation.
4. Click on Open. The presentation file will open in the PowerPoint
window.
Note You can also open a presentation file and start PowerPoint at the same time by double-
clicking the presentation file in a Windows file management window.
6.10. Displaying Outline View
Much of the activity in this chapter takes place in the Outline pane. If it does not
appear in Normal view already, you can display it easily.
1. Click the Normal View button. If any other view is in use, it will be
replaced by Normal.
2. Click on the Outline tab. The presentation outline will appear.
Note If the Outline tab is not already showing, it will not have the word "Outline" on it.
Instead, it will have some horizontal lines representing text.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 170 of 208
Displaying the Outlining Toolbar
1. Click on View. The View menu will appear.
2. Move the mouse pointer to Toolbars. A list of available toolbars will
appear.
3. Click on Outlining. The Outlining toolbar will appear along the left side of
the PowerPoint window.
6.1.1 Outlining a Presentation
The most important part of a presentation is the outline, which will keep your
presentation organized and on track. Before you start adding graphics,
animations, and transitions, make sure you have a solid foundation for your
presentation.
Note If you've created an outline in Microsoft Word, you can import it into PowerPoint. To
learn how, see the "Sharing Outlines with Microsoft Word" section later in this chapter.
Creating Slides in the Outline Pane
If you used the AutoContent Wizard to start your presentation, an outline has
already been started for you (as shown in the preceding figures). It is a simple
matter of editing the outline by changing a few words or adding a few new slides.
If you started with a blank presentation, you'll need to create each new slide by
adding text to the outline.
1. Click to the right of the slide icon. The cursor will move there.
2. Type the text that you want to appear as the title of the first slide.
3. Press the Enter key. A new slide icon will appear on a new line.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 171 of 208
4. Click on the Demote button on the Outlining toolbar, or press Tab. The
new line will be demoted in importance so that it represents text on the
preceding slide.
Note Each time you press Enter, a new line appears at the same outline level as the
previous line. Since you were typing title text in step 2, pressing Enter in step 3
started a new slide. Demoting the line makes it part of the preceding slide.
5. Type additional text for the slide.
6. Press the Enter key. Another line on the same slide will appear for typing.
7.
a. Return to step 5 to type additional text. OR
b. Click on the Promote button on the Outlining toolbar, or press
Shift+Tab. The new line will be promoted in importance so that it
represents a new slide title.
8. Type the text for the title of the second slide and press Enter.
9. Continue adding text until all the topics that you want to cover in the
presentation appear in the outline.
Promoting and Demoting Lines
Once you've added the topics that you want to cover in the presentation, you
may want to change the level at which some outline items appear.
1. Click on the line that you want to promote or demote. The
insertion point will appear in it.
2.
a. Click on the Promote button or press Shift+Tab. The
text will be promoted to a higher outline level. Or
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 172 of 208
b. Click on the Demote button or press Tab. The text
will be demoted to the next outline level.
Promoting to the highest level makes the text into slide title text on a separate
slide. Demoting a slide title makes it a bullet point on the previous slide.
Rearranging Outline Text
Each paragraph in the outline is either a slide title or a bullet point on the body of a
slide. You can move individual paragraphs or groups of them up or down in the
outline.
Alternative-1:
a) Click on a slide icon. The entire slide and all its subordinate text will
be selected. Or
b) Click to the left of an individual paragraph. Only that paragraph
will be selected.
Note To select multiple slide icons or multiple paragraphs, hold down Shift as you click on
additional ones.

Alternative-2:
a. Click on the Move Up button or drag the selection upward.
The selection will move higher in the outline. Or
c) Click on the Move Down button or drag the selection
downward. The selection will move lower in the outline.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 173 of 208
Sharing Outlines with Microsoft Word
If you use the outlining feature in Microsoft Word, you may find it easier to create
the outline in Word and then import it into PowerPoint. If you started an outline in
PowerPoint, you can export it into Word and edit it there.
Importing an Outline
1.
a. Start a new, blank presentation. A new presentation with a single
Title slide will appear. Or
b. Select the slide after which the imported outline text will appear.
2. Click on Insert. The Insert menu will appear.
3. Click on Slides from Outline. The Insert Outline dialog box will appear.
4. Display the folder in which you've stored the Word outline file. The folder
will appear in the Look in list box.
5. Click on the file that contains the outline that you want to add to the
presentation. The file will be selected.
6. Click on Insert.
Exporting an Outline
You can also send a PowerPoint outline to Word and save it as a Word document.
1. Click on File. The File menu will appear.
2. Click on Send To. The Send To submenu will appear.
3. Click on Microsoft Office Word. The Send To Microsoft Word dialog
box will open.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 174 of 208
4. Click on the Outline only option, if it is not selected already.
5. Click on OK. The outline will open in Microsoft Word.
From Word, you can edit or save the outline normally.
Printing the Outline
Before you print a presentation outline, display the items in the Outline tab that you
want to print. If an item is collapsed (that is, hidden), it will not print. Use the
Outlining toolbar to expand and collapse the outline.
1. Click on File. The File menu will appear.
2. Click on Print. The Print dialog box will open.
3. Click on the Print what drop-down list arrow and select Outline
View from the list. The option will appear in the list box.
4. Click on OK. The outline will be sent to the printer.
6.11. Inserting Slides from another Presentation
If you want to add an existing presentation to a presentation you're working on
right now, just insert the slides from the existing presentation. You can insert the
entire presentation or just a group of slides.


1. Click on the Slide Sorter View button. The display will change to
Slide Sorter view.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 175 of 208
2. Click in the space where you want the slides from the other presentation
to appear. The insertion bar will appear in the selected location.
3. Click on Insert. The Insert menu will appear.
4. Click on Slides from Files. The Slide Finder dialog box will open.
5. Type the path and file name of the presentation that contains the slides
that you want to add to the open presentation.
6. Click on Display if the slides do not appear automatically. A preview of
the presentation slides will appear in the Select slides area.
7. Click on the slides that you want to insert into the presentation. The
slides will be selected.
8. Click on Insert. The selected slides will be inserted into the open
presentation.
9. Click on Close. The Slide Finder dialog box will close.
6.12. Editing Text
Once the basic outline structure is in place, you can make any changes you want to
the outline. You may need to change a few words or add a few new words.
6.1.2 Selecting Text
Before you can edit or format text, you'll need to select the text. Selected text
appears inside a boxed background. The selected text can be a single letter or word,
or several words. Here are a few tips for selecting text.
• To select a paragraph, triple-click it.
• To select the entire outline, press Ctrl+A.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 176 of 208
• To select a block of text, click and hold at the beginning of the text,
and then drag the mouse pointer to the end of the text. Release the
mouse button.
6.1.3 Revising Text
When you need to revise items in the outline, select the words that you want to
replace and add a few of your own.
1. Select the text that you want to replace. The text will be highlighted.
2. Type the new text. The selected text will be deleted and replaced with the
new text.
Adding Text to a Placeholder
If you have created some slide titles in the outline with no subordinate text beneath
them, you'll notice that on the slide is a "Click to add text" placeholder.
1. Display a slide that contains a text placeholder. The slide will appear in
Normal view.
Note Click the slide you want in the Slides or Outline pane.
2. Click on the text in the placeholder. The placeholder text will disappear,
and the cursor will appear in the text box.
3. Type the text that you want in the placeholder.
Deleting Text from a Slide
The process for deleting text from a slide is identical to deleting text from the
presentation outline.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 177 of 208
1. Select the text that you want to delete. The text will be highlighted.
2. Click on the Cut button or press Delete. The text will be removed from
the slide.
Note Cutting and deleting are actually two different things. Cutting moves text to the
Clipboard; deleting simply deletes it. If you do not subsequently paste the text from the
Clipboard, however, the overall result is the same.
6.13. Using the Replace Feature
You can use the Replace feature to search for text, such as individual words, phrases,
or characters in a presentation, and then replace it with some other text.
1. Click on Edit. The Edit menu will appear.
2. Click on Replace. The Replace dialog box will open.
3. Type the text that you want to locate in the Find what text box.
4. Type the text to be used as the replacement in the Replace with text box.
5. Click on Find Next.
6.
a. Click on Replace. The text that is highlighted on the slide will be
replaced with the text specified in the Replace with text box. Or
b. Click on Find Next to skip that occurrence.
7.
b. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until all instances have been found. A
dialog box will appear stating that it is finished. Then click the OK
button. Or
b. Click on Close to end the search early.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 178 of 208
6.14. Spell Checking the Presentation
Before your presentation makes its debut, run the spell checker. Not only will the
spell checker help you spot misspelled words, but it will tell you when you repeat
yourself.
1. Click on the Spelling button.
2. Click on the correct spelling in the Suggestions text box. The word
will be selected and will appear in the Change to text box.
3.
a. Click on Change. The misspelled word will be corrected, and the
next misspelled word will appear. Or
b. Click on Ignore. The word will be left as is, and the next
misspelled word will appear. When PowerPoint has checked the
last word in the presentation, a confirmation dialog box will
appear.
4. Click on OK. The presentation will be spell checked. You should save the
file so that the corrections are preserved.
6.15. Using the Research Tools
The research tools, new in PowerPoint 2003, work best when you are
connected to the Internet. They rely on Internet databases, such as
encyclopedias and news services.

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 179 of 208
6.16. Using the Thesaurus
The thesaurus enables you to find synonyms or antonyms for a word.
1. Double-click on the word you want to look up. It will be selected.
2. Click on Tools. The menu will appear.
3. Click on Thesaurus. The Research task pane will open.
4. Point to the desired replacement. A drop-down arrow will appear
beside it.
5. Click on the down arrow. A menu will appear.
6. Click on Insert. The selected word will be replaced by the new one.
6.17. Using Other Research Tools
The thesaurus is only one of Office 2003's research tools. To find extended
information about a topic, use the Research command.
1. Click on Tools. The menu will appear.
2. Click on Research. The Research pane will appear if it is not displayed
already.
3. Type the word or phrase to research in the Search for box. The word
or phrase will appear there.
4. Choose a source from the list of online reference sources.
5. Click on the article you want to read. A Web browser window will
display the article.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 180 of 208
6.18. Working with Slides in Slide Sorter View
You don't have to work with just one slide at a time. The Slide Sorter view displays
all the slides as miniatures in neat rows across the screen. This is a good way to see
the big picture and view the progress of your presentation. Use this view to
rearrange, add, and delete slides.
1. Click on the Slide Sorter View button. The presentation slides will
appear in the Slide Sorter view.
6.18.1. Selecting Slides
Before you can perform certain functions with slides (such as deleting or moving),
you'll need to select the slides with which you want to work. You can select a single
slide, a contiguous group of slides, or random slides.
Here are a few tips for selecting slides:-
6.18.2. Inserting a Slide
While browsing in the Slide Sorter view, you may find a place where an extra slide is
needed. You can easily add a new slide.
1. Click in the space between the two slides where you want the new slide to
appear. The insertion bar will appear between the two slides.
2. Click on New Slide on the Slide Sorter toolbar.
Note To add text to the new slide, double-click on the slide to display it in Normal view.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 181 of 208
6.18.3. Duplicating a Slide
When you want to make an exact copy of a slide, use the duplicate
command.
1. Click on the slide that you want to copy. The slide will be selected.
2. Click on Insert. The Insert menu will appear.
3. Click on Duplicate Slide. An identical slide will appear just after the
original slide. The duplicate slide will be selected.
6.18.4. Moving a Slide
The Slide Sorter view can also be used to reorganize slides. Slides can be moved
around to better present information with a simple drag and drop.
1. Click and hold on the slide that you want to move. The slide will be
selected.
2. Drag the mouse to where you want to move the slide. The insertion bar
will appear in the selected place.
3. Release the mouse button. The slide will appear in the new position.
6.18.5. Deleting Slides
You may find that you don't need a slide in a presentation. Here is how to delete
slides that you do not want.
1. Select the slide or slides that you want to delete. The slide(s) will be
selected.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 182 of 208
2. Click on the Cut button on the Standard toolbar or press the Delete
key. The slide(s) will be removed from the presentation.
6.19. Changing the Design Template
A design template applies a preset font, color, background, and placeholder
arrangement to every slide in the presentation. You learned how to start a new
presentation using a design template "Learning About Presentations." You can
change to a different design template at any time.
1. Click on the Design button on the toolbar. The Slide Design task pane
will appear.
2. Click on the design template that you want to change to. The template
will be applied.
6.20. Changing the Color Scheme
Each design template comes with several different color schemes. You can switch
to one of its alternate schemes, or you can start with one of those schemes and
customize it to make your own color scheme.
Because the color schemes are associated with design templates, you should make
your design template choice first, and then choose the color scheme.
Selecting an Alternate Color Scheme
1. Click on the Color Schemes hyperlink in the Slide Design task pane. The
color schemes will appear for the chosen design template.
2. Click on the desired color scheme. The presentation will change to that
scheme.\
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 183 of 208
Customizing a Color Scheme
After selecting a color scheme, you may decide to change one or more of its
colors.
1. Click on the Edit Color Schemes hyperlink. The Edit Color Scheme
dialog box will open.
2. Click on the color you want to change. It will be selected.
3. Click on Change Color. A dialog box will appear for changing the
selected item.
For example, if you chose the background color in step 2, the box will be
called Background Color.
1. Click on the Standard tab if it is not already displayed.
2. Click on the desired color. It will be outlined.
3. Click on OK. The new color will appear in the Edit Color Scheme dialog
box.
4. Repeat steps 2 through 6 for additional colors, if desired.
5. Click on Add As Standard Scheme if you want to save this color
scheme. It will be added as a new color scheme on the Slide Design task
pane.
6. Click on Apply. The dialog box will close and the new color scheme will
be applied.

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 184 of 208
6.21. Working with Masters
The Slide Master is a template that applies to every slide in the presentation (except
slides that use the Title Slide layout, because those take their design from the Title
Master template). When you apply a design template, you are making changes to the
Slide Master and Title Master. You can also change those Masters manually to
customize the design.
1. Click on View. The View menu will appear.
2. Point to Master. The Master submenu will appear.
3. Click on Slide Master. The Slide Master view will appear.
4. Click on the Slide Master or Title Master to select the one you want to
edit.
5. Make changes as desired. Keep reading to find out some of the changes you
can make. You are limited only by how creative and artistic you want to be.
6. Click on the Close Master View button when you have finished.
6.22. Changing Text Formatting
You will learn how to format slide text on a single slide, such as adding bold or italic,
choosing a different font, or changing the size. You can do the same formatting to the
text on the Slide Master or Title Master to change all the slides at once.
1. Select the text that you want to format. The text will be highlighted.
2. Apply text formatting to the text.
Some of the formatting you can apply includes:
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 185 of 208
Moving and Resizing Text Placeholders
You can change the size of the Title Area, Object Area, Footer Area, Date Area, and
Number Area placeholders.
1. Click on a placeholder. A border will appear around the placeholder that
contains resize handles.
2. Click and drag a resize handle. A dotted line will show the new size of the
placeholder.
3. Position the mouse pointer over the placeholder. The mouse pointer will
become a four-headed arrow.
4. Click and drag the placeholder to a new location.
6.23. Working with Footers and Special Placeholders
The Slide Master contains placeholder boxes for date/ time, slide number, and
footer. These can be moved around or resized (see the preceding steps). You can also
turn them on or off.
1. Click on View. The View menu will appear.
2. Click on Header and Footer. The Header and Footer dialog box will
open.
3. Click in the Slide number check box if you want the slides to be
numbered.
4. Type text in the Footer box if you want footer text on each slide.
5. Click in the don’t show on title slide check box if you want to omit all
placeholders from title slides.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 186 of 208
By default, the date/time does not appear, even though the placeholder is
turned on. That's because Fixed is the default setting, and the Fixed box is
blank.
6.
a. Type today's date in the Fixed box to make it appear on each slide.
Then skip to step 9. Or
b. Click on Update automatically to set up an automatic date/time
on each slide. Today's date will appear in the box beneath it.
7. Click on the down arrow next to the date. A menu will appear.
8. Click on the date format that you want. It will appear in the box.
9. Click on the Apply to All button. The footer information on the slide
master will be updated.
6.24. Applying a Slide Background
You have hundreds of choices for a slide background. You can use clip art from the
Microsoft Clip Organizer or that you've found on the Internet, scanned photographs,
or images you've created in a graphics program, such as Microsoft Photo Editor.
Explore your options.
1. Click on Format. The Format menu will appear.
2. Click on Background. The Background dialog box will open.
3. Click on the down arrow next to Background fill. A list of color
options will appear.
4.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 187 of 208
a. Click on a placeholder color. A color will be used from the
current color scheme. If you change color schemes, the background
color will change. Or
b. Click on More Colors and then select a color from the
Background Color box. A specific solid color will be used. Or
c. Click on Fill Effects and then select a gradient, texture, pattern,
or picture as the background.
5. Click on Apply to All after selecting a background. The background
will be applied to the Slide Master.
6.25. Using Slide Transitions
Moving from one slide to another is called a slide transition. It can be a simple
replacement of one slide for the next, or you can set up fancier transitions that move
between them.
1. Select the slide(s) to which you want to apply the transition effect. The
slide(s) will be selected.
If you want to apply it to all slides, it does not matter which slide(s) you
select.
2. Click on Slide Show. The Slide Show menu will appear.
3. Click on Slide Transition. The Slide Transition task pane will appear.
4. Click on a slide transition. The transition will be selected, and a preview
of the transition will appear if the AutoPreview check box is selected.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 188 of 208
5. Click the Speed list box arrow and select the speed at which you want the
transition to play. The speed will appear in the list box.
6. Click the Sound list box arrow and select a sound to play during a slide
transition, if desired. The sound will appear in the list box.
Note The first time you select a sound, a box may appear prompting you to install the
Sound Effects feature. Click OK to do so.
7. Specify when the transition will occur:
8. Click on Apply to All Slides if you want all slides to use this transition. It
will be applied to all slides. If you don't do this, it will apply only to the slides
you selected in step 1.
9.
a. Click on Play. The transition effect will play in Normal view. Or
b. Click on Slide Show. The transition effect will play in Slide Show
view.
6.26. Applying an Animation Scheme
Whereas a transition moves from one slide to another, an animation moves an
individual object onto or off of the screen within a slide. PowerPoint comes with
many preset animation schemes that are designed for ease of use. You can also create
custom animations, as covered later in this chapter.
1. Display the slide to which you want to apply the animation. The slide will
appear in Normal view. If you want to apply the animation to several slides,
select the slides in Slide Sorter view.
2. Click on Slide Show. The Slide Show menu will appear.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 189 of 208
3. Click on Animation Schemes. The Slide Design task pane will appear, and
the available slide animations will be listed.
4. Click on an animation scheme. The animation will be applied to the selected
slides.
5. Click on Apply to All Slides if you want every slide in the presentation to
use the same animation scheme.
6.27. Creating Custom Animation
Custom animation allows you to specify exactly what you want to animate and how it
should be done.
Tip You can start with an animation scheme from the preceding set of steps, and then
customize it.
1. Open the slide that contains the element that you want to animate. The slide
will appear in Normal view.
2. Click on Slide Show. The Slide Show menu will appear.
3. Click on Custom Animation. The Custom Animation task pane will
appear.
If you applied an animation scheme previously, the animation for it will be shown.



Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 190 of 208
Adding an Animation Effect
Start with a slide that does not already have any animation effects for this procedure.
1. Click on the element on the slide that you want to animate. The element
will be selected.
This could be a title, a bulleted list, or a graphic object.
2. Click on Add Effect on the task pane. A menu will appear.
3. Point to a category of effects. A second menu will appear.
Note Entrance effects control how the object enters the slide. Emphasis effects make it do
something after its entrance. Exit effects control how it leaves the slide. A motion
path is an advanced feature that enables you to specify exactly where the object
travels.
4.
a. Click on one of the effects shown on the menu. It will be applied to
the object, and you are done. Or
b. Click on More Effects. A dialog box with a list of special effects will
open.
5. Click on an effect.
6. Click on OK when you have selected an animation effect. The animation will
be applied to the slide elements. You can now modify the animation.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 191 of 208
Modifying an Animation
Do this on a slide that already has one or more animated objects.
1. Click on the animation effect in the task pane. It will be selected.
2. Select an event trigger from the Start list. On Click is the most common.
3. Select a direction from the Direction list.
The significance of Direction depends on the animation type. For example, if
it is an entrance effect, the object will enter the slide from the chosen
direction.
4. Select a speed from the Speed list.
Tip You can also right-click the animation on the task pane and choose Effect Options to open
a dialog box containing more choices. For example, you can enter a delay to be used with
the After Previous event trigger, and you can specify a sound that should play with the
animation.

Reordering Animations
Objects are animated on the slide in the order in which you created the animations
for them. You can rearrange them on the list to make them occur in a different
order.
1. Click on the animation you want to move in the task pane. It will be
selected.
2.
a. Click on the Up button to move it up on the list. Or
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 192 of 208
b. Click on the Down button to move it down on the list.
Removing an Animation
1. Click on the animation you want to remove. It will be selected.
2. Click on Remove. The animation will be removed.
6.28. Publishing the Presentation in Web Format
Publishing in Web format is useful when you are trying to reach an audience over a
network. This can include the Internet or an internal corporate intranet. The main
advantage of this distribution method is that the people viewing it do not need
PowerPoint installed on their PCs—or even a Windows-based operating system.
1. Click on File. The File menu will appear.
2. Click on Save as Web Page. A special version of the Save As dialog box
will open.
3. Click on the down arrow next to Save as type and select the type of
file you want.
4. Click on Change Title. The Set Page Title dialog box will open.
5. Enter the title you want in the Page title box. This title will appear in the
user's Web browser when he or she displays the presentation later.
6. Click on OK. The title will appear next to Page title in the Save As dialog
box.
7. Click on Save. The presentation will be saved in Web format.


Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 193 of 208

Chapter 7: Types of Web Browsers
7.1. Internet Explorer
This is the most widely-used web browser by people around the world. It was
developed by Microsoft in 1994 and released in 1995 as a supportive package to
Microsoft Windows line of operating systems. It is presently known as Windows
Internet Explorer, was formerly called Microsoft Internet Explorer (MSIE), and
more is commonly known as IE. People have a misconception that browsing the
Internet is possible only through Internet Explorer. They are unaware of various web
browsers that are available. This simply proves that Internet Explorer is used by the
majority. According to statistics, its usage share from 1999 to 2003-04 was around
95%. Since then, there has been a lot of competition in the market, with many
software companies coming up with web browsers that challenge IE in their features
and usage. Microsoft occasionally releases updates to their previous versions of IE,
which have some enhanced capabilities. The latest version is Internet Explorer 8
which is a free update. The 'favicon', which is the favorites icon was introduced first
in IE, and was later adopted by many other web browsers. Initially, IE did not
support tabbed browsing, but today, it can be used even in the older versions, by
installing toolbars.
7.2. Mozilla Firefox
It is owned by Mozilla Corporation and was the result of an experimentation. This
browser has gone through many name changes due to name clashes with other
products. 'Mozilla Firefox' was officially announced in February 2004. It was earlier
named Phoenix, Firebird, and eventually Firefox. It is the second-most famous
browser after Internet Explorer, as there were around 100 million downloads within
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 194 of 208
a year of its release. Until November 2008, 700 million downloads were recorded.
Since the release of Firefox, the sale of Internet Explorer has gone down drastically.
It has around 22% of the market share at present. It has undergone many updates and
version changes that were made to improve usability to the universal users. It can be
used on most
operating systems, but was found to be more prone to vulnerabilities. However, the
problems were fixed in the newer versions. As it is an open source software, its
source code is available,thus allowing everyone to access the code. It supports tabbed
browsing that allows the user to open multiple sites in a single window. Session
storage is also an important feature of Firefox, which allows the user to regain access
to the open tabs after he has closed the browser window. Apart from these, there are
many user-friendly features that Firefox offers.
7.3. Safari
This is a web browser from Apple Inc., which is compatible with Mac OS X
operating system, Microsoft Windows, and the iPhone OS. Safari was released by
Apple in January 2003 as a public beta. As of March 2009, the market share of Safari
has gone up to 8.23%. The Safari 4 beta release claims to have many features like
VoiceOver Screen Reader, that reads aloud everything that takes place on the screen,
with text and web links. It also has features like CSS Canvas, LiveConnect, XML 1.0,
and JavaScript support, and Cover Flow. 'Grammar Checking' is an interesting built-
in feature, which performs a grammar check on the typed text and gives suggestions
to correct your sentence if wrong. If you need to fill an online form with your
personal information, AutoFill is a feature that automatically does that for you, with
the help of information that is stored in your address book or Outlook. Safari
supports all the functions that are available in other web browsers.

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 195 of 208
7.4. Opera
This web browser was developed by Opera Software in 1996. It is a well-known
browser that is mainly used in Internet-activated mobile phones, PDAs, and
smartphones. Opera Mini and Opera Mobile are the browsers used in PDAs and
smartphones. It is compatible with many operating systems such as Solaris, Linux,
Mac OS X, and Microsoft Windows. Though it is not a renowned computer web
browser, it is popular as a web browser in mobile devices. It is also compatible with
Symbian and Windows Mobile operating systems for smartphones and PDAs. Opera
9.64 which is the latest version, provides an e-mail client known as the Opera Mail.
The company claims that Opera is the fastest browser in the world. It also has some
common functions like zoom and fit-to-width, content blocking, tabs and sessions,
download manager with BitTorrent, and mouse gestures.

7.5. Netscape Navigator/Netscape
It was developed by Netscape Communications Corporation and was most popular in
the 1990s. Exceptional features were provided at the time of its release, which
helped it rise to fame with a market share of more than 50% in the 1990s. It was
compatible with almost every operating system. Since 2002, it has almost
disappeared from the market due to strong competition from rivals like Internet
Explorer, Mozilla Firefox, Safari, etc. It had undergone many version changes to
maintain its stake in the market, none of which were very successful.
Although there are many web browsers available and many more are likely to arrive
in future, only those which are exciting and user friendly will be able to survive
market competition and hold on to a substantial market share.

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 196 of 208
Chapter 8: How to Use Internet
8.1. Getting Started
To launch Internet Explorer
On a Windows PC, double-click on the Internet Explorer icon on your desktop.
You can also click on the Start menu and go to All Programs to select Internet
Explorer
To turn on the Menu Bar
Internet Explorer 7 does not display the Menu Bar by default.

1. Click on the Tools button on the upper right corner of the browser.

2. Then make sure Menu Bar is checked



Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 197 of 208


URL of current webpage


The Internet Explorer 7 window displays a home page upon launch. The URL
(Universal Resource Locator) is the address of the webpage being viewed. Each
webpage has its own unique URL. Some URLs are case-sensitive and all have to be
typed exactly, including spaces or special symbols such as ~.
Navigate Backwards and Forwards

The Back button lets you return to the last webpage that you visited. If you click on
the downward facing triangle to the right of the button, you can see a menu of webpages
you have visited.
Reload and Stop Load Buttons

When displaying a webpage, IE transfers a copy of the webpage from the Internet onto
your computer. Therefore if the webpage changes, you can update the webpage in your
browser window by clicking the Reload button with the green arrows. If the webpage
is taking too long to load, you can stop the process by clicking on the Stop button
with the red X. Click on the Reload button to start the loading process again from the
beginning.
Home Button

The Home button lets you return to the home page that you set. You can change
the home page.
Search Engine / Search Provider

You can type in a word or a phrase to search the Internet. Putting a phrase in quotes will
search for that exact phrase. You can change the default search engine to Google
or something else.
Favorites Buttons

In order to save the webpage URL link for future web browsing sessions, you must save
it as a bookmark by clicking on the Add Favorites button . Clicking on the
View Favorites button , allows you to see all your favorites you have saved.
You can also export and import bookmarks.
Tab Browsing Features

The Tab Bar allows you to have multiple webpages open at once in a single window.
Each webpage will appear under a separate tab and you can simply click on the tab to
access that webpage. Read the tab browsing overview.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 198 of 208
8.2. Using Internet Explorer 7 Overview
Below is a picture of the Internet Explorer window with important components
highlighted

.






Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 199 of 208
8.3. Tabbed browsing overview
• Tabbed browsing allows users to open multiple websites in one Internet Explorer
window by clicking on the open New Tab button or pressing CTRL+T.
• Users can preview thumbnail images of all open tabs in a single view, by clicking on the
Quick Tab button (also see screenshot below).
• The Add Tab Group to Favorites feature allows users to save multiple tabbed windows
into one favorite tab group. For example, a user may have ten tabs open and instead of
saving each tab one-by-one, she can save them all at once into one group. Click on the
add favorites star icon and select Add Tab Group to Favorites. Then next to
Tab Group Name, type in a name (e.g. Disease Pathology websites visited Sept 1). Finally,
click Add.







8.4. To change your home page
your home page is displayed when Internet Explorer first opens or when you click
the Home button. You can choose any webpage to be your home page.





Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 200 of 208
Option 1
1. Open Internet Explorer and go to the webpage you want to use as the home
page.
2. Click the down arrow to the right of the Home button , and then click
Add or Change home page.
3. In the Add or Change Home Page dialog box, click Use this webpage as
your only home page.
4. Click yes to save your changes.
Option 2
1. Go to Tools and select Internet Options.
2. In the General tab, under the Home page category, type in the URL you wish
to be your home page (e.g. http://www.wellesley.edu).
3. Click Apply to save your changes. Click OK.
8.5. To add a new search provider (search engine)
1. Click the down arrow to the right of the Search Options button .
2. Click Find More Providers.
3. Click the search provider you want to add. The Add Search Provider
dialog box will appear.
4. If you want the provider that you just added to be used by default when
searching from the Address bar or search box, select the Make this my
default search provider check box.
5. Click Add Provider.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 201 of 208

8.6. To remove a search provider (search engine)
1. Open Internet Explorer. Click the down arrow to the right of the Search
Options button.
2. Click Change Search Defaults.
3. Select the search provider you would like to remove. Click Remove and
then click OK.
8.7. To restore default settings in order to prevent IE7
crashes
Occasionally Internet Explorer may become unstable and start constantly crashing.
Before you consider uninstalling and reinstalling Internet Explorer, you can try
returning IE7 to its default settings.
1. In Internet Explorer 7, go to Tools > Internet Options. Click the
Advanced tab. (If your IE7 browser won't even open without crashing, you
can also right-click on your IE7 desktop icon and select Properties and then
click the Advanced tab.)
2. Click the Reset... button near the bottom. A window will appear explaining
to you what restoring your settings will do to your browser. For example,
your favorite bookmarks will not be erased. Your add-ons will be disable and
your temporary internet files and cookies will get erased. Most users will not
notice these items are gone or can easily re-enable them later. So if your
browser is unstable, we recommend that you reset your browser settings.
3. Click Reset.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 202 of 208
4. You will be prompted to close and reopen your browser.
8.8. To fix error "SSL certificate REV failed [12057]"
You are on a Vista computer trying to access the Wellesley network, but you
cannot get through Cisco Clean Access. You get the message: Network Error!
SSL certificate REV failed [12057].
1. Open Internet Explorer 7.
2. Go to Tools > Internet Options > Advanced.
3. Go to the Security section and uncheck Check for server certificate
revocation. Click OK.
4. Try to log into CCA again. You may need to restart your computer.
8.9. To empty the Temporary Internet Files folder
(cache)
Every time you visit a webpage, Internet Explorer saves a copy of the webpage to
a folder called Temporary Internet Files. If this folder gets too full, Internet
Explorer may run more slowly and behave in an unstable way. Also, if a webpage
is not loading correctly and shows an error message (such as "Range not
satisfiable..."), a common solution is to empty the cache. You should clear the
cache at least once a month.
1. In Internet Explorer, click the Tools button, and then click Internet
Options.
2. In the General tab, under Browsing history, click Delete.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 203 of 208
3. In the Temporary Internet Files category, click Delete files, and
then click Yes.
4. Click Close, and then click OK.

8.10. To clear the browsing history
The browsing history is a listing of all the recent websites you have visited within a
set period of time (e.g. two weeks). Clearing your history list does not affect your
bookmarks.
1. In Internet Explorer, click the Tools button, and then click Internet
Options.
2. On the General tab, under Browsing history, click Delete.
3. In the History category, click Delete history, and then click Yes.
4. Click Close, and then click OK.
8.11. To save a picture from a webpage

1. In Internet Explorer, using the mouse, right-click the picture you want to
save.
2. Click Save Picture As.
3. In the Save Picture dialog box, browse to the folder where you want to save
the file, and then click Save.
8.12. To save a webpage onto your computer

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 204 of 208
1. In Internet Explorer, go to the webpage you want to save. Click the Page
button and then click Save As.
2. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the webpage.
3. In the File name box, type a name for the webpage.
4. In the Save as type box, pick one of the following from the drop down menu:
o Webpage, complete: To save all of the files needed to display this
webpage, including graphics, frames, and style sheets, select
Webpage, complete. This option saves each file in its original
format.
o Webpage, HTML only: To save just the current HTML webpage,
click Webpage, HTML only. This option does not save individual
files of images, sounds, or video onto your computer. But it does save
all the HTML code information that would preserve formatting, text,
hyperlinks, and the pathways to images, sounds, and video.

o Web Archive, single file: To save all of the information needed to
display this webpage in a single file, click Web Archive, single file.
This option saves a snapshot of the current webpage. This option is
available only if you have installed Outlook Express 5 or later.
o Text File: To save just the text from the current webpage, click Text
File. This option saves the information on the webpage in text format.
5. Then click Save.
8.13. To open the webpage that you have saved
1. Launch Internet Explorer 7. Then go to the File menu and select Open.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 205 of 208
2. Click on Browse to find and select the file you want to open.
3. Click Open and then click OK.
8.14. To make WebPages load without images or
sounds
Loading a webpage with no images or sounds can speed up the time that it takes the
webpage to load.
1. In Internet Explorer, click the Tools button, and then click Internet
Options.
2. Click the Advanced tab.
3. In the Settings section, under Multimedia, uncheck the boxes next to
Play sounds in webpages and Show pictures. Click OK.
Notes: To view one image without downloading the other images, right-click on
the selected image and then click on Show Picture.
8.15. Bookmarks
Bookmarks provide a permanent and easy way to remember your favorite webpages.
They are only deleted when you delete them, not when you quit Internet Explorer
To create bookmarks (favorites)
1. Go to the webpage you want to bookmark.
2. Click on the Add to Favorites icon or go to the Favorites menu.
3. Then click on Add to Favorites.
4. Give the webpage a name (e.g. American Revolution Prints) or keep its original
name.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 206 of 208
5. Select the folder you would like the bookmark to reside in.
6. Click Add.
To view and use bookmarks (favorites)
1. In Internet Explorer, click click on the View Favorites button and select
Favorites. (Another option is to click on the Favorites menu in the main
toolbar.)
2. From that list, click on the bookmark of the webpage you want to see.
To organize your bookmarks (favorites)
Internet Explorer lets you arrange your bookmarks in folders and change the order in
which they appear. You can also rename and delete your bookmarks.
1. In Internet Explorer, click on the Favorites menu and select Organize
Favorites.
2. The Organize Favorites window will let you create folders and place
bookmarks in those folders by using the New Folder and Move buttons.
You can delete and rename existing bookmarks by using the Delete and
Rename buttons. Dragging bookmarks around within the display window
will change the order in which they appear.
3. Click Close to save your changes.
Note: In the Favorites menu itself you may also drag bookmarks around to change
the order in which they appear or to move them into folders.



Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 207 of 208
To import bookmarks (favorites) into Internet Explorer 7
First, you must have your bookmarks exported from your old web browser. In most
browsers, this is done by saving all your bookmarks into a file (you can name it
whatever you want, but it is usually called bookmarks.html). Detailed
instructions for backing up your bookmarks are available for specific
browsers such as Netscape, Safari, Firefox, and older versions of Internet Explorer.
After you have created a bookmarks file, do the following:
1. In Internet Explorer, click the Add to Favorites button , and then click
Import and Export.
2. The Import/Export Wizard will open up. Click Next.
3. Under Choose an action to perform, select Import Favorites. Click Next.
4. Under Import from a File or Address, select Browse.
5. Find and select your bookmarks file (e.g. bookmarks.html) and then click
Next.
6. Select the folder where you would like to place the imported favorites. Click
Next.
7. You have successfully imported your bookmarks. Click Finish.
To export bookmarks (favorites) out of Internet Explorer 7
1. In Internet Explorer, click the Add to Favorites button , and then click
Import and Export.
2. In the Import/Export Wizard, click Next.
3. Under Choose an action to perform, select Export Favorites. Click Next.
4. Then select which folder you want to export. Clicking Favorites will export
all your bookmarks.
Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual
Computer Center & ICT Division JUCAVM
¯ 307 W 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 208 of 208
5. Click on Browse to choose where you want to save your bookmarks, which
will be in a file named bookmark.htm (you can also name it something else
if you want). Click Next.
6. Click Finish. Click OK.
7. To import your bookmarks into a different browser such as Firefox, Safari, or an older version of
Internet Explorer, follow the directions on this webpage, under the heading, Restoring
Bookmarks.

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION TO COMPUTER -------------------------------------------------------------- 8 1.1. 1.2. 1.3. 1.4. 1.5. What is a Computer?------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 8 Distinguishing Features of Computers ----------------------------------------------------------------- 8 Computer Hardware ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 9 Software ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15
Types of Software --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15

1.3.1. Organization of the Computer Hardware ------------------------------------------------------------------------------9

1.4.1.

Operating Systems -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 16

CHAPTER 2: MICROSOFT WINDOWS ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 17 2.1. 2.2. 2.3. 2.4. 2.5. User Interface ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17 Logging into Your Computer -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 17 The Windows Desktop --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 18 Using Windows Explorer ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 19 Internet Option ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 34

CHAPTER 3: INTRODUCTION TO MICROSOFT WORD --------------------------------------------------- 35 3.1. 3.2. 3.3. Anatomy of Word Screen ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 36 Different Views of the Document --------------------------------------------------------------------- 37 Formatting----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 39

3.3.1. Character Formatting----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 40 3.3.2. Paragraph Formatting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 42 3.3.3. Page Formatting----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 48 3.4. 3.5. 3.6. 3.7. Table of Contents --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 51 Headers and Footers ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 52 Spelling and Grammar Checking ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 54 Tables and Columns ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 57

3.7.1. Tables ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 57 3.7.2. Columns ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 64

Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544

JUCAVM
2 of 208

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 3.7.3. Drop Cap ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 65 3.7.4. Graphics and Text Boxes ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 66 3.8. 3.9. Working with Multiple Documents------------------------------------------------------------------- 66 Inserting AutoText ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 67

3.10. Insert Files ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 67 3.11. Use AutoRecover --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 68 3.12. Finding and Replacing Formatting -------------------------------------------------------------------- 68 3.13. Adding a Watermark ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 69 3.14. Creating Footnotes or Endnotes ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 70 3.15. Creating a Bookmark ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 71 3.16. Creating a Table of Figures ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 72 3.17. Numbering Heading Styles----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 73 3.18. Apply Numbering to Custom Heading Styles -------------------------------------------------------- 74 12.1. Numbering Lines ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 75 12.2. Creating an Equation ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 75 12.3. Creating Mail Merge Documents---------------------------------------------------------------------- 76 12.4. Creating Documents Using Automatic Formatting -------------------------------------------------- 77 12.5. Inserting Comments ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 77 12.6. Creating a Form ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 78 12.7. Printing -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 78 12.7.1. Editing Text in Print Preview -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 79 12.7.2. To Print a Document:----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 79

Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544

JUCAVM
3 of 208

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual CHAPTER 4: INTRODUCTION TO MICROSOFT EXCEL ---------------------------------------------------- 81 Switching between sheets ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 81
4.2.1. Data Entry ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 81 Working with a Worksheet --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 83 Exiting Excel --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 84 Types of series ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 85 Creating a Series----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 86 Moving and Copying Data and Formats ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 87 Inserting Cells, Columns and Rows ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 90 Clearing and Deleting ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 90 Find and Replace ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 91

Moving the Cell pointer --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 82
4.2.2.

Select the worksheet ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 84
4.2.3. 4.3.1. 4.3.2. 4.3.3. 4.4.1. 4.4.2. 4.4.3.

4.5.1. Formatting the Appearance of Data-------------------------------------------------------------------- 92 4.5.2. Aligning Worksheet Data ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 93 4.5.3. Formatting Borders and Shading ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 93
4.6.1. 4.6.2. 4.6.3. 4.6.4. 4.7.1. 4.7.2. 4.8.1. 4.8.2. 4.8.3. Entering Database Information----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 95 Sorting a Database -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 95 Filtering a List-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 96 Data Forms ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 99 Cell References -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------101 Worksheet Functions----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------103 Creating a Chart ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------107 Parts of a Chart -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------108 Working with Chart and Chart Items --------------------------------------------------------------------------109

CHAPTER 5: MICROSOFT ACCESS--------------------------------------------------------------------------112 5.1. What is a Database? ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------112
Starting Microsoft Access 2003 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------112 The Microsoft Access 2003 Screen-------------------------------------------------------------------------------113 Using Help ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------115 Designing a Database ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------116 Creating a Database------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------116 Creating Tables -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------117 5.1.1. 5.1.2. 5.1.3.

5.2.

Designing and Creating Databases -------------------------------------------------------------------116

5.2.1. 5.2.2. 5.2.3.

5.3.

Organizing your Data ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------125
Filtering Records---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------125 Entering Criteria ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------126 The AND and OR Relations --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------127 Inserting Column or Row ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------127 Deleting Column or Row -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------127 Removing a Filter --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------128

5.3.1. 5.3.2. 5.3.3. 5.3.4. 5.3.5. 5.3.6.

Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544

JUCAVM
4 of 208

4.14. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 5.2.6. 5.1. 5.4.6.6.5. Saving a Filter as a Query -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------128 Copying and Moving Microsoft Access Objects or Text----------------------------------------------------128 Printing a Datasheet -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------129 Renaming a Database Object-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------130 5. 5.6.6. 5. 6. 5.1.11. 5. 5.4. Reports -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------144 Generating a Quick Report---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------144 Generating a Report using a Wizard ---------------------------------------------------------------------------144 Generating a Custom Designed Report ------------------------------------------------------------------------145 Changing a Form or Report's Underlying Table or Query -------------------------------------------------145 Creating a Sub report----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------146 Changing the Layout of a Subform or Subreport-------------------------------------------------------------147 Sorting and Grouping Data in Reports-------------------------------------------------------------------------148 Changing Sorting and Grouping Order ------------------------------------------------------------------------149 Hiding Duplicate Data on a Report-----------------------------------------------------------------------------150 Adding or Removing Headers and Footers on a Report ----------------------------------------------------151 Sizing Sections in a Form or Report ----------------------------------------------------------------------------152 Adding page Numbers to a Form or Report-------------------------------------------------------------------152 Adding the Current Date and Time to a Form or Report ---------------------------------------------------153 Drawing Lines and Rectangles on Forms and Reports ------------------------------------------------------154 Previewing a Report-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------154 5.9.4.3.4.4. 5. 6. 5.6.8. 5.7.4. 5.4.3.2.2.4.8.6.6.5. 5.6.6. 5.5.3. 5.5.1. 5.3.5.6.5. 5. 5.4. 6.6.6. 5.2.7.9. 5. 5.9.10.7.5. 5. Forms----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------139 Types of Form Views-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------139 Creating A Quick form --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------139 Creating A Form Using A Wizard -------------------------------------------------------------------------------139 Creating A Custom Designed Form -----------------------------------------------------------------------------140 Making a Form Read-Only ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------141 Creating a Form with multiple Screens or pages -------------------------------------------------------------142 Adding a Label and Editing Label Text-------------------------------------------------------------------------142 Changing the Appearance of Text ------------------------------------------------------------------------------143 5.10. 5.8.7. 5.6. 5.1 Introduction To Power Point -------------------------------------------------------------------------156 Starting PowerPoint -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------156 Creating a Desktop Shortcut for PowerPoint -------------------------------------------------------157 Exiting PowerPoint ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------158 Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 5 of 208 .4. 5.3.6. Queries--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------131 Types of Queries----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------131 Creating a Query with a Wizard---------------------------------------------------------------------------------132 Creating a Custom Designed Query ----------------------------------------------------------------------------132 Expressions in Queries and Filters ------------------------------------------------------------------------------134 Creating Select Query ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------135 Creating Make table Query --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------135 Creating an Update Query ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------136 Creating an Append Query---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------137 Using a Calculated Field in a Query ----------------------------------------------------------------------------137 Editing a Query -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------138 5.12. 5.4.5.4. 5. 5. 6.6.13. 5.15.4.6. 5. Ms-Windows.5. 5.3.5.Introduction to Computers.1.6.5. 5.3.10. 5.5.6.8.3. 5. 5.

Working with Masters---------------------------------------------------------------------------------184 6.22. 6. Working with Slides in Slide Sorter View -----------------------------------------------------------180 6.1.1.5.3.18. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 6.20. Understanding PowerPoint Views -------------------------------------------------------------------159 Changing to a Different View ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------160 Working with Toolbars -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------162 Moving a Toolbar --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------162 Turning off the Personalized Menus Feature -----------------------------------------------------------------163 6.1. 6. 6.18.5.4.10. 6.3 Revising Text-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------176 6. Displaying Outline View ------------------------------------------------------------------------------169 6. 6.18.2.4.7.19. 6.14. Using Other Research Tools --------------------------------------------------------------------------179 6. 6. Spell Checking the Presentation----------------------------------------------------------------------178 6.4. Using the AutoContent Wizard-----------------------------------------------------------------------164 Starting a New Presentation using a Template ------------------------------------------------------165 Starting a Blank Presentation -------------------------------------------------------------------------166 Printing the Presentation -----------------------------------------------------------------------------167 Working with Presentation Files ---------------------------------------------------------------------167 6.18. Using the Research Tools -----------------------------------------------------------------------------178 6. Using the Thesaurus -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------179 6. Editing Text --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------175 6.6.Introduction to Computers. Ms-Windows.1.18.1.9.4.12.8. Using the Replace Feature ----------------------------------------------------------------------------177 6. Changing the Design Template -----------------------------------------------------------------------182 6.11.2 Selecting Text ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------175 6. 6. Inserting Slides from another Presentation ---------------------------------------------------------174 6.1 Outlining a Presentation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------170 6. Changing Text Formatting ----------------------------------------------------------------------------184 Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 6 of 208 . 6. Selecting Slides -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------180 Inserting a Slide ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------180 Duplicating a Slide-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------181 Moving a Slide ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------181 Deleting Slides------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------181 6. 6.17. 6.4.16.3.18.13.4.15.4. 6.21. Changing the Color Scheme---------------------------------------------------------------------------182 6.2.

To save a webpage onto your computer -------------------------------------------------------------203 8. Applying an Animation Scheme ----------------------------------------------------------------------188 6. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 6.14.3. Applying a Slide Background-------------------------------------------------------------------------186 6. To clear the browsing history-------------------------------------------------------------------------203 8.11. Working with Footers and Special Placeholders----------------------------------------------------185 6. 8. 7.24.26.12. 8. Creating Custom Animation --------------------------------------------------------------------------189 6. Internet Explorer --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------193 Mozilla Firefox -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------193 Safari------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------194 Opera -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------195 Netscape Navigator/Netscape -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------195 8. To open the webpage that you have saved ----------------------------------------------------------204 8. 8.5.27. 8.6. To save a picture from a webpage --------------------------------------------------------------------203 8.Introduction to Computers. 8. 7.4.28.7.1. 8.4. Ms-Windows.1. To make WebPages load without images or sounds ------------------------------------------------205 Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 7 of 208 .23. 7.25.3. 8.10. 8.13.5.2. Using Slide Transitions --------------------------------------------------------------------------------187 6.2.8. Getting Started -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------196 Using Internet Explorer 7 Overview -----------------------------------------------------------------198 Tabbed browsing overview ---------------------------------------------------------------------------199 To change your home page ---------------------------------------------------------------------------199 To add a new search provider (search engine)------------------------------------------------------200 To remove a search provider (search engine) -------------------------------------------------------201 To restore default settings in order to prevent IE7 crashes ----------------------------------------201 To fix error "SSL certificate REV failed [12057]"----------------------------------------------------202 To empty the Temporary Internet Files folder (cache)---------------------------------------------202 8. 7. Publishing the Presentation in Web Format ---------------------------------------------------------192 7.9.

1. What is a Computer? A computer is an electronic data processing machine that is designed to accept and store data. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Chapter 1: Introduction to Computer 1. This feature of computers is Programmability. Versatility (General Purpose): If given the correct instructions. Speed: modern computers can process billions of instructions per second.2. Diligence (Tirelessness): If there are billions of instructions to be processed. Erroneous results may occur due to human rather than technological weakness. 2. Memory (Storage): Computers can store data so that it can be retrieved whenever needed. Computers process the first and the last instruction with the same speed and accuracy. process the data to produce useful information under the direction of step-by-step instructions. 6. The physical part of the computer is called Hardware and the instructions are Software. Computers can do virtually everything. called programs. Ms-Windows. 5. Accuracy: Computers are extremely accurate. 3. Programmability: The Computer can do virtually everything provided that it is given the correct set of instruction. 4. Distinguishing Features of Computers 1. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 8 of 208 . 1.Introduction to Computers.

Computer Hardware The physical component of a computer system that can be seen. It accepts (reads) the list of instructions and data from the outside world. It converts these instructions and data in a computer acceptable form. Organization of the Computer Hardware Control Arithmetic Unit Logic unit Register Input Device Output Device Memory Secondary Storage Input device Data and instructions must enter the computer before any computation can be performed on the supplied data. It supplies the converted instructions and data to the computer system for processing.Introduction to Computers. the input unit performs the following functions. placed inside the system or outside make up the hardware.3. scanner and etc. The widely used Input devices include keyboard. mouse. There are different categories of input devices. touched and felt.3. In short. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 1. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 9 of 208 . 1. The unit that links the external environment with the computer system performs this task.1. Ms-Windows.

Del Or Delete . Ms-Windows. 2. etc. pause. Shift Key . . Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 10 of 208 .Deletes The Character To The Left Of Cursor. Caps Lock . . Standardized typewriter keys: A-Z.Use The Shift Keys To Type Capital Letters And To Type The Upper Character On Keys With Two Characters On Them. ?. Cursor movement keys (arrow keys): Page up. Arrow Keys . 0-9. etc 4. .Deletes The Character At Cursor And/Or Characters To The Right Of The Cursor.Introduction to Computers. End. Page down. BkSp Or Backspace . “.Moves The Cursor Around Document With Out Changing Text. Space Bar . Special . Keyboards come in a variety of sizes and shapes but most keyboards have common layouts: 1.Moves The Cursor One Space At A Time To The Right. Function keys / programmable keys: F1through F12 3.purpose keys: Alt. Ctrl. 5. Home. Esc Or Escape . Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Keyboard A computer keyboard is an electromechanical component designed to create special standardized electronic codes when a key is pressed.Cancels A Menu Or Message Box.Locks The Keyboard So It Types Capital Letters (A Light Goes On When Caps Lock Is On) Tab . Numeric keys: located at the right side of the keyboard Keyboard layout and Data Entry Enter Or Return .Moves The Cursor Down One Line And Enters Commands.Moves The Cursor Five Spaces To The Right.

Output hardware is categorized according to whether it produces hardcopy or softcopy. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Function Keys or F keys .The Control key or Ctrl is often used to Access commands. . and ALT. SHIFT. Command keys . Each piece of software uses the command keys differently. Output Device Output devices provide the right information to the right person in the right format at the right time. Scanners Scanning devices are called optical Character Recognition input device. CTRL. The mouse has two buttons the left one is used to select objects and text and the right one is used to access menus.The Shift key used to type CAPITAL LETTERS. Mouse Is a hand held device connected to the computer by small cable.The Alternative key or Alt is often used to access menus. Scanner reads a hardcopy data from source document (including image graphs. They have different uses with different software. .normally do nothing on their own but work in combination with other keys.Introduction to Computers. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 11 of 208 . Ms-Windows.access commands by themselves or in combination with the three command keys. As well the command keys are all used to move through documents and edit text faster and easier. type and handwritten documents) in to computer usable form. .

Laser Printers: use the same technology as a photocopier using heat to transfer toner (black powder) onto paper. Most desktop computers use a monitor with CRT (Cathode Ray Tube) and notebook computers use LCD (Liquid Crystal Display. processing is accomplished by and interplays between one or more of the central processing units and primary storage.Refers to information that has been recorded on a tangible medium such as paper or microfilms. Printer The printer takes the information from the computer and transfers it to paper.) CPU (Central Processing Unit) The ability to process (organizes and manipulate) data is a critical aspect of a computer system. Softcopy: . The three basic types or printer are. Monitors come in many type and size from the simple monochrome (one color) screen to full color screen. The principal hardcopy output devices are Printers and Plotters. Ms-Windows. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Hardcopy: . inkjet. Monitor Is a device that shows the progress and operation of the computer. Dot matrix printers: work like a typewriter transferring ink from a ribbon to paper with a series or 'matrix' of tiny pins. Inkjet printers: work like dot matrix printers but fires a stream of ink from a cartridge directly on to the paper.Introduction to Computers. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 12 of 208 . dot matrix. In a computer system.Refers to the temporary data output such as displayed on a computer screen. There are many different types of printers with various levels of quality. and laser.

Main Memory Located physically close to the CPU (to decrease access time). Ms-Windows. Types of Memory There are two types of memory: RAM (Random Access Memory) ROM (Read Only Memory) RAM . the registers. ROM . RAM chips will lose their contents if the current is turned off or disrupted. primary storage and even secondary storage and various output devices. The CPU of a computer is also called brain of the computer. In ROM. during and after execution by the CPU.is temporary and volatile .Introduction to Computers.it exists only as long as the electric current is maintained. Registers are high-speed storage areas used to temporarily hold small units of program instructions and data immediately before. The control unit sequentially access program instructions. Instructions or data can be temporarily stored in RAM. memory provides the CPU with a working storage area for program instructions and data. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Each central processing unit (CPU) consists of three associated elements: the arithmetic logic unit the control unit. The arithmetic logic unit (ALU) performs mathematical calculations and makes logical comparisons. and the register areas.is usually nonvolatile. decodes them and coordinated the flow of data in and out of the ALU. The chief feature of memory is that it rapidly provides the data and instructions to the CPU. ROM provides permanent storage for Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 13 of 208 . the combination of circuit states is fixed and therefore the data represented by this combination will bot be lost if the power is removed.

Inside the drive the disk spins at a very high speed and the read/write head reads information from the surface and feeds it to the computer or receives information from the computer and stores it on the disk. Based on the backing material (plastic or metal). Aside from its high cost. Magnetic Disk Magnetic disks are made of metal or plastic coated with magnetic material. .There are other types of nonvolatile memory as well like PROM (programmable read-only memory) EPROM (Erasable Programmable read-only memory) Secondary Storage Devices (Auxiliary Memory) Main memory serves as the primary storage for the computer. Magnetic disks are generally manufactured without tracks and sectors. Ms-Windows. A device called a disk drive is used to read from or write information to the disk. The tracks are further divided into sections called Sectors. The amount of information on the inner track is the same as that of on the outer track though much compressed. there should be other types of storage devices capable of permanent storage. Information is recorded on a disk in concentric circles called Tracks on both surfaces of the disk. magnetic disks can be divided into two: Floppy Disks & Hard Disks Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 14 of 208 . magnetic disks etc.Introduction to Computers. RAM is volatile and ROM is read only. Tracks and sectors are created by the operating system of the computer by a process called formatting. Examples of magnetic storage medium are magnetic tapes. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual data and instructions that do not change like programs and data from the computer manufacturer. Thus. The most common way of storing information permanently is on magnetic storage medium.

To store and retrieve data from a floppy disk. 1.4.. Different software is used for different purposes. C++.1.4. 1. Hard Disks Standard secondary storage device of all computers.. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Floppy Disk (Diskettes) Diskettes are often referred to as “floppy” because they are made of flexible material. which contains special mechanical components for storing and retrieving data.g. Can store and retrieve data much faster than floppy diskettes. Software Software is part of a computer that gives instructions to the physical part (hardware) to carry out its tasks.Introduction to Computers. UNIX o Language/Developing Software E. Non-removable as it is fixed inside the computer. The finite set of instructions that tell the computer hardware what to do is called PROGRAM. All computers have at least one hard disk Has a massive storage capacity that can be measured in GB. Visual Basic Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 15 of 208 . FORTRAN. Ms-Windows. MS DOS. Types of Software There are 2 types of software: System Software: o Operating System Software E. you must place it into a disk drive. Pascal. MS WINDOWS.g.

word processing software. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Application Software: o Developed to meet particular user interest E. Database Management software o Accounting System software. Games. Ms-Windows. word processor software.5. It is the master program that allows the user to run application programs (Games. To use the computer effectively there should be efficient communication between these three components. and computer resources. the computer software. Spreadsheet software.Introduction to Computers. the software and the user.g. The operating system is a program that acts as a link between the user.. etc 1. Virus Protection and detection Software. etc) NB: Without the operating system the application software would be unable to run Functions of the Operating System: Controlling Activity Input/output Management Command Processing/Interpretation Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 16 of 208 . Operating Systems In a computer system there are at least three components: the computer hardware.

Mouse is a pointing device with two buttons which controls the movement of a pointer on the screen. The user interface (operating environment) of most modern operating systems incorporates graphical elements. Once this process is completed. 2. Logging into Your Computer When you press the power button of your computer to turn it on. Microsoft Windows XP. in this case.2. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 17 of 208 . depending on the settings of the computer. you will be requested to provide user name password to start using your computer.1. In CLI. messages are displayed in message boxes. During the loading process you will see the Windows logo and other messages. MSDOS is example of an operating system with CLI as its operating environment. the operating system takes keyboard inputs from the user and translates it into operations that the computer performs. Ms-Windows.Introduction to Computers. The primary input device of operating systems using GUIs is the mouse. User Interface Users communicate with their computers through the operating system. and dialog boxes are displayed to the user to provide input. the first program to be loaded into the computer’s memory is the Operating System. In all operating systems there are two operating environments – Command Line Interface (CLI) and Graphical User Interface (GUI). This operating environment is known as Graphical User Interface (GUI). Different objects of the operating system are represented by small pictures called icons. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Chapter 2: Microsoft Windows 2.

The desktop images and other attributes may vary between users 2. The Windows Desktop The Windows Desktop is the background area where different windows are opened.A System Tray 18 of 208 JUCAVM .Introduction to Computers.3. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Figure 1 .Login (Welcome) Window To login to your computer: 1. Select the user name by clicking the picture representing your user account. 1) 2. Icons Start Button Computer Center & ICT Division Quick Launch Toolbar Taskbar 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 Typical Windows XP Desktop Figure 2 . A text box appears below the user name (Fig. Type in the password and press Enter key or click the right pointing arrow on the screen. Ms-Windows. The windows desktop appears.

Quick Launch Toolbar – a shortcut area on the taskbar that is used to launch frequently used programs. and search for files and folders. 1. For example. All folders created by users are represented by small yellow pictures whereas files are represented by different pictures depending on the type of data or program stored in the file. You can add or remove program icons into this toolbar by dragging icons to or from the area 5. the format of the data file or the type of the program used to create the file.4. 4. taskbar and the system trey (Fig 2). move. Ms-Windows. System Tray (SysTray) – Status area for utility and background programs such as antivirus software. you can copy. Using Windows Explorer Windows Explorer displays the hierarchical structure of files. and then drag the file to another folder or another drive. start button. It also shows any network drives that have been mapped to drive letters on your computer. Icons – small pictures representing a file or a folder on the desktop. the current time and other background programs. and drives on your computer. opened windows. Note that moving the mouse to a given icon on the SysTray displays a screen tip describing the program represented by the icon.Introduction to Computers. 2. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 19 of 208 . Taskbar – status information area showing open applications and multiple windows as buttons. folders. 2. rename. Start Button – an access point to various programs and components 3. Whenever a window is opened. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Some of the components of the desktop are Icons. you can open a folder that contains a file you want to copy or move. a button will be shown on the taskbar to indicate that it is open. Using Windows Explorer.

graphics.Introduction to Computers. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual There are other places in Windows where you can view and work with files and folders. or other files you want to access quickly. Ms-Windows.Windows Explorer Window Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 20 of 208 . Point to All Programs (or just Programs if you are using the Classic start menu) and then click Windows Explorer or Right click a folder icon and click Explore or Open a folder window and click Folders button on the Standard Buttons bar Folder (Tree) Panel Contents Panel Figure 3 . My Documents is a convenient place to store documents. which lists other computers that are connected to your local area network (LAN). You can view My Network Places. To Open Windows Explorer: Click Start.

All folders on the desktop including My Computer.doc. Use Search if you are looking for common file types.txt. if you remember all or part of the name of the file or folder you want to find. Searching For Files and Folders The Search tool of Windows XP offers the most direct way to locate a file. All other folders created on the disks are at the fourth and lower levels. + indicates that the sub folders are listed beneath the parent folder. The Desktop is at the top level of the hierarchy. When a folder is selected from the tree Panel. The existence of sub folders in a given folder is indicated by a + or – sign to the left of the folder icons on the tree Panel. or if you know when you last changed a file. My Documents. and Special letter. its contents are displayed in the Contents Panel. Flash Disk and so on) reside at the third level.Introduction to Computers.* will find Holiday letter. The Contents Panel displays contents of a selected folder. If you know only part of the name. The Folder Panel displays the hierarchical structure of folders.doc. *letter. Special letter. For example. Wildcard Characters represents any character in filename specifications. you can use wildcard characters 1 to locate all files or folders that include that part in the name. All secondary storage devices (hard disk. My Network Places and the Recycle Bin are found at the second level. Ms-Windows. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual The Windows Explorer window is divided in to two parts – Folders (Tree) Panel and Contents Panel. CD. Windows recognizes two wildcards – Asterisk (*) representing any number of characters and Question mark (?) representing a single character 1 Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 21 of 208 . floppy disk. Windows Explorer provides a suitable alternative to copy and/or move files and folders to different locations using the Drag and Drop Method.

Ms-Windows. if you don’t remember the location of the files or if they are stored in different locations use the Search Tool To use the Search Tool: 1.Introduction to Computers. However. move or rename the files and folders found. You can use the Back button to go back one step. Note: You can open. Specify the search criteria in the left Panel I. Picture. delete. To provide specific criteria. Music or Video) II. select All Files and Folders Specify additional criteria IV. 3.. Music or Videos button and select one of the three categories (i. point to Search and then click For Files and Folders) Tip: Pressing F3 on the key board also opens the Search window 2. All or part of the file name V. To search for Documents (such as Ms Word files). copy. Music or Videos click Pictures. Click Start and then click Search to display the Search window.e. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 22 of 208 . Stop button to stop the search process. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Use Windows Explorer or My Computer if you know the exact location of the files or folders. To search for Pictures. (If you are using the Classic Start Menu. Found items will be listed on the right Panel of the search window. Date or period of last modification VI. Location to look in etc Click Search. click Documents III. click Start.

Use the Search feature. and demonstrations to help you learn to use Microsoft Windows XP.Help and Support Window There are several ways that can be followed to access the help resources First Column .Introduction to Computers.Pick a Help Topic . tutorials. 4) Figure 4 . (Fig. or table of contents to view all Windows Help resources. The Help and Support Window appear. including those that are on the Internet. Index.lists help topics that would be found in table of contents Second Column – displays online (Internet or Local Network) alternatives from where the user may get help Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 23 of 208 . Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Using Help Microsoft Help and Support Center is a comprehensive resource for practical advice. Ms-Windows. To display the Help and Support Window: Click Start and then click Help and Support.

click the Search box. Figure 5 . type in the keyword or press ENTER key Index Search – clicking Index on the menu bar displays the lists of items in the left hand Panel of the window Whenever a help topic is selected the contents of the selected topic are displayed in the right hand Panel (Fig. which is automatically opened when items labeled Practice: are clicked.A Help and Support Window displaying a help topic For some searched topic. To search for help topics. Ms-Windows. there is Overviews. shows practical demonstrations of help topics. Articles and Tutorials section which contains overview texts or practical demonstrations. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 24 of 208 . The Windows Interactive Training. 5). Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Keyword Search – you may type the keywords that identify the topics you are looking for.Introduction to Computers.

if you are left-handed. To find out more information about an item in Control Panel while in Category view: Hold your mouse pointer over the icon or category name and read the text that appears. Some of these tools help you adjust settings that make your computer more fun to use. If your Start Menu is set up in Classic view. and then click Control Panel. use Mouse to replace standard mouse pointers with animated icons that move on your screen. point to Settings. hold your mouse pointer over the icon and read the text that appears. click Switch to Classic View. To find out more about an item in Control Panel while in Classic Control Panel view. To open an item.Introduction to Computers. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 25 of 208 . If you open Control Panel and do not see the item you want. For example. click Start. double-click its icon. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Control Panel Elements Control Panel is full of specialized tools that are used to change the way Windows looks and behaves. Ms-Windows. Other tools help you set up Windows so that your computer is easier to use. To open Control Panel: Click Start and then click Control Panel. you can use Mouse to switch the mouse buttons so that the button on the right performs the primary functions of selecting and dragging. For example. or use Sounds and Audio Devices to replace standard system sounds with sounds you choose.

you can specify how your folders function and how content is displayed. You can change the program that opens a file type. under Hidden files and folders. o o Click Start. click Tools. Folder Options With Folder Options. 2. and then click Folder Options. To change folder options settings: Open Folder Options in Control Panel. On the View tab. You can also change the items that appear on your desktop. To display hidden files and folders: 1. and then click Control Panel. other storage locations. click Show hidden files and folders. Open Folder Options in Control Panel. Double-click Folder Options. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 26 of 208 .Introduction to Computers. and detailed file information. For example. you can indicate that you want your folders to display hyperlinks to common tasks. Or to open Folder Options from a folder window. Ms-Windows. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Some of the tasks that can be done in the control panel are discussed here. You can also choose to open items with either a single or a double click.

Date and Time Properties Dialog Box Tip: Double clicking the System Clock on the System Tray also displays the same dialog box Change the formats of Numbers. Ms-Windows. date and time formats Add Other Languages – To include multilingual support Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 27 of 208 . date. Dates and Times – Click this button to change number formats. Language and Regional Options in Category View 2) Select one of the Tasks .. Time. and time zone Figure 6 .. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Date and Time To change Date and Time: 1) Open the Control Panel and click Date. Change the Date and Time – Click this tab to display the dialog box that can be used to change the current time.Introduction to Computers.

To change the appearance of your windows: 1. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Appearance/Display/Screen Saver/Resolution The appearance of the Windows XP can also be changed from the control panel. Select different options by clicking each tab: Themes Tab – This tab is used to change the desktop theme.Introduction to Computers. Desktop Tab – this tab is used to change the desktop background image Screen Saver Tab – Screen Saver is an animated text or graphics that is displayed when the user stops interacting with the system for Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 28 of 208 . sounds.Display Properties Window 2. fonts. colors. Open the control panel and switch to classic view by clicking the Switch to Classic View button and then double click the Display icon to show the Display Properties window Figure 7 . and other window elements that give your desktop a unified and distinctive look. A desktop theme is a predefined set of icons. Ms-Windows.

the idle time interval for the screen saver to appear. picture. and a list of recently visited Web pages. A user account gives you a personalized view of your own files. The type of screen saver. If you do not use a password for your user account. User Accounts User accounts personalize Windows for each person who is sharing a computer. use a password for your user account. and password. can be set from this tab Appearance Tab – This tab is used the color and style of windows and buttons Settings Tab – This tab is used to change the screen resolution and the color depth of (number of colors displayed on) your screen. those settings will apply only to your account. a list of favorite Web sites. documents you create or save are stored in your own My Documents folder. other people will have access to your account and be able to see all of your folders and files. To help keep your files more secure and to help make sure they remain private. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual a specific period of time. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 29 of 208 . and choose other settings that will apply only to you. With a user account. Ms-Windows. There are also other advanced activities performed using this tab. You can choose your own account name. separate from the documents of others who also use the computer. You can still mark certain items as shared if you want other people to be able to access them. If you have a user account and you change computer settings. size. such as the type. or the screen saver.Introduction to Computers.

Cannot change his or her own account type to limited unless there is at least one other user with a computer administrator account. Computer Administrator Account The computer administrator account is intended for someone who can make system wide changes to the computer. You can create as many accounts on the computer as you want. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual As a user with a computer administrator account. delete. passwords. A user with a computer administrator account: • • Can create and delete user accounts on the computer. and account types. and change all user accounts on the computer. install software. Only a user with a computer administrator account has full access to other user accounts on the computer. The guest account is available by default for users with no assigned account on the computer. Can change other users' account names. and have full access to all accounts on the computer. pictures. • Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 30 of 208 . you can create.Introduction to Computers. Types of User Account There are two types of user accounts available on your computer: computer administrator and limited. and access all non private files on the computer. Ms-Windows. This ensures that there is always at least one user with a computer administrator account on the computer.

or delete his or her password. so the user can log on quickly to check e-mail or browse the Internet. • • Guest Account The guest account is intended for use by someone who has no user account on the computer. • • Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 31 of 208 . A user logged on to the guest account: • Cannot install software or hardware. Can change the guest account picture. Can change his or her account picture and can also create. There is no password for the guest account. A user with a limited account: • Generally cannot install software or hardware. A user with a computer administrator account must make these kinds of changes. Cannot change his or her account name or account type.Introduction to Computers. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Limited account The limited account is intended for someone who should be prohibited from changing most computer settings and deleting important files. but can access applications that have already been installed on the computer. Cannot change the guest account type. Ms-Windows. but can access programs that have already been installed on the computer. change.

2. 3. depending on the type of account you want to assign to the new user.Introduction to Computers. 3. 4. 1. Type a name for the new user account. and then click Create Account. 2. To change an existing account: You must have a computer administrator account to change a user's account type. 1. and click Next. Click either Computer administrator or Limited. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual To add a new user to the computer: You must have a computer administrator account to add a new user to the computer. Change the Picture – to change the picture displayed as the logo for the user Change the account type – to change the account type from Limited to Administrator or back Delete Account – to delete a user account Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 32 of 208 . click Create a new account. Open User Accounts in Control Panel. Click the name of the account you want to change. This does not work for Guest Account Change Password – to change the password of the user. Ms-Windows. If password is not set. Select different options: Change the Name – to change the account name. Under Pick a task. Create Password is shown instead. Open User Accounts in Control Panel.

Click on the Hardware Tab and click on the Device Manager 3. Go to start and click control Panel 2. And click finish Device Manager Device Manager is an OS feature that lets you view and change the properties of all devices attached to your computer. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 4. Double-click Scheduled Task 3. Type the name of the Task and choose the time you want 6.To get device Manager in windows 1. Right-click on the My Computer Icon from the desktop and click on property 2. Close the window when you are done Scheduled Tasks Scheduled tasks allow users to have Windows automatically run a specified program or open a certain file at a set time. Choose the application you want to Run and click next 5. Ms-Windows. Choose the driver you want to enable or disable Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 33 of 208 . .To make a scheduled 1. Enter the name and password of a user 8.Introduction to Computers. Scheduled tasks can be used to open programs and/or files that you always use. . Click on Next 4. Select the time and day you want this task to start 7.

Click on the connection Tab 4. In the General Tab type the default web page you want 3. Ms-Windows. 6. clear the Automatically detect settings and Use automatic configuration script check boxes.Introduction to Computers. Internet Option To configure internet options for internet connection sharing 1.5. Go to control panel and click on Internet Options 2. clear the Use a proxy server check box. In Automatic configuration. In Proxy Server. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 2. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 34 of 208 . Click on never dial a connection and click LAN Setting 5.

Ms-Windows. After you have created and corrected your text. System Icon Title bar Ruler Standard Tool bar Menu bar Formatting Toolbar Tables and borders toolbar I-Beam I Status bar Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 35 of 208 . sentences. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Chapter 3: Introduction to Microsoft Word Microsoft word is a powerful word processor that combines text with imported graphics. When necessary you can easily correct errors by adding or deleting words. you can print it and store it on hard disk or floppy disk for reuse or future references. spreadsheet and charts.Introduction to Computers. paragraphs or pages. Microsoft word lets you prepare a variety of documents.

Ms-Windows. comment. Tab stops and indents Where the text and graphics displayed The blinking bar that shows where the text you type will appear Displays the title of the window. When you click on the menus on the menu bar. If the toolbar is not visible. it displays word commands that enables you to instruct word to perform an action Toolbar Displays different toolbars that are used for quick access for commonly used commands. moving and closing the word window Enables you to minimize to restore the window size Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 36 of 208 . choose Toolbar command from view menu and click on the toolbar you want to display Ruler Work Area Insertion Point (-) Scroll Bar View Buttons Status bar Browse buttons Displays information about the active or highlighted command Used to move through the document by page. etc. Anatomy of Word Screen Title Bar System Menu Icon Sizing buttons Menu bar Displays a list of menu options. section. Enables you to see the hidden part of the document Used to switch to different views of the document Enables you to set Margins.Introduction to Computers. in this case: Microsoft Word and the name of the active document Displays the menu with command for sizing. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 3.1.

Page layout: in this view. This view includes a new feature called a Document Map that gives you an outline View of your document’s structure and allows you to easily navigate to different portions of the document. character formatting.Introduction to Computers. page numbers. graphics and frames and just about every other formatting feature. You can use it to manipulate texts that aren’t possible in the other view. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 3. where you can collapse or expand various parts of the document. In this view you can view several pages at onetime and also see where the pages look even. columns.2. It is the fastest view option because it doesn’t display as many different screen elements. You see headers and footers. Ms-Windows. where the pages breaks fall and others. how big the headings appear. It doesn’t show columns or frames. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 37 of 208 . Outline: this view shows the document in outline form if you are using the built-in numbered heading styles. It is the default view that means it’s what you get when you start word the first time. Print Preview: this view shows you exactly how the document will look when printed. as it will appear on the printed page. Online layout: this view is designed specifically to make documents easier to read on screen. This let’s you see the document in hierarchical form. Different Views of the Document Normal: This view shows text. graphics and paragraph formatting. everything in your document is displayed and positioned. footnotes. headers or footers. But graphics and full paragraph formatting are not shown in this view.

Introduction to Computers. Dialog Boxes Choosing a menu command will usually followed by dialogue box.Click on the View menu then click on one of the view options you want to apply Or . Let’s take a look at font dialog box (click on format menu hen click on font command). Aside from some very basic commands. Tabs Text Box List Box Drop down list Check box Preview Box Command button Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 38 of 208 . Point on the respective view buttons to obtain the view button names. Ms-Windows. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Changing the View: to change from one view to other: . almost everything you do in word happens through a dialog box.Click on the View button in the lower left corner of the word screen.

page numbering. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Tabs Divides the dialog box into different sections. Whenever you select an option you will see how it look in the preview box. Indicates whether an option is selected or not. otherwise it is not selected.g. To see more of the options you can use scrolls if available. and text alignment.Introduction to Computers. Displays different options related to Textbox name. Clicking on Character Spacing or Animation will take you to the respective section containing different option related to the tab Text Box List Box DropDown list Button Check box Preview box Command Button Indicates you which option is selected from the list box. paragraph and page. and making text bold. So it is the view before you apply it into your document When pressed.e. E. Formatting Word divides its formatting options as follows: character. Page formatting applies to entire pages and sections and it includes margins. italic or underline. color of text. Ms-Windows. Character formatting can be applied to any amount of text and it includes changing the font style. and headers and footers. i. tabs and indents.3. click on color drop down list button to display different color and click on one of it to select it. checked (selected). Used to display different options or drop down list of the respective property. Paragraph formatting applies to a paragraph or multiple paragraphs and it includes line spacing. make something to happen. size. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 39 of 208 . Press OK to execute the commands you have chosen and close the dialog box and CANCEL to close the dialogue box without executing the command Tells you that it is 3.

To make text bold. the change applies to the whole word. you can change the type of style or size.Introduction to Computers. and text bordering: 1. Character Formatting There are many ways you can change the appearance of text. color. or underline: 1.3. Click on the appropriate formatting drop-down list button from the toolbar and select any option you want. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 40 of 208 . Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 3. 2. 2. You can make it bold or italicize it. Select the text you want to change or position the insertion point where you want the change to start. size. Italic or underline from the Toolbar. Click on the appropriate button: Bold. Ms-Windows.1. Using the Font Dialogue Box The font dialogue box lets you change as many characteristics as you want at once.e. shading. In addition. Or Use Keyboard shortcuts i. • Press Ctrl + I to make the text Italic • Press Ctrl + U to make the text underline To change the font. it gives you access to even more appearance options. If your insertion point is positioned in the middle of a word without anything selected. italic. you can highlight the text or add color to it. Select the text you want to format or place the insertion point where you want to begin applying the formatting. • Press Ctrl + B to make the text bold.

Select the text you want to change or place the insertion point where you want the font change take effect. Ms-Windows. Select the various formatting options under the respective tab 4. such as the copyright symbol. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual To make changes with the font dialogue box: 1. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 41 of 208 . Choose Font from the Format menu to open the font dialogue box 3. Stop when the text is the way you want it. used regularly in documents that aren’t on the standard keyboard. 2. So you can experiment with the available options and preview the results Changing Text to Uppercase and Lowercase To change the case of a text: • Select the text you want to change • Choose change case from the Format Menu to open the change case dialogue box shown below • Select the option you want and click on OK button Note: Select the text and then press Shift + F3 to cycle among the change case options.Introduction to Computers. ©. Inserting Special Symbols There are many symbols. Format selections are immediately reflected in the preview window of the dialogue box.

Every time you press the ENTER key while typing. 4. without typing the tab at the beginning of every paragraph using first line indent or you can also indent the entire paragraph using the standard indent.Introduction to Computers. To start a new line with out starting a new paragraph. Ms-Windows. And you can also indent the rest of the line except the first line called hanging indent. Click insert button. Choose Symbols from Insert menu 2. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual To insert symbols: 1. Choose a symbol from Symbol Font Sets shown in the character map on the symbol page or from the list on the special characters page 3. Paragraph Formatting In word paragraph is one of the basic units of a document. Setting indents using the ruler and the Toolbar First Line Indent Hanging Indent Increase Indent Left Indent Ruler Right Indent Decrease Indent Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 42 of 208 .2. you create a new paragraph. press Shift + Enter Paragraph Indention and Alignment Word has features that allow you to indent just the first line of each paragraph. Click Close 3.3.

To indent the entire paragraph from the right: • Drag the right indent marker that is found at the right side of the ruler Changing alignment By default. Word aligns or positions text left. To indent the entire paragraph from left: • Click the increase indent button on the Formatting toolbar. Or • Drag the left indent marker on the ruler (all the three indent marks will move together) To indent back to normal: • Click the decrease indent button on the formatting toolbar.e. i. expanding the spaces in each line to align text at both the left and right margins. Or • Drag the left indent marker to its original place To indent the first line (First line indent): • Drag the first line indent marker to a new position on the ruler. However you have the option of centering text. And drag it to the left to remove the first line indent. And drag it to the left to remove the hanging indent. aligning it along the right margin or justified. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual To use any indent: • Put the insertion point in the paragraph you want to indent or select multiple paragraphs. which indents with a standard measurement. Ms-Windows. To indent the rest of the line except the first line (hanging indent) • Drag the hanging indent marker to the new position on the ruler. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 43 of 208 .Introduction to Computers.

Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 44 of 208 . • To indent the entire paragraph. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual To align text: 1. Using the Paragraph dialog box: • Click the Paragraph you want to format or select multiple paragraphs • Choose Paragraph from the format menu. Click one of the paragraph alignment buttons on the formatting toolbar. • To indent only the first line choose First Line from the Special drop-down list and enter a measurement in the By box. to remove click it again.Introduction to Computers. Or select multiple paragraphs 2. Note: when you choose one of the alignment buttons it appears pressed in. Click anywhere in the paragraph you want to format. enter measurement in the left and/or right boxes to specify how far to indent the paragraph from the left or right margin. The following dialog box will be displayed. Ms-Windows.

word moves the text to the next page as soon as you get to the bottom margin. Choose Paragraph from the Format menu and select the Line and Page Break tab. It doesn’t care whether it’s breading a two-line paragraph or ripping a heading from its accompanying text. Note: as you select different options the preview box shows what the formatting will look like on the page Keeping text together As you are typing. Check or uncheck the appropriate option and click OK. The first.Introduction to Computers. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 45 of 208 . You can obtain the rest through the following procedure: 1. click the line spacing drop down list button and select any. 3. Click the Paragraph you want to format or select multiple paragraphs 2. choose one of the alignment options by clicking the alignment drop-down list. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual • To align text. Hard Page Breaks are inserted with a keystroke or by choosing Page Bread from the Break dialog box. • To change the measurement of the space in between the lines of the paragraph. But you can control this situation by four different features. • Specify the spacing before and after the paragraph in the spacing section by clicking the decrement and increment buttons inside the respective boxes. Ms-Windows.

The tab-stop settings can be changed by using the ruler or the tabs dialog box. Setting Tabs Using the Ruler 1. One of the most common uses of a tab is to indent the first line of a paragraph. optionally. Open the Tabs dialog box by choosing Format Tabs 2. Select an alignment style and. 2.Introduction to Computers. There are four basic types of tab stops: Left: the default type. Click the Tab button at the left end of the ruler to toggle through the four tab choices. 4. Click on the ruler to set the tab-stops 3. Type a decimal value in the Tabs Stop Position text box.4 to set several tab stops 6. pressing Tab between each column Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 46 of 208 . Repeat step 2 . Drag the Tab-stop marker on the ruler to change the tab position 4. Text lines up with the decimal point Tabs are also used to create parallel columns. Drag the tab-stop marker off the ruler to remove the tab stop Setting Tabs and Leaders Using the Tabs Dialog Box 1. a leader style. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Using Tabs Tab stops are markers set by default at half-inch intervals across the width of the document. a document. Enter text. vertically aligning text within. 3. Click OK 7. Pressing the tab key moves the cursor from one tab stop to the next. Text appears to the right of the tab stop Center: Text automatically appear to the left and the right of the tab stop until centered under the tab stop Right: text appears to the left of the tab stop Decimal: used for numeric entries. Click Set 5. Ms-Windows.

Select one of the bullets or numbers out of the preview boxes. Click the Numbering or Bullets button in the standard to remove the numbered list or bulleted list. Select the Bulleted or Numbered list. If you can not find bullets or numbers of your choice. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Bullets and Numbering To create a bulleted or numbered list: 1. Select the list 2. To create a custom Bullets and Numbers: 1. Click the Numbering or Bullets button to create a numbered or bulleted list from the Standard Toolbar To remove Bullets and Numbers: 1.Introduction to Computers. Select the different options from the dialog box that appears and click OK 5. Choose Bullets and Numbering from the Format menu to display bullets and numbering dialogue box 3. Select the list 2. Ms-Windows. Select the bulleted tab to apply bullets or the numbered tab to apply numbering 4. Click OK button of Bullets and Numbering dialog box Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 47 of 208 . select one of the preview boxes and click Customize. 2.

Ms-Windows. Indicate whether you would like the first page of the document to display a number 3. Choose alignment & Position of the page numbers.3 or a. The break dialog box will appear 3. Check the page break option. Click OK. b. word inserts automatic page break and starts anew page for the text that follows. Or use Keyboard shortcut as: • Press Ctrl + Enter key after placing the insertion point in the appropriate position Creating and Modifying Page Numbers To create page numbers: 1. Choose the Break command from the insert menu. Click Format to change the type of numbers (1. Page Formatting Page Breaks With word. Position the insertion point where you want the page break 2. to continue the numbering from the previous section. if not checked. 4. or to start at a number other than one.3. c). Choose OK button. you usually don’t have to worry about where to end a page. Choose Page Number from the Insert menu to open page number dialog box 2. To insert page break: 1.3. View page numbers in page layout view or print preview To Remove page numbers: Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 48 of 208 . Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 3.Introduction to Computers.2. But there are times when you may want to force a page to break at a certain place. As soon as you type more text than will fit on a page. Click OK again to set the page numbering 4.

To apply Boarders: 1. Select page number. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 1. (Select multiple paragraph) 2. Click the down arrow next to the Line Style button and select a style 4. Click to select a border option. 2. Click the Table and Boarders button on the standard toolbar to open the Table and Borders Toolbar 3. Ms-Windows. And press Backspace or delete key.Introduction to Computers. Click the down arrow next to the Boarders button to open the boarder’s palette 6. Choose Header and Footer from the View menu. color. 3. Place your insertion point in the paragraph you want to format. Using Table and Boarder Bar 1. Place the insertion point in the paragraph you want to add a boarder to or select Multiple paragraphs 2. Make any selections you want from the style. You can make boarders and shading by using the Table and Boarder Bar or Border and shading Dialog Box. Click the down arrow to the Line weight button and select a line thickness 5. Choose Boarder and shading from the format menu to open the Borders and shading dialog box as shown 3. Or double-click on the page number. and width lists Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 49 of 208 . As you move your mouse pointer over the different options. notice the ToolTip that tells you what the option does. Choose close Adding Boarders and Shading You can grab the reader’s attention by making boarders and shadings to the text of paragraphs.

Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 4. Use this option to get rid of existing boarder on selected text Selecting Box gives you a standard box that uses any Style. color and Width setting you select Selecting Shadow applies a shadow effect. Ms-Windows. (Works only for box with four boarders) Selecting Three-D gives you a 3-D effect Selecting Customs creates a box using the options you click in the preview diagram. Click on one of the settings button Selecting None gives you no boarder at all.Introduction to Computers. You can click the different buttons to mix and match various boarder options Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 50 of 208 .

• Choose a pattern from the style drop-down list.4. Table of Contents A table of contents lists headings in the order they appear in a document and the page numbers where the headings appear. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual To Apply Shading behind a paragraph: • Position your insertion point in the paragraph you want shade (or select multiple paragraphs) • Display Border and Shading dialog box and click on shading tab • Choose a fill amount or color from the Fill palette. Choose Index and tables tab. To compile a table of contents by using built in heading styles: • Position the insertion point where you want to create the table of contents. • Choose a color from the color list • Choose OK when you’ve made all your selections Note: To apply border and shading to a text. select the text you want to apply the formatting and follow the above procedure 3.Introduction to Computers. • From the Insert menu. • Select the Table of Contents tab from the Index and Tables dialog box • When you finish Choose OK Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 51 of 208 . Ms-Windows. A table of contents usually appears at the beginning of a document and can include several levels of headings.

Word changes the document view to page layout view and displays the header and footer toolbar. From the View menu. 3. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 3. choose the close button. 2. The insertion point is placed in the header area. A non-printing dashed line indicates the header and footer in the document. Ms-Windows. You can format header and footer just as you format any other text in your document. Double-click on the header or footer or from the view menu choose the Header and Footer command 2.5. choose Header and Footer 2. To return to the document work area. Choose OK Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 52 of 208 . Enter the text you want to print on top of every page. To create header or Footer: 1. Click the Page Setup button and select the Layout tab 3. Delete the contents of the header and footer area. To remove header or footer: 1. Click on the Switch between Header and Footer button to switch to the footer area.Introduction to Computers. 3. choose the Header and Footer command. Under Header and Footer section select the Different odd and Even check box 4. From the View menu. Headers and Footers A header or footer is piece of text that word repeats at the top of every page (header) or at the bottom of every page (footer) in an entire document. Click on Close button To create different Header and Footers for odd and even pages: 1.

Introduction to Computers. you don’t have to do any thing. Ms-Windows. Enter setting in the Top. To add this extra margin enter a measurement in the Gutter box 3. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Setting Page Margins: Word gives you wonderful margins of 1-inch at the top and bottom and 1. with the shorter side at left and right. From the Apply To list. The Portrait option means that the document will print down the page. Click Ok Setting the Paper size and Orientation: The paper size tab of the page Setup dialog box lets you set the size of paper on which the document will be printed and select the page orientation. You will see the page setup dialog box. The default paper size is A4. Check the preview box to make sure that the margins are the way you want them. Choose the Page Setup from the File menu and select the margins tab. If these defaults work for you.24inch on the left and right. Bottom. select the paper size you will be using for printing from the Paper Size drop down list. But if you want to change the margins. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 53 of 208 . Three of the tabs in this dialog box provide options for various page elements: Margins. select whole document or This point forward 4. If you plan to bind your document after printing. you can add an extra margin along one side of the page to allow for binding. with shorter side at the top and bottom. Left and Right text boxes. paper size and layout. 2. The Landscape option means that the document will print across the page. To set margins using the dialog box: 1. word lets you do it directly from the ruler or with precise measurements in a dialog box. From the box.

click Spelling & Grammar or click spelling button on the standard toolbar which display the spelling and grammar dialog box Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 54 of 208 . which contains most common words. and how the text is vertically aligned If the text in your document does not completely fill a page. Spelling and Grammar Checking Word checks your document for spelling errors by using its main dictionary. Ms-Windows. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual The Layout tab The Layout tab of the page setup dialog box controls how headers and footers are setup. you can set its vertical position on the page in the vertical alignment box: • The Top Setting starts the text at the top of the page • The center setting moves the text down so that it is centered as a block between the top and bottom margins • The Justified setting increases the space between the paragraphs so that the first line of text prints at the top margin and the last line prints at the bottom margin. 3.6. To check spelling and grammar: On the Tools menu.Introduction to Computers.

do one of the following: • Choose the Change button to accept the current selection in the suggestion box. (The wavy underline will disappear. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 55 of 208 . • Choose the Change All button on replace all instances of this misspelled word in the document • Choose Ignore to leave the word unchanged. For every word that is displayed in dictionary box. Ms-Windows.Introduction to Computers.) • Choose Ignore All to leave all occurrence of a wavy underlined word without changing it. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual If word finds a word that is not contained in any of the active dictionaries or any grammatical error. it displays the spelling and grammar dialog box (Spelling errors are typed in red while grammatical errors are typed in green in the dialog box) A list of suggested spellings or grammatical corrections automatically appears in the spelling and grammar dialog box. • Choose the Auto correct button to add the misspelled word and its correction to the Auto Correct list so that word will correct it automatically as you type.

The next time word encounter this word. then click Next Sentence to accept your manual changes and continue the spelling and grammar check • Choose the Add button to add the highlighted word in the Not in Dictionary to the custom dictionary. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual • Choose the Next Sentence to click in your document and manually edit the current sentence. Checking Spelling in a selection To check the spelling of a single word or range of text of text instead of the entire document: • Select the word or range of text • Click on the spelling and grammar button on the standard toolbar.Introduction to Computers. Ms-Windows. To choose the spelling and grammar command from the Tools menu. • Choose the options button to open the Spelling and Grammar option dialog box. it will not take it as an error. where you can open a different custom dictionary or change the rules that word uses to check spelling and Grammar. or if the word or selection contains no spelling or grammar mistake. word displays a dialog box which ask you whether you want to continue checking the remaining document or not • Choose the Yes button to continue the spell check for the rest of the document • Choose the No button to return to the document Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 56 of 208 . • If the word or selection contains any spelling mistakes. Word continues searching for spelling mistakes for the rest of the document. Word opens the spelling and grammar dialog box and allows you to make corrections. • On completion of the spell check. and displays a massage box on completion • Choose the OK button to return to the document.

5. To look up words in Thesaurus: 1.Introduction to Computers. The intersection between rows and columns is called Cell. you may also find antonyms (word with opposite meaning) related words. Click on words in the meaning column the best represent your context to see synonyms for them. Tables With tables you can arrange columns of numbers and text in a document without using tabs. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Using the Thesaurus Command You can use the Thesaurus to improve the precession and variety of your writing. To review previously looked up words. Click on the word you want to look up and choose Tools →Language→ Thesaurus to open the thesaurus dialog box 2.1.7. For some words.7. The cell expands vertically to fit the amount of text you type. 4. Ms-Windows. A table is made up of rows and columns. You can fill cells with text or even graphics. select from the drop-down list under Looked Up. You can quickly find synonyms (word with the same meaning) for a selected word or phrase. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 57 of 208 . Within each cell. text wraps just as it does between the margins of documents. Double-click on terms to look up those words 3. Tables and Columns 3. Double-click to get a list of words that have the same or similar meaning. Enter a new word to look up in the Replace with synonym text box. 3.

Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Creating Tables To create a table using the Insert Table command: 1. The insert table dialog box will appear. Ms-Windows.Introduction to Computers. Or use the cursor control keys (Arrow keys and Tab) To select a text inside a cell: Drag over the text Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 58 of 208 . And click OK To create a table using the standard toolbar: Click the Insert Table button on the standard toolbar and drag over the grid until you have selected the number of rows and columns you wanted to create and release the mouse button. To move around in a table: Click in the cell you want to move to. Click the Insert Table command from the Table menu. 3. Position the insertion point where you want to create a table 2. And specify the exact measurements for the width of columns in Column Width box. Specify the number of columns and rows in the respective boxes. Row and Column Within a cell you can move the insertion point and select text just as you do in the rest of your document. Moving and Selecting a Cell.

The insert cells dialog box appears. 3. Select Column. the I-Beam will be changed to a right pointing arrow) To select a column: • Click the column’s top gridline or border. Select one of the options. row or column. Ms-Windows. To select multiple cells. and then click the OK button Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 59 of 208 . row or column and hold down Shift key. Or Select Table command from the Table menu Inserting and Deleting Cells. NOTE: you can select rows. or select a single cell. columns or the entire by positioning the insertion point in the table and choosing Select Row. Rows or Columns To add a cell to a table: 1. rows or columns: • Drag across the cell.Introduction to Computers. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual To select a row: Click the row selection bar (to the left of the row. Choose the Insert Cells command from the Table menu. Notice that the pointer becomes a thick a thick down-arrow. Select a cell or cells above which you want to insert the new cells 2.

To delete cells: 1. rows or columns. as you would do else where in a document. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual To add a row(s) to a table: 1. row or column. position the inserting point in the last cell of the last row and press Tab key. 2. Select the row(s) above which you want to insert the new row(s) 2. To add column(s) to a table: 1. Rows and Columns You can delete just the text in cells. Or click the Cut button from the standard toolbar Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 60 of 208 . Select the column(s) to the left of which you want to add the new column(s) 2. Select the row(s) or column(s) you want to delete 2. or you can remove the cell. and then press Enter. just select and delete it. From the table menu. row or column. and click OK To delete rows or columns: 1.Introduction to Computers. Or to add a row at the end of the table. The delete cells dialog box appears 3. Ms-Windows. Select the cell(s) you want to delete. Choose one of the options. or from Tables and Borders toolbar Deleting Cells. Choose the Delete Cells command from Table menu. Choose Insert Columns command from Tables menu. position the insertion point outside the table at the end of a row. To delete a text in a cell. Choose the Insert Rows command from the Table menu or the Tables and Borders toolbar Note: to add a single row to a table. choose Delete Rows or Delete Columns.

When you position the mouse pointer to column/row boundary. Merging and Splitting Cells and Columns To merge (join a number of cells in to one) cells in the table: 1. From the Table menu. To copy the selection hold down Ctrl key while you drag the selection. Select the cell(s) you want to split 2. the pointer will be changed to a bi-directional arrow. Ms-Windows. choose Split Cells. You can also specify exact column width or row height by using the Cell Height and Width dialog box. To do so: 1. Position the mouse pointer over the selection 3. Cells from Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 61 of 208 . Or click Split the Tables and Border toolbar 3. Or click Merge Cells button from the Tables and Border toolbar To split (divide) cells: 1. From the Table menu choose Merge Cells. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual You can move or copy cells. Enter the number of row and column you want to split the selected cell(s) and choose OK Changing Column Width and Row Height You can change the width of selected cells and entire column/row you want by dragging the table column markers on the ruler or by dragging the column/row boundaries. To move the selection drag it to the new location when the arrow pointer slants to the left 4. rows or columns in a table. Select the cells you want to merge 2. rows or columns you want to copy or move 2.Introduction to Computers. Select the cells.

Ms-Windows. Select the Rows tab. Choose the Cell Height and Width command from the Table menu. Click OK Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 62 of 208 . Select the Column tab. Select the column. if not selected 4.Introduction to Computers. Select the row(s) whose Height you want to change 2. The cell Height and width dialog box appears 3. Specify a value in the Width of Column box 5. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual To change the Column Width 1. Choose the various options in the dialog box 5. Click OK To change the row height: 1. Choose the Cell Height and Width command from the Table menu. if not selected 4. or columns whose width you want to change 2. Specify a value in the Space Between Columns Box 6. The cell Height and width dialog box appears 3.

or Date and then select the Ascending or Descending option 5. field number. To use additional columns as a basis for sorting. The Table Autoformat dialog box appears 2. Under Type. To sort a table: Select the rows you want to sort 1. From the Table menu. Word changes the order of rows based on the first column unless you specify a different column as the basis of sorting. Choose the Table Autoformat command from the Table menu. creating column headings and adding borders and shading.Introduction to Computers. Choose OK Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 63 of 208 . select Number or Text. Ms-Windows. If you have a heading that you do not want to sort. Under My List has section 3. You format text within cells as in the rest of the document. choose Sort command. Under sort by select column number. The sort dialog box appears 2. repeat step 4 and 5 6. Click the OK button Sorting a Table You can arrange entries of a table in alphabetical or numeric border. aligning the text. The best way to format a table is to allow Word automatically format the table. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Formatting Tables You can improve the readability of a table by formatting the text in the table. Select the available format from the format list. or you can sort by date. select the Header Row option. To do so: Select the entire table or just place the insertion point in the table 1. The preview window displays a sample table of the selected format 3. paragraph or name 4.

Switch your view to page layout view by clicking its button on the horizontal scroll bar and do one of the following: If you want to format the entire document.2. You can also vary the number of columns in a document or on a page. Under insert section select Column Break and choose OK Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 64 of 208 . Columns can be of equal or unequal width. Ms-Windows. switch to page layout view or print preview. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual To Calculating a Value in a Table 1. Position the insertion point where you want to start the new column 3. Go to Table Menu and Click on Formula 3. From insert menu choose Break. Controlling Column Breaks A column break is the point in the text where one column ends and the nest begins. To see multiple columns on screen. click any where in the document. Click the cell in which you want the result to appear 2. Click the Paste Function list arrow and then select a function 3.Introduction to Computers. To insert a column break: 1. select part of the document 2. if you want to format part of the document in to columns. Form Format menu choose Columns.7. Click the page layout view button 2. To display the Break dialog box 4. To create Columns: 1. but you can insert column breaks where you want one column to end and the next column to start. Columns You can change the way a document looks by creating newspaper style columns. Word automatically distributes columns on pages.

Ms-Windows. Click OK Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 65 of 208 .3.7. Choose Drop Cap from Format menu. Drop Cap You can format a paragraph to have a large initial or dropped capital letter or a large first word To put a Drop Cap: 1. Select any other options you want 5.Introduction to Computers. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 3. the Drop Cap dialog box appears: 3. Select the paragraph that you want to begin with an initial or dropped capital letter 2. Click Dropped or In Margin 4.

Click on the Insert button. Word places the image you selected in your document. you can split it into two windows that you view simultaneously but edit and scroll through independently.8. If you need to compare two documents. Click to select the graphic you want. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 3. Select Clip Art tab. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 66 of 208 . You can view each document in its own window or all open documents in horizontally tiled windows. you can view them side by side and scroll through them at the same time. Click on category name in the left column to display the pictures for that category.7. Graphics and Text Boxes Word makes it easy to bring electronic images called Clip into your document by using the clip gallery. 3. This opens Microsoft Clip Art Gallery. Notice the little boxes around the picture. they are called handles and they appear whenever an image is selected. To view different parts of a document (convenient for summarizing a long report).4. Ms-Windows. Working with Multiple Documents Multiple open documents are handy if you want to refer to an old report or copy parts of one letter into another.Introduction to Computers. Click anywhere outside the picture. The handles disappear. To insert an image from the clip gallery: Position the insertion point where you want the picture Choose Picture from the Insert menu and Clip Art from picture menu. and the picture is part of your document.

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual

Switch between Documents
• •

Click the Word Document button on the taskbar you want to display. Click the Window menu, and then click the document on which you want to work.

Arrange Multiple Document Windows
• •

Arrange All to fit all open windows on the screen. Compare Side By Side With ..., click a document, and then click OK to tile two windows and scroll through both documents at the same time.

3.9. Inserting AutoText
1. 2. 3. 4. Position the insertion point where you want the AutoText to be inserted. Click the Insert menu' and then point to AutoText. Point to a category, and then click an entry. To see additional choices or add your own entries, click the Insert menu' point to AutoText' and then click AutoText. 5. To add an entry to the menu, type an entry in the Enter AutoText Entries Here box, and then click Add. 6. Scroll down the list to find the AutoText entry you want to make, and then click Insert.

3.10. Insert Files
1. Click the place in your document where you want to insert the file. 2. Click the Insert menu' and then click File. 3. Click the Look In list arrow to find the file to insert. 4. Select the file, and then click Insert.

Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544

JUCAVM
67 of 208

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual

3.11. Use AutoRecover
1. Click the Tools menu, and then click Options. 2. Click the Save tab. 3. Select the Save AutoRecover Info Every check box. 4. Enter the number of minutes, or click the up and down arrows to adjust the minutes. 5. Click OK.

3.12. Finding and Replacing Formatting
Suddenly you realize all the bold text in your report would be easier to read in italics. Do you spend time making these changes one by one? No. The Find and Replace feature locates the formatting and instantly substitutes new formatting. If your search for a formatting change is an easy one, click Less in the Find And Replace dialog box to decrease the size of the dialog box. If your search is a more complex one, click More to display additional options. With the Match Case option, you can specify exact capitalization. The Go To tab quickly moves you to a place or item in your document. Find Text or Formatting 1. Click the Edit menu, and then click Find. 2. If you want to locate formated text, type the word or words. 3. Click More, click Format, and then click the formatting you want to find. When you're done, click OK. 4. Click Find Next to select the next instance of the formatted text. 5. Click OK to confirm Word finished the search. 6. Click Cancel.
Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM
68 of 208

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual

Find an Item or Location 1. Click the Edit menu, and then click Go To. 2. Click an item in the Go To What box. 3. Enter the item number or name. 4. Click Next, Previous, or Go To to locate the item. 5. When you're done, click Close. Replace Text or Formatting 1. Click the Edit menu, and then click Replace. 2. If you want to locate formatted text, type the word or words. 3. Click the More button, click Format, and then click the formatting you want to find. When you're done, click OK. 4. Press Tab, and then type any text you want to substitute. 5. Click Format, and then click the formatting you want to substitute. When you're done, click OK.

3.13. Adding a Watermark
You can use a washed out version of your company logo, or you can add text such as SAMPLE, DRAFT, PROPOSAL, or CONFIDENTIAL. Watermarks are useful for making your documents look more professional. If you decide to change your watermark, it's as easy as typing in some new text.

Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544

JUCAVM
69 of 208

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual

Create a Watermark from a Picture 1. Click the Format menu, point to Background, and then click Printed Watermark. 2. Click the Picture Watermark option. 3. Click the Select Picture button. 4. Navigate to the picture you want to select and insert, and then click Insert. 5. Select any Scale or Washout options, and then click Apply. 6. Click Close. Create a Watermark from Text 1. Click the Format menu, point to Background, and then click Printed Watermark. 2. Click the Text Watermark option. 3. Select the Text options you wish to apply. 4. Click Apply and click close

3.14. Creating Footnotes or Endnotes
Footnotes are used to provide additional information that is inappropriate for the body of the text, and to document your references for information or quotes presented in the body of the document. Footnotes are appropriate for academic, scientific, and, occasionally, business purposes. Footnotes appear at the bottom of the page on which the information is cited, and Word automatically inserts a reference mark at the insertion point to associate the information presented with the note at the bottom of the page.

Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544

JUCAVM
70 of 208

n 8.15. Verify that the Number Format option of 1. 7. 5. phrase or section you can use bookmarks. 4. Create a Footnote or Endnote 1. Bookmarks are used to mark text so that you. Click the Footnotes option or the Endnotes option. not the bottom of the page on which the reference mark appears. 6. Word moves the insertion point to the bottom of the page corresponding to the number of the reference mark.2. You can also navigate documents with bookmarks by selecting a bookmark as a destination in the Go To dialog box. 9. 3. Endnotes differ from footnotes in that they appear at the end of the document or section (in the case of longer documents). can return to it quickly. and then select the location where you want to place the footnote or endnote. 2. Click Insert to insert a reference mark in the text. Creating a Bookmark Instead of scrolling through a long document to find a specific word. Click Close.Introduction to Computers. Click the list arrow next to the Footnotes or Endnotes option. Click the Insert menu' point to Reference' and then click Footnote. or your reader. Using bookmarks as a destination lets you navigate through a long document quickly. 3. Position the insertion point where you want to insert a footnote. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 71 of 208 .3… is selected. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Creating and manipulating endnotes is identical to performing the same functions for footnotes. Type the text of your footnote or endnote. Ms-Windows. Click inside the body of the document to reposition the insertion point at the desired location to continue with your work.

choose another bookmark. and then click Bookmark. Word looks for text with the Style code that you specify (Figure. etc. not the written content. If you want. Ms-Windows. On the Go To tab. Click the Enter Bookmark Name list arrow. Go to a Bookmark Location 1.Introduction to Computers. Creating a Table of Figures If you are creating a document in which there are many illustrations (art. 2. Type a one word descriptive name for your Bookmark. A Table of Figures is like a Table of Contents except that it deals only with the graphic content of a document. and then select the bookmark you want to move to. Table. 5. 3.16. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Create a Bookmark 1. To create the Table of Figures. click Bookmark. Click in your document where you want to insert a Bookmark. 6. diagrams etc. charts. 3. 4.). 3.). Click Add. 4. Click Close. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 72 of 208 . it is often helpful to the reader of your document to provide a Table of Figures. Click the Insert menu. 2. You can also add a tab leader to make the table easier to read. photographs. Click the Edit menu. Click Go To. and then click Go To.

4. Put your cursor where you want the Table of Figures to appear.dot template (Heading 1. and then select the tab leader you want to use. 5. such as those that appear in the Normal . and then click Close. Numbering Heading Styles If you use the pre-defined heading styles provided by Word. Some examples of the proper times to use numbered headings include legal documents. Consult the Formatting and Styles guide of the institution you are preparing the document for to determine whether this formatting is preferred. Ms-Windows. select the text formatting that you want Word to search for when building the Table of Figures. you can also optionally number headings with a format of your choosing. 2. scientific or other academic papers. All figure callouts of the selected style are tagged for inclusion in the Table of Figures. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 73 of 208 . 3. Click the Style list arrow. 3. Heading 3). and then select the format you want to use for the Table of Figures. 8. Heading 2.Introduction to Computers. Click the Formats list arrow. 6. Click the Tab Leader list arrow. Click OK. Click the Table Of Figures tab. click Options. or the Table style. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Create a Table of Figures 1.17. and so forth. If you want to create a Table of Figures from something other than the default Figure style. Click the Insert menu' point to Reference' and then click Index And Tables. 7.

"Heading 2". Apply Numbering to Custom Heading Styles 4. 3. and then click Customize. and then click OK.Introduction to Computers. and so on. 10. and then click OK. and then press Enter. Click More to expand the Customize Outline Numbered List dialog box. Click the Format menu' and then click Bullets And Numbering. Repeat Steps 6-8 for each custom heading style that you want to number. 7. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Create a Numbered Heading Using Styles 1. Ms-Windows. Click the Font button. and then select the heading style that you want. "Heading 2". Click the heading level you want to number. Click the Outline Numbered tab. and then select the name of the custom style of text that you want to use for the level of numbering that you selected in Step 6. and then click OK. Click the Format menu' and then click Bullets And Numbering. Click a numbering format that contains the text "Heading 1". Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 74 of 208 . and so on. Click the Link Level To Style list arrow. 8. 5. 2. 6. 3. Type the text of the heading. 6. 9. 5. Click a numbering format that contains the text "Heading 1". In your document. 11. 4. position the cursor where you want to place the numbered heading. Click the Outline Numbered tab. 12. format the selected heading level number. Select the text in which you want to apply a style. Click the Styles and Formatting button on the Formatting toolbar.18.

6. Click the Edit menu' and then click Select All. so you must use the Equation Editor.Introduction to Computers. The standard keyboard does not have all of the mathematical symbols you might need to create the equation. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 75 of 208 . Other types of documents that sometimes use this convention are movie and television scripts. Click the File menu' and then click Page Setup. and then select the options you want. You can have Word automatically number each line of text within a document. Click OK. 4. and then click Selections. Number Each Line in a Document 1. Click the Add Line Numbering check box to select it. 8. 12. you may need to display them in the text without actually using them in conjunction with a table. Ms-Windows. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 12. Creating an Equation If you are creating a scientific or academic paper that involves complex equations. 2. 7. 3. 5. click the Apply To list arrow.2. Click OK.1. Numbering Lines Many legal documents use the formatting convention of numbering every line of text to make it easier for multiple parties to refer to very specific text in a longer document in the context of their discussions. If you're adding line numbers to part of a document. Click Line Numbers. Click the View menu' and then click Print Layout.

Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 76 of 208 . 4. 6.3. Creating Mail Merge Documents Mail merge is used to send the same letter to several people and spend a lot of time changing personal information. Click the Insert menu' and then click Object. Click Next: Select Recipients on the task pane to display Step 3 of 6. 3. Press Enter to show the equation and return to your document. 2. such as names and addresses? Start the Mail Merge Wizard 1. 12. Click the Tools menu' point to Letters And Mailings' and then click Mail Merge. 4. In the Object type box. and then click OK. Select the type of document you are working on (in this case the Letters option). 2. and then by typing variables and numbers. click Microsoft Equation 3. displaying Step 1 of 6 in the Mail Merge Wizard.0.Introduction to Computers. 5. Click Next: Starting Document on the task pane to display Step 2 of 6. 3. The Mail Merge task pane opens. Build the equation by selecting symbols from the Equation toolbar. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Create an Equation 1. Ms-Windows. Click a starting document option (such as Use The Current Document).

4. Type your comment in the balloon. Creating Documents Using Automatic Formatting Word can automatically perform some formatting functions for you as you type a document.5. Click the Insert menu' and then click Comment or click the Insert Comment button on the Reviewing toolbar. Ms-Windows. Click the AutoFormat As You Type tab 4. 3. Set Up Automatic Formatting 1. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 12. and then click outside the balloon to save it Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 77 of 208 . Click OK. Position the insertion pointer where you want to insert a comment. Select or clear the AutoFormat check boxes you want to use 5. 2.4. Click the AutoFormat As You Type tab. 1. 12. Inserting Comments Comments are useful when someone who is editing the document has queries pertaining to the document. 3.Introduction to Computers. Click the Tools menu' and then click AutoCorrect Options 2. Click the View menu' point to Toolbars' and then click Reviewing.

To preview a document before printing: On the standard toolbar. over the grid to select the number and configuration of pages to display two or more pages at a time. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 78 of 208 . 1. and click the mouse button to view a magnified area of the document. Click the Multiple Page button. and select a magnification type or percentage to enlarge or reduce the page(s) displayed. click the Print Preview button. and then drag. Ms-Windows. choose the Print Preview command. either online or in print. Position the insertion point where you want to insert a form field. Move the mouse pointer to the location you want to view. it is good to make sure that it will be printed the way you want it.6. Printing Before printing a document. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 12. Or from the file menu. and gain information and feedback from them in the process.7. and then displays one or more pages. including the page that contains the insertion point. Word changes from current view to print preview. Click the Down Arrow next to the Zoom Control box. as it will look when printed. Click the One Page button on the print preview toolbar to display one page at a time. Use Print Preview to display a document. Click the View menu' point to Toolbars' and then click Forms. Use the Forms toolbar to insert form fields. Creating a Form Forms are an easy way for you to interact with users of your documents. 2.Introduction to Computers. 3. 12.

7.1. Editing Text in Print Preview 1. Click the magnifier button to restore the insertion point and then edit the document. Ms-Windows. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Click the Full Screen button to hide all screen elements except the displayed page. To Print a Document: Click the print button in any view. then word prints one copy of the document Setting Printing Options 1.7.Introduction to Computers.2. click the magnifier button. and then click the document To exit print preview. click the Full Screen button again or press Esc. To return the hidden elements to the screen. and return to the previous view of the document. In print preview display the page you want to edit 2. click the Close button 12. You can specify printing options such as number of pages or number of copies you want to print in the print dialog box. Do one of the following: To return to the original magnification. 12. Move the mouse pointer to the location you want to edit and then click the left mouse button 3. To set printing options: Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 79 of 208 .

Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 2. you can move right ahead to printing. Ms-Windows. 4. To print a number of copies: Type or adjust the number of copies you want to print.Introduction to Computers. 5.9 means print pages 5 and 9 5. you have to make a selection. If there is no printer listed or you want to choose a different printer. From the file menu. If the name in the Name box is the printer you actually have and want to print to. For example. choose the print command to display the print dialog box as shown bellow. Check Pages option to print any range of pages. 3. To choose page range: Check All option to print the entire document Check Current Page option to print the current page (the page the insertion point is found) Check Selection option to print only selected part of the document. Click on the drop-down list button next to the name field and select the desired printer. in the Number of Copies box Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 80 of 208 .

Getting Start Excel To start MS-Excel Click on the start button then click on Microsoft Excel from the program submenu. Data Entry The worksheet is divided horizontally into rows and vertically into columns. By default Excel opens with a workbook of three sheers.2.1. is indicated by the tab in bold at the bottom of the worksheet. as in the figure opposite.for creating charts. The sheet currently in use is known as the Active Sheer.for calculating. Ms-Windows. Components of the workspace Workbook A workbook is the file Excel uses to store your data. a powerful application for handling data.2.Introduction to Computers. Each cell is referenced individually by a column letter and row number. A workbook named book1 is displayed and is ready for input 4. Switching between sheets If you wish to make a different sheet active simply click on its tab. charting and database application. A spreadsheet is rather like an electronic ledger. The workbook consists of worksheets. mostly numerical data. which provides a method by which data can be analyzed and used in complex calculations.1. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 81 of 208 . However. and charting sheets. Worksheets A workbook may contain a single sheet or as many sheets as necessary. which together create a cell address or references. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Chapter 4: Introduction to Microsoft Excel Excel is spreadsheet. Excel’s prime function is as a spreadsheet. The intersection of each row and column makes a box called Cell and it is into the cells that you type your data. 4. 4.

Ms-Windows. you can make changes by clicking on the cell and editing in the Formula Bar. right. Keystrokes to move the cell pointer Keys PgDn PgUP Home Ctr1+ Home To Move Down one Screen Up one screen To column A in the current row To cell A1 JUCAVM 82 of 208 Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 . called the Active Cell On top of the window in an area called the Formula Bar Editing Data Once data has been entered into a cell. Clicking on (X) in the formula bar makes the active cell blank. The table below shows other frequently used keyboard commands. .Introduction to Computers. When you begin to type the data you are entering will appear in two places: In the cell it self. text. You will find it easier to edit using the formula bar tether than editing in the cell it self. numbers. You can also make cells blank if you wish. It is also necessary to start with the first cell. When you have finished typing either click on ( ). up.g. Using the Backspace or Delete ( ) key will remove the entire contents of a selected cell. or. Moving the Cell pointer To move the pointer one cell to the left. Data can be entered into a cell on the worksheet. You can type any kind of data in a cell e. use the keyboard arrow days. the Backspace or Delete enables you to make changes in the content of the cell. or down. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual To enter data in a cell move the pointer to the preferred cell and then click on the mouse button. if the pointer is in the formula bar.

click the up or down arrow at the ends of the vertical scroll bar.Introduction to Computers. Type the new name then click anywhere on the worksheet. then select the Rename command from the shortcut menu displayed and type the new mane Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 83 of 208 . Ms-Windows. To de-select just click anywhere in the window. Working with a Worksheet To rename a worksheet: 1.2. use the scroll bars. 4. Use the arrows at the either end of horizontal scroll bar to scroll one column to the left or right.2. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual To activate a cell with a mouse. If you want to see other areas of the worksheet. simply click the cell. Choose the Rename command from the Formant menu the sheet command. To select all in the worksheet click on the select All box. Select the worksheet 2. To scroll up or down on row. Or Right –Click being on the worksheet name. Selecting Data You can select data in excel cells in various ways: To select an entire column or Row: Click on the column or row letter To copy adjacent columns or rows: • Hold down the mouse button and drag the pointer across the column the columns and rows To select Non contiguous rows or Columns: • Hold down the ctrl key and click on each column or row or cells in the columns and rows Block of cells can be selected by clicking on the top left cell and dragging diagonally to the bottom right hand cell.

After you apply this command the worksheet will not be visible.2. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual You can also make the worksheet non-visible by using the Hide command To hide the worksheet: 1. Select the background file by opening the appropriate folder or drive from the sheet background dialog box 3. Ms-Windows. Choose the unhide command from the format menu then sheet command 2. To display the hidden worksheet (unhide the worksheet): 1. Select the worksheet 2. Click on OK button To change the background of the worksheet: Select the worksheet 1.Introduction to Computers. From the edit menu select the delete sheet command 4.3. Choose the hide command from the format menu then sheet command. Choose the background command from the format menu then sheet command 2. Exiting Excel Choose exit from the file menu or Click on windows close button Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 84 of 208 . Activate the worksheet 2. Click on OK To delete a worksheet: 1. Select the worksheet you want to unhide from the unhide dialog box 3.

18. 95.3. 2. Mar.5. Wed. Series Microsoft Excel can create a variety of series such as sequential numbers. Example: 9:00 ⇒. 2. • Time: A time series can include increments of days. 5…. 7. Microsoft Excel multiplies values by a constant factor. ⇒ 90. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 4. 11:00. Types of series You can create several types of series in Microsoft excel. 9… 100.3. ⇒ Tue. 80 • Growth: when you create growth series. product2.8. 4. ⇒ 5. Th. Example: product 1.54 • Auto File: This extends several types of data. 3.1.Introduction to Computers.3. 1st period. For example. 1. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 85 of 208 . to include 4. Apr… • Linear: When you create a linear series. The Auto Fill feature logically repeats same series. The methods used to create a series are the FILL HANDLE on a cell or range selection. ⇒3. Ms-Windows.6… and so on. 4. you can extend a series such as 1. Example: 2 (step value2) 4. 3rd period. 2nd period. Microsoft excel increases or decreases values by constant value. Jan ⇒ Feb. and the fill series command on the edit menu.16 2 (step value 3) 6. 85. product3. Example: 1. weeks. 12:00… Mon. sates and mixed text. or months.

select the column option under Series In. drag the Fill Handle to the right • To extend the selection into the adjacent cells below. This changes as you drag the Fill Handle.Introduction to Computers. select the row option under Series In. the Fill Series dialog box appears: • If you want the series to be in a row. • Under Type.3. • From the edit menu. Ms-Windows. Leave the range selected • To extend the selection into the adjacent cells to the right.2. choose Fill Series. while the series command is better suited for creating very large series or for specifying a stop value. Creating a Series The fill handle can create most types of series that the series command on the edit menu can create. enter a starting value. If you want the series to be in a column. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 4. To create a series by dragging: • Select a range of two cells and enter the first tow values for the series. The primary difference between the two is that the Fill Handle is more direct and more interactive that. To create the series with the series command: • In the first cell where your want to start the series. select a series type. • Select the cells in the row or column in which you want to extend the series. • You can see the current value in the series in the reference area of the formula bar. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 86 of 208 . drag the Fill handle down. starting at the cell in which you entered the starting value of the series.

Microsoft Excel moves the cells content the cell format and any notes attached to the cell. type that value in the stop value box. To move and replace cells by dragging: • Select the cell or cells you want to move • Position the mouse pointer over the border. or to any other application that can read data from the clipboard.3.3. If you copy cells. As in Microsoft word you have two methods to copy or move any screen element i. Otherwise. Microsoft Excel automatically adjust relative cell references to the moved cells so your formulas still work. You can move or copy cells to different part of the same worksheet. Drag & Drop and Cut/Copy-paste method. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual • In the Step value box type the increment. decrement. you can copy cells containing notes and formats. Moving Cells Moving cells is like physically cutting out the cells and transferring them to a new location either on the same worksheet or on different worksheet. Moving and Copying Data and Formats With Microsoft excel. When move cells. to another worksheet. Ms-Windows.e. Microsoft Excel extends the series until it fills the entire selection • Choose the OK button 4. or growth factor you want to use. the mouse pointer changes to an arrow Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 87 of 208 . the original cells are not affected. If you move cells. • If you want Microsoft Excel to stop extending the series when it reaches a certain value.Introduction to Computers.

• Release the mouse button. The Selection moves to cells around by the border. choose paste. To move and replace cells with Cut and paste command: • Select the cell or cells you want to move • From the Edit menu Choose Cut. the mouse pointer changes to an arrow • Hold down shift and drag the border to the row or column grid line where you want to insert data.Introduction to Computers. Microsoft Excel copies. deleting the cells in the paste are. Ms-Windows. To move and insert cells between existing cells by dragging: • Select the cell or cells you want to move • Position the mouse pointer over the border. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 88 of 208 . Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual • Hold down Shift and drag the border to the row or column grid line where you want to Insert data. • From the Edit menu or standard toolbar. • Release the mouse button. The selection is inserted between the cells bordering of the row or column grid line. When you copy cells. • Select the upper left cell of the paste area you want to move the data to or select the entire paste area. Copying Cells Copying cells duplicate the cells and paste them into another location. the cells content. the cell formats and any notes attached to the cell.

Microsoft Excel displays a dialog boxes so that you can chose which way you want to shift the original cells. • Select the upper left cell in the range where you want to insert the copied cells. • Position the mouse pointer over the border. Ms-Windows. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 89 of 208 . To insert copied cells between existing cells with insert command: Select the cell or cells you want to copy • Click the copy tool. • From the Insert menu or shortcut menu choose copied cells.Introduction to Computers. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual To copy and replace cell by dragging: • Select the cell or cells you want to copy. or choose copy from the Edit menu or the shortcut menu. Release the mouse button Note: To copy and inset cells between existing cells follow the above procedure but instead of pressing only ctrl Key press Ctrl + Shift key. the pointer changes to an arrow. • To shift the cells in the past area right. select the shift Right option button • Choose OK button. • Hold down Ctrl and drag the selection to where you want to copy the selection. • Position the border so that is surrounding the paste area you want t.

4. Columns and Rows You can insert blank cells. Clearing and Deleting Clearing a cell clears the contents. From the insert menu or short cut menu choose row or column To insert cells: 1. Select the same size of rows or columns equal to the number of rows or columns you want to insert 2. Release the mouse button. Select the same size of cells as the range of blank cells you want to insert 2. or blank rows and columns To insert a row. But deleting a cell completely removes the cell and its contents from the worksheet and moves adjacent cells to close-up the space that was occupied by the deleted cells Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 90 of 208 . press Shift and drag the Fill Handle and select the number of rows or columns you want to insert 4. To insert an entire row or column by using the insert command: 1.1. or range by dragging: 1.2.Introduction to Computers. Select the entire row or column by clicking the row or column heading 2. Editing a Worksheet 4. Choose the OK button 4. Select the shift cells right or down option to shift the other cells in the worksheet to accommodate the inserted cells 4. Inserting Cells. comments. column. Ms-Windows.4.4. From the insert menu or from the shortcut menu choose Cells 3. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 4. position the mouse pointer over the Fill Handle 3. or formats from that cell but leaves the cleared cell in the structure of the worksheet.

To search forward from the active cell choose the Find Next button. formats or comments: 1. Release the mouse button 4. To search the entire worksheet. To clear formats. or comments. formats. select the appropriate options from the sub-menu or choose clear contents from the shortcut menu. Drag across the range of cells you want to erase 2.4. From the Edit menu select Find command 3. To limit the search. Position the mouse pointer over the Fill Handle 3. contents. From the Edit (or shortcut) menu choose clear 3. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual To clear cell contents. Select the cells you want to delete. Repeat step 5 until all occurrences of what you specified are found 6. column or rang by dragging: 1.Introduction to Computers. Drag the Fill Handle across the rows or columns you want to erase 3. To search backward hold down shift key and choose the Find Next command 5. select the cell range you want to search 2. Find and Replace To find cells containing specific data: 1. End your work with the close button Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 91 of 208 . Select the cell(s) you want to clear 2.3. Select the options you want 4. Release the mouse button To delete a row. 2. Press Shift and Drag the Fill Handle across the rows or columns you want to delete 4. select a single cell. To erase a range of cells by dragging: 1. Ms-Windows.

1. Click OK Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 92 of 208 . To change the appearance of data using Cells command: 1. From the Format menu or shortcut menu. From the Edit menu select Replace command 3. Ms-Windows. Formatting a Worksheet 4.5. Select the options you want 6. Click Close button 4. To limit the search. or to make your worksheet easier to read. In the Replace What box type the data that will replace what you specified Find What box 5. To replace data in the active cell and fond the next occurrence. You can format the appearance of data with tools on the format toolbar. 3. To search the entire worksheet.Introduction to Computers. choose Cells. Select the cells you want to format 2. To replace all occurrences of the data. Formatting the Appearance of Data To add emphasis to your data. In the Find What box type the content you want to find and replace 4. select the cell range you want to search 2.5. Choose Replace all 7. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual To Find and Replace data: 1. or with the Cells command on the Format menu or shortcut menu. select a single cell. Select the Font tab under Format Cells 4. The format cells dialog box will appear. size and so on from the list 5. Select the font styles. choose the replace button. you can use the formatting features of Excel. You can format worksheet cells before or after you enter the data.

5. Click the Alignment tab from cell Format dialog box 3. or bottom of a cell. From the format cells dialog box. select the type of entry you want to format 5. or you can use one of the built in formats. select the Number tab 4. Click OK 4. To assign a number. and time formats. Click OK 4. You can use one of the built-in formats. Ms-Windows. Select the cell or range you want to format 2. Aligning Worksheet Data You can format cell entries and text box so that the data is aligned or rotated the way you want. Select the cell(s) you want to format Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 93 of 208 . Select the cell(s) you want to format 2. From the format menu.2. top. Formatting Borders and Shading You can shade cells or put a border around them.3. In the category box. Select the desired option 4. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Formatting Data with Numbers Microsoft Excel includes variety of number. choose Cells 3. date or time format: 1. You can draw any combination of horizontal and vertical lines on the left. or you can create your own. right. You can also create double underlines and column lines. dates. To align text and numbers with the alignment tools: 1. To add borders or shading: 1.Introduction to Computers.5. Select the desired number format 6.

Choose options you want 4. type the column width you want 3. Select the cell(s) you want to format 2.Introduction to Computers. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 2. Ms-Windows. Select the entire column. Click OK To adjust row height to the best fit: Double click the line below the row heading. double click the line to the right of the column heading. then from the format menu choose Column width 2. If more than one column changes the column width of all selected columns To select the standard column width: 1. Form the cells dialog box select the Border tab 4. Click OK Changing Column Width and Row Heights To quickly adjust the column width to accommodate the longest cell entry in the column. Form the format (or shortcut) menu choose Cells and select the patterns tab 3. Choose options you want 5. Click OK To shade cells with a pattern: 1. If more than one row is selected double clicking the row heading line for one row changes the tow height of all selected columns You can also use the row and column command under the Format menu to customize the column width and row height as well as to fit them to the longest or widest entry Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 94 of 208 . Form the format (or shortcut) menu choose Cells 3. In the standard width box.

Entering Database Information After you decide the on the design of the database.6. you can search for data. you can create the database by first entering the records according to the following guideline: Database Size: a database can be as large as an entire worksheet Field Name Location: the first row of your database must contain the field names.2. A list can be used as a database: you can think of a list as a simple database. Once you create a list you can you can add. 4. When performing most database tasks such as finding.6. Sorting a Database You can reorganize the data in the database alphabetically or numerically with the sort command on the data menu. For example. When you click the criteria button in the data form. You can specify up to three keys to sort a database. Microsoft Excel automatically recognizes your list as a database. Each column in a database is a field.6. Using A List to Organize Data One way to store data on a worksheet is in a list. A Data form is a dialog box that displays one complete record at time. A list is a labeled series of rows that contain similar data. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 95 of 208 . a mane that identifies the data stored in a field. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 4. Ms-Windows. sorting or subtotaling data. To use a data form your list should have column labels.Introduction to Computers. where rows are records and columns are fields. Excel changes the data form so that you can you can type in the fields is interpreted as search conditions. a list can be a listing of items with their corresponding price. 4. You can sort rows or columns in any selection and you can choose whether to sort the rows (or columns) in ascending (or descending) order.1. find. Using criteria in data form. edit or delete records by using a data form.

3. In Excel there are two types of filters: Auto filter and Advanced Filter Auto Filter To apply an auto filter: 1. On the Data menu point to Filter. which conform to this criterion Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 96 of 208 . Select an item to display only those records.6. select your first key column (if required.you can use the sort Ascending and sort Descending buttons on the standard toolbar to Quickly sort the list by first selecting a cell from the list. In the sort by list box. 3. Ms-Windows. Select a single cell in the list 2. From filter sub menu select Auto Filter. 5. This can be done by applying filters. 4. Click on one of these arrows to display a list of all unique items in the column 4. For each key column determine the order of sorting by selecting Ascending or Descending. (Excel places drop down arrows directly on the field manes (column labels of your list)) 3. Select a cell from the list 2. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual To sort a list of data: 1. Filtering a List Microsoft Excel allows you to view selected data from your lists. Click options and select one of the Option buttons to sort Rows or Columns and Click ok 6. Select the Sort command from the Data menu. it is also possible to select the second and the third key columns from the two then By list boxes) 4. Click OK or press Enter key Note: . The sort dialog box appears.Introduction to Computers.

” or “Suyama” in the Salesperson Column. To enter Custom Criteria 1. type the criteria directly below each other in separate rows. multiple criteria applied to multiple columns. Colic OK Advanced Filter Advanced filter criteria can include multiple conditions applied in a single column.Introduction to Computers. For example. and conditions created as the result of a formula. the following criteria range displays the rows that contain either “Davolio. Choose custom from the drop down list. 2. Three or more conditions in a single column If you have three or more conditions for a single column. The following dialog box will be displayed. Enter the required criteria by clicking the operator drop down arrow 3. Ms-Windows.” “Buchanan. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Using Custom Criteria with Auto Filter Usually you need to filter more complex criteria than those which are listed directly under the drop down arrows. Sales person Davolio Buchanan Suyama Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 97 of 208 .

Type produce Salesperson Devolio Sales >1000 Note: You can also specify multiple conditions for different columns and display only the rows that meet all the conditions by using the Auto Filter command on the Data menu. To find data that meets either a condition in one column or a condition in another column. 5000. “Davolio” in the Salesperson column. and sales values greater than $1. Ms-Windows. enter the criteria in different rows of the criteria range. “Davolio” in the Salesperson column. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 98 of 208 Sales person Sales . the following criteria range displays the rows that contain Davolio in the Salesperson column and sales values greater than $3. or the rows for salesperson Buchanan with sales values greater than $1.000. the following criteria range displays all rows that contain “produce” in the Type column. or sales values greater than $1. type the criteria in separate rows. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Criteria from two or mote columns To find data that meets one condition in two or more columns.000. Type Produce Devolio >1000 To find rows that meet one of two conditions in one column and one of two conditions in another column.000. For example. enter all the criteria in the same row of the criteria range.Introduction to Computers. For example. the following criteria range displays all rows that contain either “produce “ in the Type column. For example.

or to find specific records based on a given criterion. Excel displays the Data form. Click the Copy to Another Location button if you want the filtered list to be displayed in a different cell address. Click a cell in the list you want to add the record to. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Sales person Devolio Buchanan To practice Advanced Filter method: Sales >3000 >1500 1. On the Data menu click Form. To do so click the Collapse Dialog button in the Copy to box and select blank cells. In the List Range box specify the range of cells from the list for which the criteria will be applied 4.4. Add a record to a list by using a data form: 1. Click New (to add a new record) Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 99 of 208 . Define the criteria in a blank cell of the worksheet. The advanced filter dialog box will be displayed 3. Data Forms A data form is a dialog box that provides a simple way to view.6. add. click the Collapse Dialog button and select the criteria range 5. In the Criteria Range box. either by typing the fields or by coping from the list and setting arguments accordingly 2. change.Introduction to Computers. 2. 4. The data form displays all fields of a record 3. Choose Advanced Filter from the Filter submenu under the Data menu. Ms-Windows. and delete records in your database.

A formula always begins with an equal sign (=) Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 100 of 208 . press ENTER or add the record. the formula is not calculated until you press ENTER or click Close to add the record. Ms-Windows. or functions. and comparison on worksheet values. The label cannot be changed in the data form. A formula can include any of the following elements: operators. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 4. multiplication. click the Criteria button. Type the data you want to Look for in the corresponding field. press TAB. 6. 5.Introduction to Computers. Note: to find a record having a given data. When you finish adding records. click Close to add the new record and close the data form. When you finish typing data. Type the information for the new record. Notes • Fields that contain formulas display the results of the formula as a label. Formulas Entering formula is the basic technique you use to analyze data on a worksheet.7. subtraction. and click Find Next to search forward or click Find prev to search backward. • If you add a record that contains a formula. values. To move to the previous field. you can undo changes if you click Restore before you press ENTER or click Close to add the record. 4. • While you are adding a record. Cell references. With a formula you can perform operations such as addition. To move to the next field. press SHIFT+TAB. • Microsoft Excel adds the record when you move to another record or close the data form. division.

/ (division). Ms-Windows.7.<>(not equal to ) Normally when you enter a formula in a cell. <=(less than or equal to ).>. This reference does not change with the position of the cell pointer. and ∧ (exponentiation) 2. Cell References There are four types of cell references – A1.* (Multiplication).>=(greater than or equal to ). $A$1 – this type of cell reference is called Absolute Reference. Test Operators: To combine two or more text values into a single text value. Example:& .Introduction to Computers. 4. $A1. % (percentage).connects or concatenates two or more text values together 3. the result will be displayed in the cell and the formula will be displayed in the formula bar. $A$1.<. Arithmetic Operators: performs basic mathematical operations to produce numeric results Example: + (addition). $A1/A$1 – in $A1 the column letter is fixed and in A$1 the row number is fixed Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 101 of 208 . 1. Comparison Operators: compares two values and produces the logical value True or False Examples: =. A$1 A1 – this type of cell reference is called Relative Reference because it changes relative to the position pointer. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Using Operators Microsoft Excel uses three types of operators.-(Subtraction or Unary Minus).1. The “$” sign indicates tat both the row number and the column letter are fixed.

A1:D5 means cells from A1 up to D5 including A1 and D5. You can also type the name directly in the formula bar. To mane cells or range of cells... Click the enter box ( ).g. type the formula. Select the cell reference by clicking it on the formula bar 3. Select the cell that contains a reference type you want to change 2. E.g. When you are finished press Enter Cell Reference Operators There are three types of cell reference operators: Range (colon) – produces a reference to all cells between the two references inclusive. Union (Comma) – produces one reference. Intersection (Space) – produces one reference. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 102 of 208 . Ms-Windows. E. Select the cell into which you want to enter the Formula 2. which includes the two separate references E. select Define from the Name submenu on Insert menu and then type its name. To enter a formula:1. The formula appears both in the formula bar and in the cell 4. B7: D7 C6:C8 means only C7 Note: when using reference there is another way available: naming cells and range. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual To change a cell reference type: 1.D5 means the two separate cells: A1 and D5. The formula bar displays the formula and the cell displays the result. Press F4 to toggle between the four reference types 4. which is common to the two separate references. Type equal sign to activate the formula bar 3.. select the cell (s).Introduction to Computers. A1.g.

Type the arguments or type the collapse Dialog button to select the the argument in the appropriate argument boxes 5.) The argument is a series of numbers.7. you can use the Sum function. Select Functions from Insert menu (or click the paste function button on the Standard tool bar. Number2…. formulas.2. Select the cell into which you want to `paste the function 2. logical values or blank cells Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 103 of 208 . For example instead of typing =A1+A2+A3+A4. When you finish editing the formula click OK or press Enter Note: you can also type the complete formula in the formula bar Mathematical Functions Microsoft Excel provides several mathematical functions for carrying out specialized calculations quickly and easily The sum Function The sum function adds a series of numbers. The arguments must be enclosed in parenthesis. Sum ignores references to text values. Select a function from the list to display the function dialog box 4..) The function dialog box will be displayed 3. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 4. It tales the form: = Sum (Number1. performs an operation and returns a value or values. Worksheet Functions A function is a special prewritten formula that takes a value or values ( which are called Arguments). To build the formula = Sum (A1:A4) To use functions: 1. ranges or cell references that result in numbers. Ms-Windows.Introduction to Computers.

Number2…. Ms-Windows.) Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 104 of 208 . It takes the form: =Average (number1. The SQRT Function The SQRT function returns the positive square root of a number. Number2….Introduction to Computers.) It ignores blank.. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual The Auto sum button If you select a cell and click the Auto sum button Excel creates the =Sum ( ) formula and guesses which numbers you want to add. The Max Function The Min function returns the smallest value in a range. If the proposed argument is correct you can click the Auto sum button for the second time to enter the formula or else you can select the correct set of values to be added. It takes the form: = PRODUCT (Number1. Number2…. the SQRT function returns the #Num! Error value The product Function Multiplies all the numbers referenced by its arguments. It takes the form: = SQRT (Number) If the number is negative. It takes the form: =Max (Number1.) Statistical Functions The Average Functions The Average Function computes the Average of the numbers in a range by summing a series of values and then dividing by the number of values.. logical and text cells.

the function returns “pass”. labels or logical values.2.1) In the above example. functions. B2 * 0. Every conditional test must include at least one logical operator. A conditional test is an equation that compares the numbers.Introduction to Computers. value if condition is true. the greater than(>) logical operator compares the values in cells A1 and A2. otherwise it will be 10%of the amount. = If (B2<50.g. E.) Logical Functions Most logical functions use conditional test to determine whether a specified condition is true or false. value if condition is false) You can use text arguments in If functions to return text strings instead of numeric values Example: = If (B2>=50. In these cases. For example. “Pass”. the commission is calculated as 20% of the amount if the value in cell B2 is greater than 500. “Fair”.. Number2…. = If (B2>500. The Nested If Function At times you can not resolve a logical problem using only logical operators. Logical operators define the test relationship between elements of the conditional test.g. E. “Failure”. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual The Min Function The Min function returns the smallest value in a range. formulas. Good”) Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 105 of 208 . Note that the text arguments are enclosed in double quotes You can use formulas as arguments in If functions. You can use if function inside another if function to create a hierarchy of tests. The If Function = if (Conditional test. It takes the form: =Min (Number1. otherwise it returns “Fail”. “Fail” ) If the value in cell B2 is greater than 50. Ms-Windows. in the conditional test A1>A2. if (b2<70. B2 * 0.

>. If it is not less than 50 it compares it with 70 and if it is true (i. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 106 of 208 . = IF (OR (B2>50. otherwise “Good” will be returned. = IF (And (B2>50.g. <. The And. “Failure”) If the value in either B2 or C2 is greater than 50. “Pass” will be displayed. Or. The functions work in conjunction with the simplest operators: =. Otherwise “Failure” will be displayed. “Failure”) If the value in both B2 and C2 is greater than 50. >=. “Pass” will be displayed.g.. and Not functions These three additional functions help us develop compound conditional tests. C2>50). otherwise “Failure” will be displayed. E.2. E.C2>50). “pass”. Ms-Windows. the function returns.” Failure”. They have the form: =AND (logical Value1.) The not function has only one argument and it takes the form: =NOT (Logical Value) These functions are usually used with If function.1. logical value2….Introduction to Computers. “Pass”. if B2 is greater than 50 and less than 70) “Fair” will be returned. and <= The AND and OR functions can have as many as 30 logical arguments. logical value2…) =OR (logical value1.e. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual If the value of in cell B2 is less than 50.

4.8. Select any appropriate tab and set the options in the third step of the wizard.e. Ms-Windows. Charts A chart is a graphic representation of worksheet data. 4. 3. Values from worksheet cells. Creating a Chart After selecting worksheet data that you want to plot. columns. Data points are grouped into data series which are distinguished by different colors or patterns.1. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 4. In the final step (Step4 of 4) of the chart wizard specify the chart location i. A chart created on a worksheet is a graphic object called embedded chart and is saved as part of the worksheet on which it was created.. Click the chart wizard tool from the standard tool bar or select chart command from insert menu. Enter the data range and click next 5. Click finish. pie slices or other shapes in the chart. Select the type of chart you want and click next button to move to the next step. Do not select empty cells. To create an embedded chart on a worksheet with the chart wizard: 1. Microsoft Excel inserts the chart according to your choices Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 107 of 208 . select As Object In Option 7.8. Select the range of worksheet cells that contain the data you want to plot including any worksheet column or row labels that you want to use in the chart. The char dialog box appears. you can create a chart directly on a worksheet or as a separate document on its own window. or data points displayed as bars lines. 6.Introduction to Computers. 2.

8. Ms-Windows. Chart Toolbar: The tool bar that displays charting tools. area. Dot. Parts of a Chart Chart: The entire area in the chart window. including all elements of the chart such as labels. Chart Menu Bar: The menu bar that displays the name of the chart menus when a chart document is active. Plot Area: The area in which Excel plots data Data Marker: A bar. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 4. Axes. Series Formula: A formula describing a chart data series.2. picture or other symbol that marks a single data point or value Data labels: Are values of the worksheet displayed on top of the chart type which it represents Chart Data Series: A group of related values such as all the data values In a single row or column of the worksheet selection. The chart data series manes are used in legend Tick Mark: A small line that intersects an Axis and marks off a category. Scale or Chart data series. A chart can have one or more data series. chart formatting tools and the chart wizard tool. Axis: A line that serves as a major reference for plotting data in a chart Category Name: Category name corresponds to the labels for the worksheet data that are usually plotted along the X-axis. data markers. Grid Lines: Optical lines that extend from the tick marks on an Axis across the plot area to make it easier for you to view data values Chart text: Text that describes data or object in a chart Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 108 of 208 .Introduction to Computers.

To move the chart on the worksheet: • Select the chart or any chart item you want to select. Open the worksheet containing the embedded chart 2. or symbols associated with number of a chart data series and shows the chart data series name that corresponds to each data marker 4. Choose the chart type command from the chart menu 3. Select it 2.Introduction to Computers. Ms-Windows.3. Or click the arrow next to the chart type button on the chart toolbar and select the chart type you want from the list To delete an embedded chart: 1. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Legend: A key that identifies the patterns. Microsoft Excel removes the chart from the worksheet To delete a non embedded chart use the delete sheet command from the edit menu Formatting a Chart Adding and Deleting Chart Text and Axis Titles Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 109 of 208 . To change the size of the chart: • Select it and point to one of its corners when the pointer changes to a double headed arrow. drag the chart to resize it To delete an embedded chart: 1. Select the embedded char 3. From the edit or shortcut menu choose clear. Working with Chart and Chart Items To select a chart or a chart item: • Just click on the chart or chart item you want to select. Select the chart type you want. colors.8.

To add a charter title. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual You can enhance the appearance of your chart by adding the required information. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 110 of 208 . click the Chart Title box. Click the Enter box or press Enter To delete chart text: 1. click in the chart options. and then type the text you want. To add a chart title or axis title: 1. click the text on the chart menu and click where you want to insert the line break. Click somewhere else but don’t press Enter. Adding. For example. And Formatting A Chart Legend A chart legend provides a guide to the data marker in much same way that a toad map legend provides a guide to the colors and symbols used in a map.Introduction to Computers. click in appropriate box for each title and then type the text you want Note: to insert a line break in a chart title or axis title. On the chart menu. Deleting. Click the text on the chart to select it 2. 3. Click the Textbox tool on the drawing bar and type the text you want while no other text is selected 2. 4. From the Edit menu or Shortcut menu. and then press ENTER. Click inside the text 3. To add one or more axis titles. Ms-Windows. To add unattached text: 1. Make your editing 4. Click the chart to which you want to add a title 2. choose clear To edit chart text: 1. Click the text to select 2. and then type the text you want.

choose the OK button Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 111 of 208 .Introduction to Computers. To format the font of the legend text. and the pattern. and then select the options You want 4. On the Chart menu. color and weight of the borderline around the legend. To format the border and area or the legend box: 1. and then click the Legend tab 3. foreground color and background color used within the area of legend box. Select the show legend check box 4. Ms-Windows. Select the Font tab and the patterns tab independently 3. You can also click the legend to select it and choose selected legend from the Format menu or the shortcut 2. To apply all your changes and close the dialog box. click the option you want To delete legend: Select the legend and choose the Clear command from the Edit menu formatting the Chart Legend You can control the style. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual To add a legend: 1. choose the Font tab. Under placement. Click the chart to which you want to add a legend 2. Double click the legend to display the Format legend dialog box. click Chart Option.

1. highlight programs. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Chapter 5: Microsoft Access 5.Database is an organized collection of related information. The origin of DATABASE is some (Business. People run their personal business with DATABASE such as checkbook. description of set of objects. phone book. RETRIEVED and ACCESSED. • Select Database Wizard to create a new database with the help of Wizard (a feature that guides you throughout the operation) Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 112 of 208 . locations. personal etc. Mail list etc. transactions. or • Double click on the shortcut icon from your desktop.1. people. i. What is a Database? Definition: . Each of the above examples organizes information (DATABASE) in such a way that it be easily STORED. 5. Starting Microsoft Access 2003 To Start Microsoft accesses do one of the followings: • Click on the Start button.e. • Select Blank Database to create a new database. etc. and then click on Microsoft Access. The role of the database is then to provide a way to organize facts pertaining to the raised problem in such a way that the organized facts suggest the solution itself.) problem. events. Home. The problem itself may be simple or complicated which occurs regularly or happens only once.Introduction to Computers.1. Ms-Windows. Your bank for instance keeps track of your money and the Accounting department monitors your payable and receivable accounts. address book.

• Select Open an Existing Database. give it a name and click on Create button. Ms-Windows.Introduction to Computers. 5.1. then the file you want from the list to open an existing database. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Note: . you will be launched to the Microsoft Access Screen (See fig.3 below) MS – Access application Window Fig .2. The Microsoft Access 2003 Screen After opening a new or an existing database.3 The Microsoft Access application windows Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 113 of 208 .When you select one of the above options you will be prompted to name the file.

The MS. Database Objects: -are list of database tables.Introduction to Computers. Toolbar: . (See fig. Ms-Windows. clicking the table’s tab displays list of all objects of that type.3 above). For example. and the application’s menu bar. queries. Tabs: .Access has different Toolbars that are used to perform different tasks To display or hide any toolbar you want • • From view menu choose toolbars. Membership List and Membership Code tables in fig. 3 above are database objects.are tags within the same window that show different classification of the same topic. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 114 of 208 . forms or other database parts. Clicking these tabs lets you switch to a specific part of the topic.contains buttons that give you quick access to many commands and features. The name of the application and any associated document. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Application Window: -is a window that contains a running application. Database Window: -is a Window that display all database objects in the current database. For example. appear at the top of the application window. Click on the toolbar you want to display or hide.

topics.1. And clicking on the button you need help (you can also use the Help tool on the toolbar. or if you have a question about a screen icon or any tool on the toolbar. Using Help On – screen help is an important feature of MS-Access. You can get help on important commands.3.Introduction to Computers. choose Contents and Index. by clicking the question mark in the dialog box or pressing SHIFT+F1. If you have a dialog box open.4 help window Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 115 of 208 .Access Help menu or pressing F1 key. you can get context. Ms-Windows.) Getting help using help menu To get help using the Help Menu: • From the Help menu.sensitive help using the Help tool (?). This can be obtained by using the MS. (see fig.4) • Type the feature you want to get information about. The Microsoft Access Help application window appears. and features of MS – Access. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 5. Fig . • Click on the topic you want to know about and click on Display button or double-click the topic.

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual

5.2.
5.2.1.

Designing and Creating Databases
Designing a Database

In a relational database, such as those created using Microsoft Access, you store information about different subjects in separate tables. To design a database: • Determine the purpose of the database. • Determine the tables. • Determine the fields. • Determine the relationships between information.

5.2.2.

Creating a Database

When you create a Microsoft Access database, you create one file that contains the data and table structures as well as the queries, forms, reports, and other objects that make up the database. To create a database: • Click the New Database button on the toolbar, or • From the File menu, choose New database. Microsoft Access displays the New Database dialog box where you specify a name and location for the database. Note: - You can create a database on the way when you start Microsoft Access, by selecting Blank Database or Database Wizard from the Microsoft Access dialog box. (See fig.21). Table: - is a collection of data about a specific topic. Table organizes data into columns (called fields) and rows (called records). Design View: - is a window where you design and modify table’s structure.
Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM
116 of 208

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual

Datasheet View:- is a window that displays data in column and row formats. In the Datasheet View you can add, delete, append or modify your data.

5.2.3.

Creating Tables

To create a table with a Wizard: Form the Database window, click the Tables tab, and then choose the New button. In the New Table dialog box (see fig.5 below), choose the Table Wizard option and click on OK.

Fig. 5 New Table Dialog Box To create a custom designed table: • From the Database window, click the Tables tab, and then choose the New button. • From the New Table dialog box, select Design View and click on OK. The Table Design View screen appears (see fig. 6 below).

Fig. 6 Table Design view
Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM
117 of 208

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual

In the Field Name column, type the name of the first field In the Data Type column, select the data type you want by opening the list box clicking the listing button selection refer the section. Choosing Field Data Types • In the Description column, type a description of the information this field will contain. Note that, the description is optional. • Set the Filed properties for the field in the bottom part of the window, depending on your choice. • Repeat the above steps for each field in the table. To save the table: • Click the Save button on the toolbar or chose Save from the File • menu to save the table design. • Type a name for the table. • Click on OK. .

6

(About the available data types and their

Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544

JUCAVM
118 of 208

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual

The following table shows the Field Data Types available in Access: Data type Text. Use for Text and numbers, such as names and addresses, phone numbers and postal codes. A Text field can contain as many as 255 characters. Access assigns a default length of 50 characters. Memo Number Lengthy text and numbers, such as descriptive comments or explanations. A Memo field can contain up to 64,000 characters. Numerical data on which you intend to perform mathematical calculations, except calculations involving money. Set the Field Size property to define the specific Number type. AutoNumber Sequential numbers automatically inserted by Microsoft Access. Numbering begins with 1. Date/Time Dates and times. A variety of display formats is available, or you can create your own. Currency Currency values. Don’t use the Number data type for currency values because numbers to the right of the decimal may be rounded off during calculations. The Currency data type maintains a fixed number of digits to the right of the decimal. Yes/No Yes/No, True/False, On/ Off, or fields that will contain only one of two values. OLE Object Objects created in other programs using the OLE protocol that can be linked to or embedded in a Microsoft Access database through a control in a form or report.
Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM
119 of 208

• Click and hold down the mouse button in the row selector again. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 120 of 208 . click on the row above which you want to add the new field.Introduction to Computers. • Microsoft Access displays a thin horizontal bar just above the last selected row. then from the Insert menu choose Rows. Moving Fields in a Table You can recorder the fields in a table. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Adding a Field to a Table To add a field to a table: • In table Design view. To delete a field from a table: • In the table’s Design view. or choose Delete Row from the Edit menu. • Drag and drop the horizontal bar to the row just below where you want to move the fields. To move fields in a table: • In the table’s Design view. Ms-Windows. Changing field order in a table changes column order in the table’s datasheet. select the row containing the field you want to delete. then from the Insert menu choose Lookup Field and follow the dialog box instruction to add the new field. select the fields you want to move by clicking each field’s row selector. • Press the Del key. Deleting a Field from a Table You can delete a field from a table at any time. or • Click on the row above which you want to add the new field.

the first employee is automatically assigned the number “1”. In the Order Details table (see fig 7. the second employee “2” and so on. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Primary key Primary Key: . In the same way that a license plate number identifies a car. no two customers can have the same customer ID. Defining primary key To define primary key • In the table deign view.you can automatically assign sequential numbers to the records in your table by using an auto numbered field as the table’s primary key. (See fig. Types of Primary Key There are three types of primary Keys.Most table have a single. Multiple. the primary key uniquely identifies a record.field primary key.is one or more fields that uniquely identify each record in a table. but each product can be listed only once per order. In the Employees table (see fig.field primary key:.Introduction to Computers. The primary key of this table consists of two fields. Order ID and product ID. in the Customers table (see fig. auto-number and multiple-field. Single-field primary key:. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 121 of 208 . Auto number primary key: . 2.7). For example.) an order can list many products. Microsoft Access won’t allow duplicate values in this field. select the field (s) you want to assign as primary key • From the toolbar click on the Primary Key button or from Edit menu choose Primary Key. single. Microsoft Access can not accept duplicate combinations of values.7). Ms-Windows.If a table has more than one primary key field.field.7 1.

Microsoft Access prompts you to confirm the deletion. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Adding and Editing Data To add a record using a Datasheet: • If you are in Table Design View.8) by clicking on the Datasheet View button from the toolbar (Make sure to select Yes to save the design before you switch to the Datasheet). • Choose Yes to delete the record permanently. Ms-Windows. and then save the changes.Introduction to Computers. Type each field entry in the corresponding column To delete a record: • In the datasheet view. select the record you want to delete. click on the Design View button from the toolbar • From Database Window highlight the table you want to edit and click on Design button • Perform the edition you want. • Press the Del key or choose Delete from the Edit menu. Editing a Files Data Type and properties You can edit a field Data Type and properties any time you want. To do so. or • From Database Window highlight the table into which you want to enter the record and click on Open button. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 122 of 208 . switch to the Datasheet View (see fig. • If you are in Datasheet view.

Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 123 of 208 . Ms-Windows. starting inside the left edge of a cell. moving field and son on. for example. Freezing and Unfreezing Columns In a datasheet. three are often more columns than you can view in the window at one time. you can “freeze” one or more columns on the left side so that they don’t scroll off the screen. Note that Action is a variable that represents the action you performed. Multiple columns Drag across the field selectors. Drag the pointer across the cells. deleting field. such as. choose Undo< Action>. delete. Drag down the record selectors. Click the top record selector or choose Select All Records from the Edit menu. or • If you are prompted for confirmation. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Selecting Fields and Records To Select A single record Several records All records A single column Single cell Multiple cells Do this Click the recorded selector. select NO or Cancel to revert the action.Introduction to Computers. Click the field selector. Undoing last action MS – Access lets you undo most of last actions performed accidentally. To help you view your data. To undo the last action: • From the Edit menu. Click inside the left edge of the cell.

Exposed columns have a check mark next to them. • From the Format menu. To unhide columns: • From Format menu. To unfreeze column: • From the Format menu. • From the Format menu.Introduction to Computers. • Microsoft Access displays the Unhide columns dialog box. or click the field selector of the column you want to freeze. Hiding and Unhanding Columns You can temporarily hide columns in a datasheet. choose Unhide Columns. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 124 of 208 . Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual To freeze a column: • Click anywhere in the column. choose Unfreeze All Columns option. • Check the column you want to unhide and click on Close button. choose Freeze Columns. This is useful for removing extraneous data from the screen without running or rerunning a query and for copying and pasting data in specific columns: To hide columns: • Click anywhere in the column. choose Hide Columns. or click the field selector of the column you want to hide. Ms-Windows.

and then choose Ascending or Descending. which is used as filter criteria. Note: . Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 5. then by clicking on Or tab enter the next criteria and continue doing the same for the rest. Ms-Windows. • Click the Sort Ascending or Sort Descending button on the toolbar. enter each criteria in its corresponding column within the same row.Introduction to Computers. select the column on which you want to base the sort. 5. Filter by Selection or Advanced Filter/Sort) Filter by Form: . Filtering Records Using criteria you supplied. (Filter by From.1. To filter records: • In datasheet view. Organizing your Data Using Microsoft Access’s sort feature you can sort the records in Ascending or Descending order.3. To sort records: • In Datasheet view. or • From Records menu choose sort.If you want to use multiple criteria for filtering. choose Filter from the Records menu. • Select one of the Filter options. a filter can temporarily narrow your focus to a particular set of records. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 125 of 208 .Displays a datasheet where you enter the filter criteria. for AND and for OR enter the first criteria. Enter the criteria in the field column.3.

Entering Criteria Criteria is an instruction you use to tell Microsoft Access to display the records you want. click the arrow. To enter criteria: • In the Filter window. 5.For multiple criteria related with AND.Selects the records by the highlighted (selected )field.Displays window with two portions. click the Apply Filter/Sort button on the toolbar. click the first Criteria cell beneath the field for which you want to set criteria. The top portion of the window contains a field list for the underlying table or query and the lower portion displays the grid in which you specify the filter criteria. (For AND and OR relations see the notes in Filtering Records section). enter the criteria in different rows. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 126 of 208 . and then choose Ascending or Descending. You can enter criteria for on e or more fields. Ms-Windows.2. If you want to sort the filtered records. whereas for criteria related with OR. enter the criteria in the same row.3. Note:.Introduction to Computers. • Enter the criteria expression by typing it or by using the Expression Builder. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Filter by Selection:. or Choose Apply Filter/Sort from the Records menu. Enter the criteria for the fields you have included in the defined area. • To enter another expression in the same field or in another field. To apply the filter. click the sort box of the fields on which you want to base the sort. Advanced Filter /Sort:. Add the field or fields for which you want to specify criteria in the grid by doubleclicking it from the top portion of the window. move to the appropriate criteria cell and enter the expression.

3. • To relate criteria with OR enter each criteria in different rows. 5. The AND and OR Relations If you want to use multiple. To insert a row (record): • From Insert menu. • To relate criteria with AND enter all criteria you need in the same row. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 5. Deleting Column or Row To delete a column (field): • Select the column by clicking its column selector or click any where in the column • Choose Delete Column from the Edit menu.criteria to select records.Introduction to Computers. choose Column.If the criteria are related with AND unless all conditions are fulfilled the record will not be selected.3.3. choose Record. Ms-Windows. the record will be selected if at least one condition is fulfilled. 5. Note: .If the criteria are related with OR. Inserting Column or Row To insert a column (field): • Click anywhere in the column to the right of where you want the new column to be inserted. • From the Insert menu.5. Note:.4. you relate the criteria either with AND or with OR. To delete a row (record): • Select the row by clicking its row selector or click anywhere in the row Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 127 of 208 .3.

3.6. or • Select Remove Filter/Sort option from Records menu. 5. To save a filter as a query: • In the Filter window. To remove a filter: • Click the Apply Filter/Sort button 0 on the toolbar. • Type a name for the query. click the right mouse button. The query will contain the criteria and sort order you entered in the Filter window. Saving a Filter as a Query You can save a filter as a query for later use. Ms-Windows.3. Copying and Moving Microsoft Access Objects or Text To copy a database object: • In the Database window. 5. • Click on OK. Microsoft Access redisplays all the records from the underlying table or query in their original order. The new query appears in the Database window within the Queries tab. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 128 of 208 . select the object you want to copy.8.3.7.Introduction to Computers. Removing a Filter When you remove a filter from a table or form. 5. and then choose Save As Query from the shortcut menu or choose Save As Query from the File menu. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual • Choose Delete Record from Edit menu.

To print a datasheet: • Display the table. You can preview your datasheet before printing by choosing print preview from the File menu. • Click the print button on the toolbar.right and then from topto. choose Copy.3. Microsoft Access prints from left-to. • If you are copying the object into a different database.bottom. Ms-Windows.9. For example. or choose print from the File menu. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual • From the Edit menu. 5. For large datasheets. query or form datasheet. • If you intend to print selected records. choose one of the following options: • Define the number of copies you want to print • Click on OK. • In the print dialog box. select nothing. under print Range. choose paste. then the bottom three pages. Printing a Datasheet Microsoft Access prints a datasheet as it appears on the screen. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 129 of 208 . if Your datasheet is three pages wide and two pages long. close the current database and open the database into which you want to past the object. To print all the records. • From the Edit menu.Introduction to Computers. Microsoft Access prints the top three pages first.

select the object from the appropriate object list. Ms-Windows.Introduction to Computers. Specify the page numbers of the first and Last pages you want to print. • Type a new name for the object. Specific pages from your table. following Microsoft Access standard naming Conventions. Renaming a Database Object To rename a database object: • In the Database window.3.10. and then click on OK. choose Rename. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual This option All Selection Pages Prints All of the records in the table. 5. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 130 of 208 . • From the Edit menu. The selected records.

4. Maketable query. For example. Delete Query:. Update. Ms-Windows.Makes global changes to a group of records in one or more tables. change and analyze data in different ways.Adds a group of records from one or more tables to the end of one or more tables. Update Query:. Types of Queries In Microsoft Access there are six types of queries available. Append and Delete queries are called Action Queries.Introduction to Computers.Deletes a group of records from one or more tables. (Select query. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 5. Crosstab Query:. Append query and Delete query).4. Select Query:.Creates a new table from all or part of the data in one or more tables. You can also use them as the source of records for forms and reports. Append Query:. so that if you delete the wrong records. you can’t undo the operation. you can retrieve them from your backup copies. Make sure you have selected only the records you want to delete before running your query. you can raise the salaries by 5% for employees with in a certain job category. It is advisable to have backup copies of your at all times. Queries You use queries to view.Displays summarized values( Sums. Update query. The Maketable. Marketable Query:.Retrieves data from one or more tables using criteria you specify and then displays it in the order you want.1. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 131 of 208 . Once you delete records using a delete query. 5. Counts. Crosstab query. Averages and so on) from one field in a table and groups them by one set of facts listed down the left side of the datasheet and another set of facts listed across the top of the datasheet.

10 The Show Table dialog box Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 132 of 208 . or • Choose Queries from the database Objects submenu under the View menu.2. • Click the New button. or • Choose Queries from the View menu. Creating a Custom Designed Query To create a custom designed query: • In the Database window. • From New Query dialog box select Design View and click on OK. then click on OK • Follow the instructions in the Wizard dialog boxes.4.4. 5. To create a query with a Wizard: • In the Database window. • Click the New button. you can quickly create advanced queries. click the Queries Tab. Ms-Windows. • The Show Table dialog box will be displayed as follows: Fig. click the Queries Tab. • From New Query dialog box.3. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 5.Introduction to Computers. Creating a Query with a Wizard With a Query Wizard. choose the Wizard type you want.

Ms-Windows. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 133 of 208 . The query design screen will be displayed as follows: • Double-click the field you want to use in the query from the upper part of the query design screen. select the field by clicking its column selector. To select A field Do this Click the field name. (You can also double-click the name in the field list or select a field directly from the list box in the Field row on the Design Grid. then press the Del key.) A block of fields Non. • Multiple selections is possible.If you want to remove a field after you added it in the Design Grid. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual • Select the table or query you want to use and click on Add button. as described below. The whole table or Click the asterisk (*). • Close the show table dialog box. or choose Hold down the Shift key and select the first and last fields in the block. The field will be added in the Design Gird (the lower part of the query design screen). You can select and drag on field or several fields. Double-click the title bar of the field list.Introduction to Computers. Hold down the Ctrl key as you select the fields.contiguous fields All fields query Note: .

You can type an expression in several places in the Design grid. Type in A Criteria cell cell A Field cell To Specify criteria for a select. or action query. cross tab. Ms-Windows.Introduction to Computers. to execute the query. update values in a group of records. Expressions in Queries and Filters You can use expressions in queries and filters to specify criteria.4.4. (update queries only). An Update To Update records according to the results of the expression When you are designing a filter. 5. you can type an expression in a Criteria cell or a Field cell. Create a calculated field. or create query fields that are based on a calculation. • Select the query type you want to apply from the Query menu • Enter additional information you need. The table below shows where to type an expression to perform these operations. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Delete Column from the Edit menu. or • Save the query by clicking on save button and giving a name to the query. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 134 of 208 . depending on the type of query you are creating • When you finish click on Run button.

and so on.6. • Type the name of the new table in the Table Name box. or select the table from the list if you want to replace the data in the selected table with the data from the new table. • Choose OK to confirm the displayed prompt. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 5. • Click the Run button on the toolbar. choose Select from Query menu. sorting. creating calculated fields.Introduction to Computers. A new table with the selected records will be created. Creating Make table Query To create a make table query: • In the query’s Design view. 5. or choose Run from the Query menu. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 135 of 208 . Creating Select Query To create a select query: • In the Query Design View. • Refine your query by entering criteria. • When you finish run and /or save query. (Select Query is the default query). Ms-Windows.5. • Microsoft Access displays a confirmation box that tells you how many records will be pasted to the new table. choose Make-Table from Query menu. • Click on OK • Set criteria just as if you are creating a select query to select the records you want to create the table with.4.4.

• Microsoft Access displays a confirmation box that tell you how many records will be updated in the table. • Click the Tables Tab to display the list of tables. To view the results of an update query: • From the Query menu. or choose Run from the Query menu. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 136 of 208 .4. choose Select: • Click the Datasheet View button on the toolbar to see your updated records in Datasheet view. select Update from the Query menu • Set criteria just as if you are creating a select query to select the records you want to update. • Click on OK to confirm the update. use the Expression Builder or type an expression or a value to change the data. to reduce prices by 20 percent in a Cost field. and then doubleclick the name of the table you just created or click on the table and click on Open button. • Click the Database Window button or select Database Objects from view menu. to display the Database window. For example. 5.Introduction to Computers.7. • In the Update To cell for the field you want to update. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual To view table with the selected records will be created. Creating an Update Query To update records: • In the query’s Design vies. Ms-Windows. type {cost} *. • Click the Run button on the toolbar.8.

Microsoft Access adds the Append To row to the Design Grid of the Append Query window.9. the field names of the table you are appending records to in the Append To row. • Microsoft Access displays a confirmation box that tells you how many records will be added to the table. • In the Expression Builder dialog box.Introduction to Computers. • Select Build.4. • Choose OK to confirm the displayed message. type the field name for the new calculated field to be created. in the Field row. select Append from the Query menu. matching them to the fields in the Filled row. • Choose OK when you finish. then type colon (:). • Select from the list.4. To create a calculated field in a query: • In the query's Design view. or select table name from the list. or choose Run from the Query menu. • In the Append dialog box. • Set criteria just as if you are creating a select query to select the records you want to append. click the right mouse button in an empty cell. • Click the Run button on the toolbar.8. type the name of the table you want to append the records to in the Append To list box. 5. Creating an Append Query To append records to a table: • In the Query's Design view. Ms-Windows. Using a Calculated Field in a Query You can create fields in a query by using an expression to calculate values. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 5. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 137 of 208 .

and drag the fields to their new location.Introduction to Computers. click the column selectors of the fields you want to delete. Editing a Query You can modify a query or save it with a new name to create a new query. directly from the Expression Builder dialog box. For building the expression you can use fields from the Database Objects. Microsoft Access assigns are creating. • Enter the expression (formula) you want.10.in functions. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Note: . Ms-Windows. To delete fields: • In the query's Design view. drag the fields from the field list to the column in which you want them inserted in the Design grid. which may be meaningless for the field you 5. To insert fields: • In the query's Design view. To move fields: • In the query's Design view.that. names such as Expr1. numbers and other operators and constants. The displaced field and all fields to its right move to the right.4. • When you finish click on OK. • Press the Del key. or choose Delete Column from the Edit menu. • Click the column selectors again. if you don't enter a field name in the Expression Builder. • The field currently shown in that column and all fields to its right move one column to the right. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 138 of 208 . click the column selectors of the fields you want to move. Built.

Creating A Quick form To create a quick form: • In the Database window.5. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 5.Introduction to Computers.You can modify the form created using the Wizard any time you want. 5. to open other forms. print preview. displayed in the New Form dialog box. Types of Form Views Microsoft Access offers four types of form views.5. Forms Forms are used for data entry.5. Ms-Windows. 5.5. Creating A Form Using A Wizard With a Wizard. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 139 of 208 . Note:.2.3. • Click on OK. • Select one of the Quick Form options (Columnar. Design View. 5. • Click on New button • Select the table or query on which you want to base the form. click the Forms tab.1. you can quickly create a basic form that shows all the fields and records in a Form View. Datasheet View and Form View. Tabular or Datasheet). Microsoft creates the form type you selected automatically. to accept user input and then carry out an action based on that input.

Introduction to Computers. • The Form Design View will be displayed. • Click on New button • Select the table or query on which you want to base the form.4. fig. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual To create form without a Wizard: • In the Database window. Creating A Custom Designed Form To create a form without a Wizard: • In the Database window.5. 14 The Form Design View Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 140 of 208 . Follow the instructions of the Wizard's dialog boxes and perform the needed tasks 5. • Select Form Wizard from the New Form dialog box • Click on OK. • Click on New button • Select the table or query on which you want to base the form. Ms-Windows. click the Forms tab. click the Forms tab. • Select Design view from New Form dialog box • Click on OK.

5. When you finish. Click on Form View button o to view the appearance of the form. Making a Form Read-Only You can prevent data from being accidentally changed.5. Allow Deletions and Allow Additions properties to NO. enter the Validation Rule and the Validation Text properties for the selected field. • In the properties box. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 141 of 208 . or deleted from a table by setting the Allow Edits property for a form. Ms-Windows.Introduction to Computers. display the properties box for the form. If the rule is violated. inserted in. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual • Click on Field List button from the toolbar • Drag the Field you want on the Form Design View • Apply the formatting you want using the Formatting toolbar and the Toolbox Perform other tasks you want. To make a form read-only: • In the form's Design view. • Set the Allow Filter. Validating Fields and Records in Forms A Validation Rule sets limits on the values you can enter in a field. To create a validation rule for a control on a form: • Display the properties box • From the form.5. Microsoft Access displays an error message that you define in the Validation Text property. Allow Edits. select the field for which you want to set a validation rule.

5. 5.Introduction to Computers. To Edit text in a label: Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 142 of 208 . • Click where you want to place the label. • Choose the page break tool in the toolbox. Ms-Windows. display the toolbox and properties box if they are not already displayed. Adding a Label and Editing Label Text A label is a type of control you can place on your form to add information. To draw a freestanding label: • Click the label tool in the Toolbox. and then click on the form where you want a new screen or page to start. you can add a page break to start a new page n the middle of a section.5. 5. Creating a Form with multiple Screens or pages For a form used in Form view. Specifies the error message displayed when the expression in the Validation Rule property evaluates to False.7. • Type the label you want. To create a multi screen or multi page form: • In the Design view of your form. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Property Validation Rule Validation Text Description Tests data before it's stored in a table. you can add a page break to mark the start of a new screen.6. For printed forms.

• Add the new text or delete the text you want from the label. Ms-Windows. You can change the visual style of the label to give it a better look. size. such as font. Special Effect.5.Introduction to Computers. • Select the format type you want. • Display the properties box. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 143 of 208 . • Close the properties box. use the Formatting toolbar buttons. and other formats of the label. and so on. then select the option you want. To change the visual style of a label: • Click on the label. from the Formatting toolbar. and so on. For example. • Click the label again. Back Color. • If the label text doesn't fit in its box. Changing the Appearance of Text To change the text appearance • Click on the label. • Click on the Format tab in the properties box. you can resize it as you do with any other boxes. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual • Click the label you want to edit. • To change the color. • Click the option that refers to the style you want to apply. font style. 5.8. border Style. • Click on the corresponding drop-down arrow of the style you want to apply.

5. and then click on OK. Follow the instructions in the Wizard dialog boxes.Introduction to Computers. click Reports Tab. Reports Report is an effective way to present your data in a printed format.1.6. Generating a Quick Report To create a quick report: • In the Database window. To generating a report with a wizard: • • • • • In the Database window. • Microsoft Access will create the report for the table or query you have selected automatically. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 5. JUCAVM 144 of 208 Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 .6. Select the table or query on which you want to base the report. Select Report Wizard. • Select one of the two Auto Report options (Columnar or Tabular). you can display the information the way you want to see it.6. Ms-Windows. Because you have control over the size and application of everything on a report. • Click on New button. from the New Report dialog box. Generating a Report using a Wizard With a Wizard. click the Reports Tab. you can quickly create a basic report that shows all the fields and records in a table or query. 5. • Select the table or query on which you want to base the report. Click on New button.2. • Click on OK. from the New Report dialog box. or you can create a custom report that displays data from selected fields in a particular format such as mailing labels.

sorting and grouping levels. • Select the table or query on which you want to base the report. • Select Design View.6. • In the Record Source property box. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 145 of 208 . display the properties box for the form or report. Generating a Custom Designed Report To create a report without a Wizard: • In the Database window. from the New Report dialog box. • Click on Field List button from the toolbar • Drag the Field you want on the Report Design View • Apply the formatting you want using the Formatting toolbar and the Toolbox. You can add controls. • A blank report appears in Design view. To change the underlying table or query for a Form report: • In the form or report's Design view.6. To change the underlying table or query. Changing a Form or Report's Underlying Table or Query Microsoft Access stores the name of the table or query from which a form or report gets its data in the Record Source property.Introduction to Computers. then click on OK. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 5. Ms-Windows. 5. reset the Record Source property. select or type the name of a table or query. click the Reports Tab. and other design features according to your specifications.3.4. • Choose the New button.

For example.6. • Combine two or more unrelated reports in an unbound main report. • Move the subreport control to the desired location and adjust the size of the section. Creating a Sub report A report within another report is a subreport. • Open the main report in Design view. To synchronize the Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 146 of 208 . you want to make sure that it displays the records that correspond to the record in the main form or repot. To create a subreport: • Create a report that you want to use as a subreport and save it. Lining a Subform/ Subreport Control to a Main Form or Report When you use a subform or subreport. Ms-Windows. • Press F11 to display the Database window. drag the report you created to the appropriate section in the main report. Microsoft Access will set these properties automatically. then set Link Child Fields and Link Master Fields properties. drag it to the group header. In most cases. ensure that the subreport prints the correct records for each group by linking the subreport control to the main report. if necessary.Introduction to Computers.5. • If the data in the subreport is related to the data in the main report. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 5. • From the Database window. You can use sub reports to • Display summary data or detail records related to the information in a main report. to print the report the report before each group. To link the subreport to the main report Display the properties box for the subreport control.

(To cancel the selection. click inside the subform or subreport control. Ms-Windows.6. • Make changes to the design. click any where in the main form or report outside the subform or subreport control. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual records. • On the main form or report. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 147 of 208 . you specify the linking fields or controls in the main form or report and the linking fields in the subform/ subreport. • Set the Link Child Fields property to the linking fields in the Subform or subreport. To link a subform/ Subreport control to a main form or report: • In Design view of the main form or report. • Set the Link Master Fields property to the linking fields or controls in the main form or report. • Press Enter to load the changed subform or subreport. Changing the Layout of a Subform or Subreport To facilitate making changes to a sub form’s or sub report's design. To change the layout of a subform or subreport: • In Design view of the main form or report.6.click within the subform or subreport control. make sure the subform or subreport control is not selected. you can open it from the main form or report in which it was inserted.) • Double.Introduction to Computers. 5. open the Properties box for the Subform/subreport control. • Save and close the subform or subreport.

or type an expression. Fig 18 Sorting and Grouping dialog box • In the First row of the Filed/Expression column. The sorting and grouping dialog box appears. • Click the field or expression whose group properties you want to set. display the Sorting and Grouping box. • Set the group properties listed in the following table.7. Sorting and Grouping Data in Reports You can print data in a specified order. If you want to highlight or summarize certain information. from the toolbar. by clicking on the Sorting and Grouping button. in the Group properties section. you can divide data into separate groups and sort records within the groups.Introduction to Computers. • When you finish close the dialog box. select a field name. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 5. Ms-Windows. • To change the sort order. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 148 of 208 . To sort data: • In the report's Design view.6. select Descending from the Sort Order list. To group data: • Set the sort order for the data in the report as specified above.

Add or remove a group footer for the field or expression. Group Interval Keep Together Specify any interval that is valid for the values in the field or expression you're grouping on. click the selector of the field or expression you want to move.If the groups you're rearranging have headers or footers. If you group on an expression. To change sorting and grouping order: • In the Report's Design view. However. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 149 of 208 . The options you see depend on the data type of the field on which you're grouping. you see all the options: Text. you must adjust the locations of the controls in the headers and footers yourself. Determine whether Microsoft Access prints all or only part of a group on one page. • Click the selector again. footers. Data/ Time. 5. • In the Sorting and Grouping box.6.8. Microsoft Access moves the headers. Note:. and drag the row to a new location in the list.Introduction to Computers. click on the Sorting and Grouping button from the toolbar. and all the controls in them to their new positions. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Use this property Group Header Group Footer Group On To Add or remove a group header for the field or expression. Changing Sorting and Grouping Order You can change how the data in a report is sorted and grouped by changing the order in which the fields or expressions are listed in the Sorting and Grouping box. Ms-Windows. Specify how you want the values grouped. and numeric fields.

To delete a sorting or grouping field or expression: • In the Sorting and Grouping box.9. click the selector of the row where you want to insert the new field or expression. or choose Cancel to keep it. and then press the Del key. and then pass the Ins key.6. select Ascending or Descending. 5. or type an expression. To hide duplicate data: • Add a text box (bound to the field you're grouping on) to the report's detail section. Hiding Duplicate Data on a Report In grouped reports. • In the Sort Order column. • Display the properties box for the text box. Click the Selector of the field or expression you want to delete. you can display the name of each group either above the detail records in the group header or beside the detail records in the detail section. select the field you want to sort on. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 150 of 208 . • Choose OK to delete the sorting or grouping level.Introduction to Computers. • Click on Format tab of the properties box. • In the Field/ Expression column of the blank row. • Set the Hide Duplicates property to Yes. Ms-Windows. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual To insert an additional sorting or grouping field or expression: • In the Sorting and Grouping dialog box.

choose Report Header/Footer from the View menu. or vice versa. or choose sorting and Grouping from the view menu. To add or remove a page header and footer: • In Design view. To size a header or footer: • Move the pointer to the bottom or right edge of the header or footer until the pointer turns into a plus sign with an arrow at its top and bottom tips. see the section on sizing a header or footer later in this topic.If you want a page or report header but no footer.10. To add or remove a report header and footer: • In Design view. set these properties to NO. click the field name. set the Group Header or Group Footer property to Yes.6. and drag the right edge in or out to change the width. choose page Header/Footer from the View menu. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 151 of 208 . • Drag the bottom edge up or down to change the height. page. • To add a group header or footer. Note:. • In the sorting and Grouping dialog box.Introduction to Computers. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 5. Ms-Windows. To remove a group header or footer. To add or remove a group header or footer: • In Design view. and group headers and footers on a report. or type the expression for which you're creating a header or footer. click the Sorting and Grouping button on the toolbar. Adding or Removing Headers and Footers on a Report You can add or remove report.

However. you change the width of the entire form or report.11.6. Adding page Numbers to a Form or Report You can display page numbers and the total number of pages in a form or report by using the page and pages properties. 5. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual To set properties for a header or footer: • In Design view.Introduction to Computers. • Drag the pointer up or down to change the height of the section. select the header or footer. • Display the properties box if it isn't already displayed.12. change either the height or the width by placing the pointer on the bottom edge or right edge of the section. 5. Ms-Windows.right corner of the section. • Drag the pointer left or right to change the Width of the section.head cross. a form or report has only one width. To change both height and width: • To change the height and width simultaneously. To change either height or width: • In the form's or report's Design view. • Set the properties for the headset or footer.6. When you change the width of one section. Sizing Sections in a Form or Report You can increase or decrease the height of form or report sections individually. The pointer changes to an arrow. The pointer changes to a double-headed arrow. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 152 of 208 . Drag the pointer in any direction to adjust the size of the section. place the pointer in the lower.

or Use the Expression Builder to produce the results you want. to display a date such as 5. To add the current date or time to a from or report: • In the form or report's Design view. type = followed by an expression using the Now or Date function. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual To add page numbers to a form or report • In Design view. For example. type a page number expression. • In the Control Source property box.6. • Display the properties box for text box. • Use the Format property to display a date in a predefined format. to the section (usually the page header or footer) where you want the page number to appear. add a text box to the section in which you want the date or time to appear. type = Date ( ) in the Control Source property box. Adding the Current Date and Time to a Form or Report You can have Microsoft Access automatically display the date and time that is stored in the system clock on a form or report.13. • Display the properties box for the text box. or • Crate the expression by using the Expression Builder.Introduction to Computers. Ms-Windows. • In the Control Source property box.May-97. and set the Format property to Medium Date. 5. For example: = Date ( ). Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 153 of 208 . add a text box by clicking the text box button the toolbox.

Drawing Lines and Rectangles on Forms and Reports You can create controls on a form or report and then draw lines and rectangles around them. Previewing a Report When you preview a report to see how it will look on the printed gage. Continue pressing the Shift key while you draw the line. Once you have drawn it. and leave the Format property box blank.Introduction to Computers. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 154 of 208 . Ms-Windows. you can move or resize it. 5. you can choose from two views: Use print preview to check the data or to see the entire report exactly as it will be printed. horizontal or vertical lines. Note:. and then select the rectangle tool • Draw the rectangle.To draw straight. and general layout. 5. press the Shift key before you click the Line tool. display the toolbox.6. Use Sample preview to take a quick look at your report and check its font. or you can draw the lines and rectangles first and then create controls on top. For example.May -97. to display a date such as 5.15. To draw a rectangle: • In Design view of your form or report.14. by dragging the mouse and then release the mouse button. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual • Use the Format or Format$ function to display a date in a format you define in an expression. and then select the line tool • Draw the line to the desired length. "dd-mmm-yy") in the Control Source property box. type = Format (Date( ). To draw a line: • In Design view of your form or report. display the toolbox. font size.6.

To preview a report from the Database window: • Click the Reports Tab. place the pointer on the report. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 155 of 208 . or • From the File menu. • Click again to return the report to its original size. or • Click the Zoom button on the print preview toolbar to enlarge or reduce the view. and then click the mouse when the pointer turns into a magnifying glass. • Select the report you want to preview. choose print preview. • Click the preview button. To see an overall view of the report: • In print preview. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual To preview an entire report from Design view: • Click the print preview button. Choose print preview. Ms-Windows. or • From the File menu.Introduction to Computers.

There are various circumstances in which a presentation is made: teaching a class. A menu of Microsoft Office applications will appear. Otherwise. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Chapter 6: Microsoft Power Point 6. Click on Microsoft Office PowerPoint 2003 if it appears on the Start menu's top level.1. Click on Start. all other versions use Programs. PowerPoint will open. Ms-Windows. 4. 2. etc. Introduction To Power Point Microsoft PowerPoint is a software product used to perform computer-based presentations.2. The Programs menu will appear. or it may require you to open the All Programs (or Programs) menu to find it. Starting PowerPoint One easy way to start PowerPoint is to select it from the Start menu. 6. PowerPoint may appear at the top of the Start menu. explaining an organizational structure. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 156 of 208 . Depending on your Windows version and the way Windows is set up. continue to step 3. and you can skip the rest of these steps. Windows XP uses All Programs. The Start menu will appear. 1.Introduction to Computers. Move the mouse pointer to All Programs (or Programs). introducing a product to sell. Move the mouse pointer to Microsoft Office. Note The difference in wording in step 3 is due to the Windows version.

The Programs menu will appear.Introduction to Computers. Move the mouse pointer to Microsoft Office. Tip You can force PowerPoint to always appear at the top of the Start menu by "pinning" it there. 1. PowerPoint will be highlighted. Move the mouse pointer to Microsoft Office PowerPoint 2003. 5. Click on Start. PowerPoint will open and will display a new. a shortcut to PowerPoint will appear at the top of the Start menu. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 5. rightclick it and choose Pin to Start menu. Creating a Desktop Shortcut for PowerPoint If you use PowerPoint often. 6. 4. The Start menu will appear. From then on. Click on Microsoft Office PowerPoint 2003.3. A menu of Office applications will appear. 3. In step 4. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 157 of 208 . 2. you might want to put a shortcut to it on the desktop. You can double-click it to start PowerPoint instead of going through the Start menu each time. Ms-Windows. A shortcut to Microsoft PowerPoint will appear on the desktop. instead of clicking on Microsoft PowerPoint. and you'll never have to open the All Programs menu again to locate it. Hold down the Ctrl key and drag Microsoft Office Power-Point 2003 to the desktop. Move the mouse pointer to All Programs (or Programs). blank presentation. Tip You can use these steps to create a desktop shortcut for any program that is installed on the computer.

In all other Windows versions. The My Documents folder will appear. The Start menu will appear. 3. 1. and to make your screen more tidy. If there are changes. Ms-Windows. 6. see the notes following the steps. 1. you'll want to exit the program to free up the system for other tasks. you can start PowerPoint by opening that file. a Save dialog box will appear.1 Exiting PowerPoint When you're finished working with PowerPoint. Click on Start. 2. and they assume that your existing file is stored in the My Documents folder.ppt extension. Click on My Documents. PowerPoint will close. 2.Introduction to Computers. Note File stored in some other location? Open My Computer and browse for it. The following steps are for Windows XP. If you have an earlier version of Windows. Double-click on the presentation file. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 158 of 208 . PowerPoint will start. click Start and then click My Computer. In Windows XP. PowerPoint files have a . Click on Close in the upper-right corner of the PowerPoint window. double-click the My Computer icon on the desktop. Note Don't have Windows XP? Then double-click the My Documents icon on the desktop instead of performing steps 1 and 2. If there are no unsaved changes. PowerPoint will close immediately. or if your file is located somewhere else. Click on No to discard your changes. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Starting PowerPoint and Opening a Saved File If you already have a PowerPoint presentation started. and the icon matches the PowerPoint 2003 icon (orange). and that presentation will open within PowerPoint.

Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 159 of 208 . In Normal view. Thumbnail images of the slides in the presentation appear here. • 6. • Click on the Minimize button in the upper-right corner of the PowerPoint window. minimize it. Each view is useful for a different type of activity.Introduction to Computers. Ms-Windows. It's enlarged so you can work on it. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Note Notice that there are several X buttons near the upper. you'll see the following panes: • Slides pane. The button directly beneath that closes the open presentation only.right corner of the window. Normal view is the default view. PowerPoint will disappear except for its icon in the Taskbar. A single slide at a time appears here. Minimizing and Restoring PowerPoint If you don't want to close PowerPoint but simply want to move it out of the way temporarily. Understanding PowerPoint Views PowerPoint operates in several different views. Minimizing a window shrinks it down to an icon on the Taskbar. Click on the PowerPoint icon on the Taskbar. The button about one inch below those two closes the task pane. The other tab at the top of this pane is for the Outline pane. You can then click that icon to reopen—restore—the window when you're ready to use it again." • Current slide. The Power-Point window will appear again. "Organizing the Presentation Outline.4. The topmost button closes PowerPoint itself.

Changing to a Different View There are two other views: Slide Sorter and Slide Show.4.1. 4. Task pane. These notes aren't visible to the audience. The presentation outline will come to the front. 5. or to rearrange the slides more easily. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual • Notes pane. Any speaker notes you type for the slide appear here. Click on the Slide Show View button. Click on the Normal View button. You might use this for a bird's-eye view of the presentation. PowerPoint will switch to Slide Show view. Slide Show view will close and the screen will return to Slide Sorter view. Press the Esc key. Click on the Slide Sorter View button. You can also click its Close (X) button to give you more room. Click on the Outline tab. Ms-Windows. Slide Sorter view shows thumbnail images of all the presentation slides at once. Slide Show view shows fullscreen images of each slide. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 160 of 208 . • 6. 3. 1.Introduction to Computers. This pane changes depending on what you're doing. 2. PowerPoint will switch back to Normal view. PowerPoint will switch to Slide Sorter view.

You can also choose which task pane you want to see at any given moment. Ms-Windows. the correct task pane will appear automatically when needed. Then drag to the left or right to resize the task pane. Move the mouse pointer over the border between the current slide's pane and the task pane. The mouse will become a two-headed arrow. For example. the Slide Layout task pane will appear automatically. you can press Ctrl+F1. There are actually many different task panes. and the current slide will have more space available. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Working with the Task Pane The task pane is an area that appears to the right of the other PowerPoint panes. 2. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 161 of 208 .Introduction to Computers. 1. Many people prefer to work with the task pane hidden so they have more space onscreen. Most of the time. Tip Instead of steps 2 through 4. Choosing a Different Task Pane PowerPoint will often display a certain task pane based on what you're doing. The task pane will reappear. The View menu will appear. each one containing tools and options appropriate for a certain activity. Pause for a few seconds if there is a down-pointing arrow at the bottom of the menu. The task pane will disappear. You can redisplay it when you need it. Click on the View menu. Click on Task Pane. 5. The full menu will appear after a brief delay. 3. Click on the Close button on the task pane. if you select the command to change a slide's layout. 4.

) 1.Introduction to Computers. A menu will appear. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 1. 6. Moving a Toolbar You may find that the location of toolbars is inconvenient for the way you work. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 162 of 208 . Nearly all of these buttons are shortcuts to menu commands—alternatives to using the menu system. Working with Toolbars A toolbar is a collection of buttons you can click to issue commands.3.2. or it may float all by itself. PowerPoint shows both the Standard and Formatting toolbars on the same row. Click on the down-pointing arrow at the end of the Standard or Formatting toolbar. 2. 6. A toolbar may be docked (attached to other toolbars). Click on the Task Pane down arrow. Toolbars can be moved to any location on the screen that's convenient for you. Ms-Windows. Most people prefer to display these toolbars on separate rows. This causes some buttons on each toolbar to be obscured.4.4. 2. The selected task pane will appear. Click on Show Buttons on Two Rows. Click on a task pane. A list of available task panes will appear. Displaying the Standard and Formatting Toolbars on Separate Rows By default. (That's how they're shown in most of the figures in this book. The Formatting toolbar will move to a new row below the Standard toolbar.

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual

1. Move the mouse pointer over the toolbar handle (the set of dots at its left edge). The mouse pointer will change to a four-pointed arrow. 2. Drag the toolbar handle to another location on the PowerPoint window. The toolbar will move with the mouse.

Hiding or Displaying a Toolbar
There are many toolbars available in PowerPoint. Some of them appear automatically when needed; others must be displayed manually. Right-click on a toolbar. A shortcut menu appears. Click on the name of the toolbar you want to display (if it's not already checked) or hide (if it's already checked).

6.4.4. Turning off the Personalized Menus Feature
By default, the Personalized Menus feature is turned on in PowerPoint. When you open a menu, only a few of the available commands appear. PowerPoint monitors your usage, and if you've used a certain command before, it's on that short, initial list. The rest of the commands appear after a few seconds, or when you click the down arrow at the bottom of the menu. The figures in this book have this personalized menu feature turned off to avoid inconsistency between the book's pictures and your screen. To follow along more closely with the figures in this book, we recommend that you turn this feature off, too.

Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544

JUCAVM
163 of 208

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual

1. Click on Tools. The Tools menu will appear. 2. Click on Customize. The Customize dialog box will open. 3. Click on the Options tab. The Options tab will come to the front. 4. Click on the Always show full menus check box. A check will be placed in the check box. 5. Click on Close. Your new setting will be applied.

6.5. Using the AutoContent Wizard
PowerPoint contains many sample presentations that can give you a quick start. You can use these samples to learn how an effective presentation is built or as a starting place for your own. All of them can be changed to suit your needs. 1. Click on the File menu. The File menu will appear. 2. Click on the New command. The New Presentation task pane will appear. Note The New button on the toolbar starts a new, blank presentation, which is not what we want right now.= 3. Click on From AutoContent wizard in the New Presentation task pane. The AutoContent wizard will start. 4. Click on Next. The Presentation type page of the wizard will appear. 5. Click on the button for the category of presentation that you want to create. A list of presentation types will appear on the right side of the dialog box. 6. Click on a presentation type that closely matches the information that you want to use in your presentation. The presentation type will be selected. 7. Click on Next. The Presentation style page of the wizard will appear.
Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM
164 of 208

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual

8. Click on the option button for the method you will use to display the presentation. The option will be selected. Select from one of these options: 9. Click on Next. The Presentation options page of the wizard will appear. 10. Click in the Presentation title text box and type a title for your presentation. 11. Click in the Footer text box and type the text that you want to appear in the footer area at the bottom of each slide, if any. 12. Click in the Date last updated check box if you do not want to display the date when you last made updates to the presentation. (This information is found in the footer area of a slide.) The check box will be cleared. 13. Click in the Slide number check box if you do not want to show the slide number in the footer area. The check box will be cleared. 14. Click on Next. The Finish page of the wizard will appear. 15. Click on Finish. The presentation will appear in the PowerPoint window.

6.6. Starting a New Presentation using a Template
You don't need to be an artist to create a good-looking presentation, complete with a background and other images. There are several design templates bundled in PowerPoint that will be pleasing to both you and your audience. Take a look at some of the design templates from which you can choose, and see if any of them suit your needs. 1. Click on the File menu. The File menu will appear. 2. Click on the New command. The New Presentation task pane will appear. 3. Click on the From design template hyperlink. The Slide Design task pane will appear.

Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544

JUCAVM
165 of 208

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual

4. Click on a design. It will be applied to the slide, so you can see what it looks like. 5. Repeat step 4 until you find the design you want. 6. Click on the Close button for the task pane. The task pane will close.

6.7. Starting a Blank Presentation
If you are not sure what design or content you want, you might wish to start with a completely blank presentation with no text and no formatting. 1. Click on the New button on the toolbar. Previewing the Presentation Onscreen As you're working on a presentation, you may want to see how each slide will look when displayed onscreen in Slide Show view. 1. Display the slide you want to preview. 2. Click on the Slide Show View button. Note In step 2, you can also use the View, Slide Show View command or the Slide Show, View Show command, or you can just press F5. The only difference is that they all start with the first slide rather than the currently displayed one. a. Click the left mouse button to move to the next slide. Continue through the presentation. OR b. Press the Esc key to return to PowerPoint.

Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544

JUCAVM
166 of 208

The presentation file will be sent to the printer using the default print settings. 1. in case you run into a computer problem. 2. The File menu will appear. you'll want to see how you are progressing. a Zip disk. The Save As dialog box will open. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 6. Click on OK. 3.Introduction to Computers. Click on File.9. Click in the File name text box and type a name for the presentation. send the file to a printer. you'll need to save the presentation file. Working with Presentation Files Before you get too involved in developing a presentation. or a recordable CD. Remember to save the file often so that you don't lose your valuable efforts. 6. Click on the Save in drop-down list arrow and select the folder in which you want to store the file. 2. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 167 of 208 . Saving Your Presentation It can never be stressed enough that you must save your work often while you are working on a presentation. The Print dialog box will open. 3. Printing the Presentation When you want a paper copy of a presentation. Let’s just print a single copy of the presentation with each slide on a separate page. Also. You can easily preview the presentation or print it. once you've started on the presentation. 1. The folder will be selected. Then. Click on the Save button on the Standard toolbar. Click on Print.8. you may want to back up the presentation file to a floppy disk. Ms-Windows.

or you can close both at once. Click on the Close button for the presentation. The program will close. Click on the presentation file in the recently used file list. a.Introduction to Computers. You can close a presentation file without closing the PowerPoint program. Click on the Close button for the PowerPoint program. Ms-Windows. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 4. The presentation file will be stored in the designated folder. 2. you can save your changes by clicking on the Save button. and the file name will appear in the title bar of the PowerPoint window. Click on File. The presentation file will close and PowerPoint will stay open. The File menu will appear. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 168 of 208 . Opening a Recently Used Presentation PowerPoint keeps a list of the saved files you've worked with recently. OR b. This list is found at the bottom of the File menu. 1. The presentation will appear in the PowerPoint window. close the presentation file. Click on Save. Closing the Presentation When you've finished working on a presentation. Note After you've saved the presentation file the first time.

you can use the Open dialog box to select and open it. 4. The folder will be selected.10. 1. Click on the Look in drop-down list arrow and select the folder in which you want to look for the file. Note You can also open a presentation file and start PowerPoint at the same time by doubleclicking the presentation file in a Windows file management window. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Opening any Saved Presentation If the presentation you want to open does not appear at the bottom of the File menu. you can display it easily. Click the Normal View button. 1. Click on the Outline tab. 2.Introduction to Computers. 2. The presentation file will open in the PowerPoint window. Ms-Windows. Displaying Outline View Much of the activity in this chapter takes place in the Outline pane. 3. Note If the Outline tab is not already showing. Click on Open. If it does not appear in Normal view already. If any other view is in use. it will not have the word "Outline" on it. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 169 of 208 . it will be replaced by Normal. The presentation outline will appear. 6. Click on the Open button on the toolbar. The Open dialog box will appear. Instead. it will have some horizontal lines representing text. Click on the file name for the presentation.

A new slide icon will appear on a new line. which will keep your presentation organized and on track. It is a simple matter of editing the outline by changing a few words or adding a few new slides. animations. you can import it into PowerPoint. 2. Press the Enter key. see the "Sharing Outlines with Microsoft Word" section later in this chapter. Ms-Windows. Move the mouse pointer to Toolbars.1 Outlining a Presentation The most important part of a presentation is the outline. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Displaying the Outlining Toolbar 1.1. 1. an outline has already been started for you (as shown in the preceding figures). The View menu will appear. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 170 of 208 .Introduction to Computers. 3. The Outlining toolbar will appear along the left side of the PowerPoint window. Type the text that you want to appear as the title of the first slide. Note If you've created an outline in Microsoft Word. 3. A list of available toolbars will appear. To learn how. Click on View. Creating Slides in the Outline Pane If you used the AutoContent Wizard to start your presentation. Click on Outlining. The cursor will move there. If you started with a blank presentation. and transitions. make sure you have a solid foundation for your presentation. Click to the right of the slide icon. 6. 2. Before you start adding graphics. you'll need to create each new slide by adding text to the outline.

2. Demoting the line makes it part of the preceding slide. Type additional text for the slide. Promoting and Demoting Lines Once you've added the topics that you want to cover in the presentation. The new line will be demoted in importance so that it represents text on the preceding slide. you may want to change the level at which some outline items appear. 9. pressing Enter in step 3 started a new slide. 7. or press Shift+Tab. Ms-Windows. Or Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 171 of 208 . Click on the Demote button on the Outlining toolbar. The insertion point will appear in it. Note Each time you press Enter. a new line appears at the same outline level as the previous line. Type the text for the title of the second slide and press Enter. The text will be promoted to a higher outline level. The new line will be promoted in importance so that it represents a new slide title. Press the Enter key. 1. Click on the Promote button or press Shift+Tab. 6. Continue adding text until all the topics that you want to cover in the presentation appear in the outline. Since you were typing title text in step 2. Return to step 5 to type additional text. 8. a.Introduction to Computers. a. or press Tab. Click on the line that you want to promote or demote. 5. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 4. OR b. Another line on the same slide will appear for typing. Click on the Promote button on the Outlining toolbar.

Rearranging Outline Text Each paragraph in the outline is either a slide title or a bullet point on the body of a slide. Or c) Click on the Move Down button or drag the selection downward. Promoting to the highest level makes the text into slide title text on a separate slide. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual b. hold down Shift as you click on additional ones. The selection will move lower in the outline. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 172 of 208 . Click on the Demote button or press Tab. The entire slide and all its subordinate text will be selected. Alternative-1: a) Click on a slide icon. Click on the Move Up button or drag the selection upward. Only that paragraph will be selected. You can move individual paragraphs or groups of them up or down in the outline. Demoting a slide title makes it a bullet point on the previous slide. Or b) Click to the left of an individual paragraph. Ms-Windows. The text will be demoted to the next outline level. Alternative-2: a. The selection will move higher in the outline. Note To select multiple slide icons or multiple paragraphs.Introduction to Computers.

you can export it into Word and edit it there. 2. you may find it easier to create the outline in Word and then import it into PowerPoint. Exporting an Outline You can also send a PowerPoint outline to Word and save it as a Word document. Or b. Click on Slides from Outline. Ms-Windows. Display the folder in which you've stored the Word outline file. Select the slide after which the imported outline text will appear. The file will be selected. 6. Click on Send To. Click on the file that contains the outline that you want to add to the presentation. Click on File. The Insert Outline dialog box will appear. The File menu will appear. 5. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Sharing Outlines with Microsoft Word If you use the outlining feature in Microsoft Word. 1. blank presentation. 2. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 173 of 208 . Click on Insert. A new presentation with a single Title slide will appear. 4.Introduction to Computers. If you started an outline in PowerPoint. Click on Microsoft Office Word. Start a new. Importing an Outline 1. 3. a. The folder will appear in the Look in list box. The Send To submenu will appear. The Send To Microsoft Word dialog box will open. 3. The Insert menu will appear. Click on Insert.

The outline will be sent to the printer. display the items in the Outline tab that you want to print.Introduction to Computers. Click on Print. The option will appear in the list box. 1. Click on OK. Ms-Windows. 6. Click on the Outline only option. You can insert the entire presentation or just a group of slides. Printing the Outline Before you print a presentation outline. Click on File. 1. 5.11. just insert the slides from the existing presentation. it will not print. 3. if it is not selected already. If an item is collapsed (that is. Inserting Slides from another Presentation If you want to add an existing presentation to a presentation you're working on right now. 4. Use the Outlining toolbar to expand and collapse the outline. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 174 of 208 . The outline will open in Microsoft Word. you can edit or save the outline normally. 2. The display will change to Slide Sorter view. Click on the Slide Sorter View button. The Print dialog box will open. From Word. The File menu will appear. Click on the Print what drop-down list arrow and select Outline View from the list. Click on OK. hidden). Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 4.

8.12. 7. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 175 of 208 . The slides will be selected. 4. 6. Selected text appears inside a boxed background. or several words. Click on Slides from Files. Click on the slides that you want to insert into the presentation. Click on Insert. To select the entire outline.1. The insertion bar will appear in the selected location. you can make any changes you want to the outline. Click on Close. 6. Type the path and file name of the presentation that contains the slides that you want to add to the open presentation. you'll need to select the text. Editing Text Once the basic outline structure is in place.Introduction to Computers. A preview of the presentation slides will appear in the Select slides area. triple-click it. Click on Insert.2 Selecting Text Before you can edit or format text. The Insert menu will appear. 6. press Ctrl+A. 3. Here are a few tips for selecting text. Click in the space where you want the slides from the other presentation to appear. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 2. The Slide Finder dialog box will open. The Slide Finder dialog box will close. 9. The selected text can be a single letter or word. Click on Display if the slides do not appear automatically. The selected slides will be inserted into the open presentation. 5. You may need to change a few words or add a few new words. • • To select a paragraph. Ms-Windows.

Type the text that you want in the placeholder.1. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual • To select a block of text. The text will be highlighted. Adding Text to a Placeholder If you have created some slide titles in the outline with no subordinate text beneath them. Release the mouse button. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 176 of 208 . and then drag the mouse pointer to the end of the text. Click on the text in the placeholder. click and hold at the beginning of the text. 6. 2. 1. you'll notice that on the slide is a "Click to add text" placeholder. 3. 1. Type the new text. Deleting Text from a Slide The process for deleting text from a slide is identical to deleting text from the presentation outline. 2. The slide will appear in Normal view. Note Click the slide you want in the Slides or Outline pane. The selected text will be deleted and replaced with the new text. select the words that you want to replace and add a few of your own. Ms-Windows. and the cursor will appear in the text box.3 Revising Text When you need to revise items in the outline. The placeholder text will disappear. Select the text that you want to replace. Display a slide that contains a text placeholder.Introduction to Computers.

3.Introduction to Computers. Click on Edit. Click on Find Next. and then replace it with some other text. Cutting moves text to the Clipboard. the overall result is the same. A dialog box will appear stating that it is finished. a. Note Cutting and deleting are actually two different things. The Edit menu will appear. Click on Replace. or characters in a presentation. however. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 1. The text will be removed from the slide. 7. such as individual words. 2. 1. Or b. 2. 6. Type the text to be used as the replacement in the Replace with text box. phrases. 5. The text will be highlighted. Using the Replace Feature You can use the Replace feature to search for text. Click on the Cut button or press Delete. deleting simply deletes it. The text that is highlighted on the slide will be replaced with the text specified in the Replace with text box. If you do not subsequently paste the text from the Clipboard. b. Then click the OK button. Select the text that you want to delete.13. Click on Replace. Click on Find Next to skip that occurrence. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 177 of 208 . Click on Close to end the search early. Type the text that you want to locate in the Find what text box. Ms-Windows. Or b. Repeat steps 5 and 6 until all instances have been found. 4. 6. The Replace dialog box will open.

2. 3. Click on OK.14.15. The misspelled word will be corrected. and the next misspelled word will appear. 4. 6. They rely on Internet databases. Not only will the spell checker help you spot misspelled words. a. Click on Change. Ms-Windows. and the next misspelled word will appear. run the spell checker. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 6. Click on the Spelling button. The presentation will be spell checked. 1. Using the Research Tools The research tools. new in PowerPoint 2003. work best when you are connected to the Internet. but it will tell you when you repeat yourself. a confirmation dialog box will appear. The word will be selected and will appear in the Change to text box. Click on the correct spelling in the Suggestions text box. Click on Ignore. The word will be left as is. You should save the file so that the corrections are preserved. Spell Checking the Presentation Before your presentation makes its debut. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 178 of 208 .Introduction to Computers. Or b. When PowerPoint has checked the last word in the presentation. such as encyclopedias and news services.

use the Research command. The word or phrase will appear there. Using the Thesaurus The thesaurus enables you to find synonyms or antonyms for a word. 4.16. A Web browser window will display the article. Double-click on the word you want to look up. 4. Point to the desired replacement. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 6. The selected word will be replaced by the new one. The Research task pane will open. The menu will appear. Click on the down arrow.17. Click on Insert.Introduction to Computers. A drop-down arrow will appear beside it. 5. Click on Tools. Click on Research. 2. Type the word or phrase to research in the Search for box. Click on Thesaurus. The menu will appear. 1. Ms-Windows. 5. 2. Click on Tools. The Research pane will appear if it is not displayed already. It will be selected. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 179 of 208 . To find extended information about a topic. Using Other Research Tools The thesaurus is only one of Office 2003's research tools. Click on the article you want to read. 3. 3. Choose a source from the list of online reference sources. 6. A menu will appear. 1. 6.

a contiguous group of slides. 6. Working with Slides in Slide Sorter View You don't have to work with just one slide at a time. 1. The presentation slides will appear in the Slide Sorter view.18. You can easily add a new slide. Click in the space between the two slides where you want the new slide to appear. The Slide Sorter view displays all the slides as miniatures in neat rows across the screen. You can select a single slide. double-click on the slide to display it in Normal view. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 180 of 208 . Click on the Slide Sorter View button. This is a good way to see the big picture and view the progress of your presentation.Introduction to Computers.1. and delete slides. Use this view to rearrange.18. Ms-Windows. Click on New Slide on the Slide Sorter toolbar. 2. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 6. Inserting a Slide While browsing in the Slide Sorter view. The insertion bar will appear between the two slides.18. Here are a few tips for selecting slides:- 6. add. Note To add text to the new slide. 1. you'll need to select the slides with which you want to work. Selecting Slides Before you can perform certain functions with slides (such as deleting or moving). you may find a place where an extra slide is needed. or random slides.2.

Slides can be moved around to better present information with a simple drag and drop. Duplicating a Slide When you want to make an exact copy of a slide. 6. 6.18. The slide(s) will be selected. The slide will be selected.3. Moving a Slide The Slide Sorter view can also be used to reorganize slides. 1.18. The Insert menu will appear. Click and hold on the slide that you want to move. Click on Insert. An identical slide will appear just after the original slide. use the duplicate command.5. The slide will be selected. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 181 of 208 . 3. 2. 1. The duplicate slide will be selected. Here is how to delete slides that you do not want. 3. Drag the mouse to where you want to move the slide. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 6. 2. Click on Duplicate Slide.18. Ms-Windows. Deleting Slides You may find that you don't need a slide in a presentation. Release the mouse button.4. 1.Introduction to Computers. Select the slide or slides that you want to delete. Click on the slide that you want to copy. The insertion bar will appear in the selected place. The slide will appear in the new position.

" You can change to a different design template at any time. Click on the Cut button on the Standard toolbar or press the Delete key. Because the color schemes are associated with design templates. 6. The color schemes will appear for the chosen design template.\ Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 182 of 208 . Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 2.20. The slide(s) will be removed from the presentation. Click on the Color Schemes hyperlink in the Slide Design task pane. The template will be applied.Introduction to Computers. 2. Click on the Design button on the toolbar. Ms-Windows. background. Click on the desired color scheme. Click on the design template that you want to change to. Changing the Design Template A design template applies a preset font. Selecting an Alternate Color Scheme 1. 1. and placeholder arrangement to every slide in the presentation. Changing the Color Scheme Each design template comes with several different color schemes. you should make your design template choice first.19. 6. You learned how to start a new presentation using a design template "Learning About Presentations. The presentation will change to that scheme. or you can start with one of those schemes and customize it to make your own color scheme. The Slide Design task pane will appear. and then choose the color scheme. You can switch to one of its alternate schemes. color. 2.

Click on OK. Repeat steps 2 through 6 for additional colors.Introduction to Computers. 3. 1. the box will be called Background Color. 2. Ms-Windows. 1. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 183 of 208 . 3. Click on the desired color. It will be added as a new color scheme on the Slide Design task pane. The dialog box will close and the new color scheme will be applied. 4. if you chose the background color in step 2. Click on Add As Standard Scheme if you want to save this color scheme. Click on Apply. The Edit Color Scheme dialog box will open. 5. Click on Change Color. 2. It will be selected. Click on the Edit Color Schemes hyperlink. For example. you may decide to change one or more of its colors. Click on the Standard tab if it is not already displayed. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Customizing a Color Scheme After selecting a color scheme. A dialog box will appear for changing the selected item. if desired. 6. Click on the color you want to change. It will be outlined. The new color will appear in the Edit Color Scheme dialog box.

When you apply a design template. you are making changes to the Slide Master and Title Master. 5.22. 2. Click on Slide Master. Some of the formatting you can apply includes: Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 184 of 208 . because those take their design from the Title Master template).21. The Master submenu will appear. Apply text formatting to the text. 6. Changing Text Formatting You will learn how to format slide text on a single slide. Ms-Windows. You can also change those Masters manually to customize the design.Introduction to Computers. The text will be highlighted. The Slide Master view will appear. Keep reading to find out some of the changes you can make. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 6. 4. 2. 3. Click on View. You are limited only by how creative and artistic you want to be. The View menu will appear. Working with Masters The Slide Master is a template that applies to every slide in the presentation (except slides that use the Title Slide layout. 1. or changing the size. Make changes as desired. Select the text that you want to format. Click on the Close Master View button when you have finished. 6. You can do the same formatting to the text on the Slide Master or Title Master to change all the slides at once. Point to Master. such as adding bold or italic. Click on the Slide Master or Title Master to select the one you want to edit. choosing a different font. 1.

Date Area. 1. slide number. The View menu will appear. 2. 4. Click and drag a resize handle. 3. A dotted line will show the new size of the placeholder.Introduction to Computers. Click and drag the placeholder to a new location. Object Area. Working with Footers and Special Placeholders The Slide Master contains placeholder boxes for date/ time. Type text in the Footer box if you want footer text on each slide. Click in the Slide number check box if you want the slides to be numbered. Position the mouse pointer over the placeholder. Click in the don’t show on title slide check box if you want to omit all placeholders from title slides. A border will appear around the placeholder that contains resize handles. and footer.23. The Header and Footer dialog box will open. You can also turn them on or off. 2. Footer Area. These can be moved around or resized (see the preceding steps). 6. 1. 4. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 185 of 208 . Click on a placeholder. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Moving and Resizing Text Placeholders You can change the size of the Title Area. Click on View. Click on Header and Footer. 3. Ms-Windows. and Number Area placeholders. 5. The mouse pointer will become a four-headed arrow.

7. Click on the down arrow next to Background fill. 8. Click on Format.24. The footer information on the slide master will be updated. a. Then skip to step 9. Click on the date format that you want. Ms-Windows. such as Microsoft Photo Editor. the date/time does not appear. 2. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual By default. A list of color options will appear. Click on the Apply to All button. Today's date will appear in the box beneath it. Click on Update automatically to set up an automatic date/time on each slide. It will appear in the box. scanned photographs. Type today's date in the Fixed box to make it appear on each slide. 9. The Format menu will appear. The Background dialog box will open. 6. Explore your options. Applying a Slide Background You have hundreds of choices for a slide background. You can use clip art from the Microsoft Clip Organizer or that you've found on the Internet. or images you've created in a graphics program. 3. 4. 1. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 186 of 208 . Click on Background. Click on the down arrow next to the date.Introduction to Computers. Or b. even though the placeholder is turned on. That's because Fixed is the default setting. and the Fixed box is blank. A menu will appear. 6.

Or c. or you can set up fancier transitions that move between them. The background will be applied to the Slide Master. 4. the background color will change. 1. Click on Fill Effects and then select a gradient. Select the slide(s) to which you want to apply the transition effect. it does not matter which slide(s) you select. and a preview of the transition will appear if the AutoPreview check box is selected. Click on Apply to All after selecting a background. Using Slide Transitions Moving from one slide to another is called a slide transition. A specific solid color will be used. It can be a simple replacement of one slide for the next. 5. texture. A color will be used from the current color scheme. 2. The transition will be selected. 6.Introduction to Computers. Click on a placeholder color. If you want to apply it to all slides. pattern. 3. The Slide Transition task pane will appear.25. If you change color schemes. Click on More Colors and then select a color from the Background Color box. Ms-Windows. Click on Slide Show. The slide(s) will be selected. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 187 of 208 . or picture as the background. Click on a slide transition. The Slide Show menu will appear. Click on Slide Transition. Or b. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual a.

if desired. You can also create custom animations. Display the slide to which you want to apply the animation. 9. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 188 of 208 . as covered later in this chapter. Click the Sound list box arrow and select a sound to play during a slide transition. an animation moves an individual object onto or off of the screen within a slide.26. 6. Or b. Specify when the transition will occur: 8. The transition effect will play in Normal view. it will apply only to the slides you selected in step 1. Click OK to do so. The speed will appear in the list box. Ms-Windows. select the slides in Slide Sorter view.Introduction to Computers. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 5. 7. 2. PowerPoint comes with many preset animation schemes that are designed for ease of use. Click on Slide Show. Click on Slide Show. The slide will appear in Normal view. Click the Speed list box arrow and select the speed at which you want the transition to play. Note The first time you select a sound. The Slide Show menu will appear. 6. Click on Apply to All Slides if you want all slides to use this transition. Click on Play. a. The sound will appear in the list box. Applying an Animation Scheme Whereas a transition moves from one slide to another. a box may appear prompting you to install the Sound Effects feature. The transition effect will play in Slide Show view. If you don't do this. 1. If you want to apply the animation to several slides. It will be applied to all slides.

Creating Custom Animation Custom animation allows you to specify exactly what you want to animate and how it should be done.Introduction to Computers. 3. and the available slide animations will be listed. The Slide Show menu will appear. Click on Apply to All Slides if you want every slide in the presentation to use the same animation scheme. 6. The Slide Design task pane will appear. 5. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 189 of 208 . Click on an animation scheme.27. Click on Slide Show. The animation will be applied to the selected slides. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 3. The Custom Animation task pane will appear. The slide will appear in Normal view. 4. 1. 2. and then customize it. Tip You can start with an animation scheme from the preceding set of steps. the animation for it will be shown. Open the slide that contains the element that you want to animate. Click on Animation Schemes. Click on Custom Animation. Ms-Windows. If you applied an animation scheme previously.

A dialog box with a list of special effects will open. Click on More Effects. Click on the element on the slide that you want to animate. It will be applied to the object. Point to a category of effects. or a graphic object. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Adding an Animation Effect Start with a slide that does not already have any animation effects for this procedure. a bulleted list. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 190 of 208 . A menu will appear. Click on one of the effects shown on the menu. 4. Click on an effect. Ms-Windows. 6. and you are done. Click on OK when you have selected an animation effect. Note Entrance effects control how the object enters the slide. The element will be selected. Click on Add Effect on the task pane. 5. 1. A motion path is an advanced feature that enables you to specify exactly where the object travels. Emphasis effects make it do something after its entrance. A second menu will appear. This could be a title. a. Or b. The animation will be applied to the slide elements. 2. 3. Exit effects control how it leaves the slide.Introduction to Computers. You can now modify the animation.

and you can specify a sound that should play with the animation. you can enter a delay to be used with the After Previous event trigger. 3. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Modifying an Animation Do this on a slide that already has one or more animated objects. a. if it is an entrance effect. 2. 2. Select an event trigger from the Start list. For example. Select a direction from the Direction list. It will be selected. Tip You can also right-click the animation on the task pane and choose Effect Options to open a dialog box containing more choices. 1. On Click is the most common. The significance of Direction depends on the animation type. You can rearrange them on the list to make them occur in a different order. the object will enter the slide from the chosen direction. Reordering Animations Objects are animated on the slide in the order in which you created the animations for them. Select a speed from the Speed list. For example. Click on the Up button to move it up on the list.Introduction to Computers. 4. It will be selected. Or Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 191 of 208 . Ms-Windows. Click on the animation effect in the task pane. 1. Click on the animation you want to move in the task pane.

Click on Remove. Ms-Windows.28. Click on the animation you want to remove. Click on Change Title. 6. 3. 5. 4. 2. The title will appear next to Page title in the Save As dialog box. Click on Save. Publishing the Presentation in Web Format Publishing in Web format is useful when you are trying to reach an audience over a network. The main advantage of this distribution method is that the people viewing it do not need PowerPoint installed on their PCs—or even a Windows-based operating system. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual b. Click on the down arrow next to Save as type and select the type of file you want. This can include the Internet or an internal corporate intranet. The File menu will appear. This title will appear in the user's Web browser when he or she displays the presentation later. 1. Click on Save as Web Page. The Set Page Title dialog box will open. Click on the Down button to move it down on the list. It will be selected. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 192 of 208 . 7. The animation will be removed. The presentation will be saved in Web format. Removing an Animation 1. Click on File. 6. Enter the title you want in the Page title box.Introduction to Computers. Click on OK. 2. A special version of the Save As dialog box will open.

It was developed by Microsoft in 1994 and released in 1995 as a supportive package to Microsoft Windows line of operating systems. and eventually Firefox. IE did not support tabbed browsing. its usage share from 1999 to 2003-04 was around 95%. it can be used even in the older versions. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Chapter 7: Types of Web Browsers 7. According to statistics. with many software companies coming up with web browsers that challenge IE in their features and usage. by installing toolbars. 7. It is the second-most famous browser after Internet Explorer. which have some enhanced capabilities. which is the favorites icon was introduced first in IE. Firebird. 'Mozilla Firefox' was officially announced in February 2004.2. there has been a lot of competition in the market. This browser has gone through many name changes due to name clashes with other products. Initially. and more is commonly known as IE. The 'favicon'. Mozilla Firefox It is owned by Mozilla Corporation and was the result of an experimentation. They are unaware of various web browsers that are available. Microsoft occasionally releases updates to their previous versions of IE. and was later adopted by many other web browsers. was formerly called Microsoft Internet Explorer (MSIE). It was earlier named Phoenix. as there were around 100 million downloads within Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 193 of 208 . but today. People have a misconception that browsing the Internet is possible only through Internet Explorer.Introduction to Computers. This simply proves that Internet Explorer is used by the majority. Ms-Windows.1. Since then. It is presently known as Windows Internet Explorer. The latest version is Internet Explorer 8 which is a free update. Internet Explorer This is the most widely-used web browser by people around the world.

Safari supports all the functions that are available in other web browsers. 7. its source code is available.0. It has around 22% of the market share at present. there are many user-friendly features that Firefox offers.3. Session storage is also an important feature of Firefox. If you need to fill an online form with your personal information. Since the release of Firefox. Safari This is a web browser from Apple Inc.thus allowing everyone to access the code. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual a year of its release. which performs a grammar check on the typed text and gives suggestions to correct your sentence if wrong. 700 million downloads were recorded. with the help of information that is stored in your address book or Outlook. with text and web links. It has undergone many updates and version changes that were made to improve usability to the universal users. However. Until November 2008.. 'Grammar Checking' is an interesting builtin feature. Apart from these.23%. It also has features like CSS Canvas. which is compatible with Mac OS X operating system. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 194 of 208 . Ms-Windows. It supports tabbed browsing that allows the user to open multiple sites in a single window. and JavaScript support. Microsoft Windows. the market share of Safari has gone up to 8. that reads aloud everything that takes place on the screen. As it is an open source software. As of March 2009. and the iPhone OS. but was found to be more prone to vulnerabilities. and Cover Flow. LiveConnect. AutoFill is a feature that automatically does that for you. It can be used on most operating systems. which allows the user to regain access to the open tabs after he has closed the browser window.Introduction to Computers. XML 1. Safari was released by Apple in January 2003 as a public beta. the sale of Internet Explorer has gone down drastically. The Safari 4 beta release claims to have many features like VoiceOver Screen Reader. the problems were fixed in the newer versions.

only those which are exciting and user friendly will be able to survive market competition and hold on to a substantial market share. Mac OS X.4. etc. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 195 of 208 . It is also compatible with Symbian and Windows Mobile operating systems for smartphones and PDAs. which helped it rise to fame with a market share of more than 50% in the 1990s. Safari. It also has some common functions like zoom and fit-to-width. Mozilla Firefox.64 which is the latest version. download manager with BitTorrent. none of which were very successful. Ms-Windows. it has almost disappeared from the market due to strong competition from rivals like Internet Explorer. Though it is not a renowned computer web browser. it is popular as a web browser in mobile devices. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 7. It was compatible with almost every operating system. PDAs. and mouse gestures. It is compatible with many operating systems such as Solaris.5. Opera 9. tabs and sessions. Netscape Navigator/Netscape It was developed by Netscape Communications Corporation and was most popular in the 1990s. content blocking. Exceptional features were provided at the time of its release. provides an e-mail client known as the Opera Mail.Introduction to Computers. Linux. 7. and smartphones. Although there are many web browsers available and many more are likely to arrive in future. It had undergone many version changes to maintain its stake in the market. and Microsoft Windows. Opera This web browser was developed by Opera Software in 1996. Opera Mini and Opera Mobile are the browsers used in PDAs and smartphones. Since 2002. It is a well-known browser that is mainly used in Internet-activated mobile phones. The company claims that Opera is the fastest browser in the world.

Ms-Windows. Then make sure Menu Bar is checked Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 196 of 208 . Click on the Tools button on the upper right corner of the browser. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Chapter 8: How to Use Internet 8. Getting Started To launch Internet Explorer On a Windows PC. You can also click on the Start menu and go to All Programs to select Internet Explorer To turn on the Menu Bar Internet Explorer 7 does not display the Menu Bar by default. double-click on the Internet Explorer icon on your desktop. 1. 2.Introduction to Computers.1.

You can also export and import bookmarks. Navigate Backwards and Forwards The Back button lets you return to the last webpage that you visited. Click on the Reload button to start the loading process again from the beginning. allows you to see all your favorites you have saved. When displaying a webpage. You can change the home page. Each webpage will appear under a separate tab and you can simply click on the tab to access that webpage. Ms-Windows.Introduction to Computers. If you click on the downward facing triangle to the right of the button. Home Button The Home button lets you return to the home page that you set. Therefore if the webpage changes. If the webpage is taking too long to load. The URL (Universal Resource Locator) is the address of the webpage being viewed. Some URLs are case-sensitive and all have to be typed exactly. Search Engine / Search Provider You can type in a word or a phrase to search the Internet. you can update the webpage in your Reload and Stop Load Buttons browser window by clicking the Reload button with the green arrows. Tab Browsing Features The Tab Bar allows you to have multiple webpages open at once in a single window. Read the tab browsing overview. In order to save the webpage URL link for future web browsing sessions. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual URL of current webpage The Internet Explorer 7 window displays a home page upon launch. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 197 of 208 . IE transfers a copy of the webpage from the Internet onto your computer. you must save Favorites Buttons it as a bookmark by clicking on the Add Favorites button View Favorites button . Clicking on the . Putting a phrase in quotes will search for that exact phrase. Each webpage has its own unique URL. you can stop the process by clicking on the Stop button with the red X. you can see a menu of webpages you have visited. You can change the default search engine to Google or something else. including spaces or special symbols such as ~.

2. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 198 of 208 .Introduction to Computers. Using Internet Explorer 7 Overview Below is a picture of the Internet Explorer window with important components highlighted . Ms-Windows. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 8.

Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 199 of 208 .Introduction to Computers.3.g. • The Add Tab Group to Favorites feature allows users to save multiple tabbed windows into one favorite tab group. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 8. Finally. To change your home page your home page is displayed when Internet Explorer first opens or when you click the Home button. Then next to Add. For example. she can save them all at once into one group. by clicking on the Quick Tab button (also see screenshot below).4. You can choose any webpage to be your home page. Tabbed browsing overview • Tabbed browsing allows users to open multiple websites in one Internet Explorer window by clicking on the open New Tab button or pressing CTRL+T. Ms-Windows. Click on the add favorites star icon click and select Add Tab Group to Favorites. Tab Group Name. 8. Disease Pathology websites visited Sept 1). type in a name (e. • Users can preview thumbnail images of all open tabs in a single view. a user may have ten tabs open and instead of saving each tab one-by-one.

2. The Add Search Provider dialog box will appear. 5. Click yes to save your changes. Click Find More Providers. http://www. In the General tab. Ms-Windows. Click the search provider you want to add. Click OK. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 200 of 208 . click Use this webpage as your only home page. Click the down arrow to the right of the Search Options button 2. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual Option 1 1. select the Make this my default search provider check box. type in the URL you wish to be your home page (e. If you want the provider that you just added to be used by default when searching from the Address bar or search box. Click the down arrow to the right of the Home button Add or Change home page. . To add a new search provider (search engine) 1. 4. 3.g. and then click 8.wellesley.5. Click Add Provider. 4. Open Internet Explorer and go to the webpage you want to use as the home page. . Go to Tools and select Internet Options. 3. In the Add or Change Home Page dialog box. Option 2 1.Introduction to Computers. 3. under the Home page category.edu). 2. Click Apply to save your changes.

go to Tools > Internet Options. we recommend that you reset your browser settings. Click the down arrow to the right of the Search Options button. Ms-Windows. Click the Advanced tab.7. you can try returning IE7 to its default settings. 3. 1. To remove a search provider (search engine) 1.. Most users will not notice these items are gone or can easily re-enable them later. 2. 3.) 2.. Click Change Search Defaults. Select the search provider you would like to remove. Click Remove and then click OK.6. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 201 of 208 . Click the Reset. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 8. 8. So if your browser is unstable. (If your IE7 browser won't even open without crashing. your favorite bookmarks will not be erased. Open Internet Explorer. To restore default settings in order to prevent IE7 crashes Occasionally Internet Explorer may become unstable and start constantly crashing. Your add-ons will be disable and your temporary internet files and cookies will get erased. A window will appear explaining to you what restoring your settings will do to your browser. For example.Introduction to Computers. you can also right-click on your IE7 desktop icon and select Properties and then click the Advanced tab. Click Reset. button near the bottom. In Internet Explorer 7. Before you consider uninstalling and reinstalling Internet Explorer.

You will be prompted to close and reopen your browser. 3. In Internet Explorer. 1. but you cannot get through Cisco Clean Access.9. To empty the Temporary Internet Files folder (cache) Every time you visit a webpage. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 202 of 208 . 1. If this folder gets too full. You get the message: Network Error! SSL certificate REV failed [12057]. 4. Also.. Open Internet Explorer 7. under Browsing history. You should clear the cache at least once a month. Click OK."). Ms-Windows. To fix error "SSL certificate REV failed [12057]" You are on a Vista computer trying to access the Wellesley network. You may need to restart your computer. a common solution is to empty the cache. if a webpage is not loading correctly and shows an error message (such as "Range not satisfiable. Internet Explorer saves a copy of the webpage to a folder called Temporary Internet Files.Introduction to Computers. 2. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 4. click the Tools button. 8. Go to Tools > Internet Options > Advanced. click Delete. Try to log into CCA again. Go to the Security section and uncheck Check for server certificate revocation. Internet Explorer may run more slowly and behave in an unstable way. and then click Internet Options. 8. 2.. In the General tab.8.

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual

3. In the Temporary Internet Files category, click Delete files, and then click Yes. 4. Click Close, and then click OK.

8.10.

To clear the browsing history

The browsing history is a listing of all the recent websites you have visited within a set period of time (e.g. two weeks). Clearing your history list does not affect your bookmarks. 1. In Internet Explorer, click the Tools button, and then click Internet Options. 2. On the General tab, under Browsing history, click Delete. 3. In the History category, click Delete history, and then click Yes. 4. Click Close, and then click OK.

8.11.

To save a picture from a webpage

1. In Internet Explorer, using the mouse, right-click the picture you want to save. 2. Click Save Picture As. 3. In the Save Picture dialog box, browse to the folder where you want to save the file, and then click Save.

8.12.

To save a webpage onto your computer

Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544

JUCAVM
203 of 208

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual

1. In Internet Explorer, go to the webpage you want to save. Click the Page button and then click Save As.

2. Navigate to the folder in which you want to save the webpage. 3. In the File name box, type a name for the webpage. 4. In the Save as type box, pick one of the following from the drop down menu:
o

Webpage, complete: To save all of the files needed to display this webpage, including graphics, frames, and style sheets, select Webpage, complete. This option saves each file in its original format. Webpage, HTML only: To save just the current HTML webpage, click Webpage, HTML only. This option does not save individual files of images, sounds, or video onto your computer. But it does save all the HTML code information that would preserve formatting, text, hyperlinks, and the pathways to images, sounds, and video.

o

o

Web Archive, single file: To save all of the information needed to display this webpage in a single file, click Web Archive, single file. This option saves a snapshot of the current webpage. This option is available only if you have installed Outlook Express 5 or later. Text File: To save just the text from the current webpage, click Text File. This option saves the information on the webpage in text format.

o

5. Then click Save.

8.13.

To open the webpage that you have saved

1. Launch Internet Explorer 7. Then go to the File menu and select Open.
Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM
204 of 208

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual

2. Click on Browse to find and select the file you want to open. 3. Click Open and then click OK.

8.14.

To make WebPages load without images or sounds

Loading a webpage with no images or sounds can speed up the time that it takes the webpage to load. 1. In Internet Explorer, click the Tools button, and then click Internet Options. 2. Click the Advanced tab. 3. In the Settings section, under Multimedia, uncheck the boxes next to Play sounds in webpages and Show pictures. Click OK. Notes: To view one image without downloading the other images, right-click on the selected image and then click on Show Picture.

8.15.

Bookmarks

Bookmarks provide a permanent and easy way to remember your favorite webpages. They are only deleted when you delete them, not when you quit Internet Explorer To create bookmarks (favorites) 1. Go to the webpage you want to bookmark. 2. Click on the Add to Favorites icon 3. Then click on Add to Favorites. 4. Give the webpage a name (e.g. American Revolution Prints) or keep its original name.
Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM
205 of 208

or go to the Favorites menu.

Introduction to Computers, Ms-Windows, Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual

5. Select the folder you would like the bookmark to reside in. 6. Click Add.
To view and use bookmarks (favorites)

1. In Internet Explorer, click click on the View Favorites button toolbar.)

and select

Favorites. (Another option is to click on the Favorites menu in the main 2. From that list, click on the bookmark of the webpage you want to see.
To organize your bookmarks (favorites)

Internet Explorer lets you arrange your bookmarks in folders and change the order in which they appear. You can also rename and delete your bookmarks. 1. In Internet Explorer, click on the Favorites menu and select Organize Favorites. 2. The Organize Favorites window will let you create folders and place bookmarks in those folders by using the New Folder and Move buttons. You can delete and rename existing bookmarks by using the Delete and Rename buttons. Dragging bookmarks around within the display window will change the order in which they appear. 3. Click Close to save your changes. Note: In the Favorites menu itself you may also drag bookmarks around to change the order in which they appear or to move them into folders.

Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544

JUCAVM
206 of 208

In most browsers. Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 207 of 208 . . do the following: 1. Under Import from a File or Address. Under Choose an action to perform. Detailed instructions for backing up your bookmarks are available for specific browsers such as Netscape. In Internet Explorer. select Browse. Ms-Windows. In the Import/Export Wizard. To export bookmarks (favorites) out of Internet Explorer 7 . Safari. In Internet Explorer. you must have your bookmarks exported from your old web browser. 4. The Import/Export Wizard will open up. select Import Favorites. and older versions of Internet Explorer. this is done by saving all your bookmarks into a file (you can name it whatever you want. Click Next. Firefox. Click Next. 6. Clicking Favorites will export all your bookmarks.g. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual To import bookmarks (favorites) into Internet Explorer 7 First. 2. 5. Under Choose an action to perform. Click Finish. 4. Click Next. 7. select Export Favorites. 2. Click Next. click the Add to Favorites button Import and Export. 3. bookmarks. click Next. After you have created a bookmarks file. Find and select your bookmarks file (e. Then select which folder you want to export. click the Add to Favorites button Import and Export. and then click 1. You have successfully imported your bookmarks. Select the folder where you would like to place the imported favorites. but it is usually called bookmarks.html) and then click Next.html). and then click 3.Introduction to Computers.

follow the directions on Bookmarks.htm (you can also name it something else if you want). 7. To import your bookmarks into a different browser such as Firefox.Introduction to Computers. Restoring Computer Center & ICT Division 307 0471-118107 or 0471-118544 JUCAVM 208 of 208 . Click OK. which will be in a file named bookmark. Ms-Windows. or an older version of Internet Explorer. Click on Browse to choose where you want to save your bookmarks. Office Application & Internet Explorer Training Manual 5. 6. Safari. this webpage. Click Next. under the heading. Click Finish.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful